Technical
Publications
5178823-100
Revision 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
sm
Service Manual
do not duplicate
CopyrightE2006–2007 by General Electric Co.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
CONVENTIONS FOR THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
USEFUL LINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
CHAPTER 1 – INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
2
2-1
2-1-1
2-1-2
2-1-3
2-1-4
2-1-5
2-2
2-3
2-4
INSTALLATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Hardware Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP XW8400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP XW8200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common items to the workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional ”Direct Connect” Ethernet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Software Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation / re–installation flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
18
18
18
19
22
22
24
24
25
3
3-1
3-2
NEW SYSTEM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New system installation flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
26
27
4
ADD NEW SCSI OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
5
ADD NEW APPLICATION (SOFTWARE OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
6
AW SOFTWARE RE–INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
7
LOAD FROM COLD: O.S. AND AW SOFTWARE RE–INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . .
32
8
DEMO EXAMS INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
9
SECOND MONITOR UPGRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
10
PX PATCH (RE)INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
11
INSTALLATION JOB CARDS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD IST 001 – HARDWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD IST 002 INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD IST 003 – UTILITIES CONFIGURATION WITH THE CSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD IST 004 – EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICE OPTION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD IST 005 – APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE OPTIONS INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD IST 006 – POSTSCRIPT AND DICOM PRINTERS INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD IST 007 – NETWORK CONFIGURATION ON IMAGE SOURCES . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD IST 008 – INSITE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD IST 009 – TURNOVER TO THE CUSTOMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD IST 010 – AW APPLICATION SOFTWARE RELOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD IST 011 – LOAD FROM COLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
35
47
73
91
93
107
115
117
131
145
155
3
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD IST 012 – ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION DEMO EXAMS REINSTALLATION . 173
CHAPTER 2 – UPGRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
1
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
2
TOOLS REQUIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4
PREREQUISITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5
PATIENT IMAGE RESTORE PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
6
UPGRADE GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
7
OLD SYSTEM, IMAGE FILES DELETION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
8
8-1
8-2
8-3
OLD HARDWARE RETURN PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Procedure for Americas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Procedure for ASIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Procedure for Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
RESTORE CAPABILITY PROCEDURE FOR AW3.1/AW4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
10
RESTORE CAPABILITY PROCEDURE FOR AW4.1’S / AW4.2’S / AW4.3 . . . . . . . 182
180
181
181
182
CHAPTER 3 – COMMON PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
1
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
2
2-1
2-1-1
2-1-2
2-1-3
2-1-4
2-1-5
2-1-6
2-1-7
2-1-8
2-1-9
2-1-10
2-1-11
2-1-12
2-1-13
2-1-14
2-1-15
2-1-16
2-1-17
2-1-18
2-1-19
COMMON PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic LINUX Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boot Advantage Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Login as sdc on Advantage Workstation (windowing system not running) . . . . . . .
Find out what ‘true’ user you currently are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Become sdc user after successful login as another user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Become root user after successful login as another user (locally or remote) . . . . .
Shutdown System –– from Login Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Login as root on Advantage Workstation (windowing system not running) . . . . . . .
Remote Login to Advantage Workstation from a Remote Station (General Case)
Remote Login as root on Advantage Workstation (from a Remote Station) . . . . . .
Remote Login as sdc on Advantage Workstation (from a Remote Station) . . . . . .
Find the Internet, Ethernet, and Broadcast Address, Netmask Value and ... . . . . .
Shutdown and Reboot Advantage Workstation Locally or Remotely from ... . . . . .
Shutdown and Reboot Advantage Workstation Locally (i.e. no input from ... . . . . .
Shutdown and Reboot Advantage Workstation Locally –– Workstation “Hard ... .
Changing the ”USER” Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Commands for Controlling Printer (Filming) Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Host Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host Identification (license ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
183
183
183
183
184
184
184
184
184
184
185
185
185
185
186
186
186
186
187
187
187
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2-1-20
2-1-21
2-1-22
2-1-23
2-1-24
2-1-25
2-1-26
2-2
2-2-1
2-2-2
2-2-3
2-3
2-3-1
2-3-2
2-3-3
2-3-4
2-3-5
2-3-6
2-4
2-4-1
2-4-2
2-4-3
2-4-4
2-4-5
2-5
2-6
2-6-1
2-7
2-7-1
2-7-2
2-7-3
Using the ”man” Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Netmasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reconfiguring the Advantage Workstation (Removing all Current Hostname, ... .
Changing the Internet Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Systems Checks –– Windowing System not Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check for SCSI Devices Recognized by the Workstation during Boot . . . . . . . . . .
Restart Advantage Workstation Application from the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantage Workstation OK, no one logged in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantage Workstation OK, sdc logged in BUT application is not running . . . . . . .
Advantage Workstation OK, someone else logged in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shutdown Advantage Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windowing system not running –– login prompt displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantage Workstation running –– Normal Shutdown (including computer ... . . .
Advantage Workstation running –– Stop application only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantage Workstation not running and Windowing system running . . . . . . . . . . .
AW not running and windowing system running ––– Kill Application locally . . . . . .
AW application up, down or blocked and Windowing system blocked –––... . . . . .
Advantage Workstation and Site Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying or saving Advantage Workstation Site Configuration Information . . . . .
Copy text files in DOS format onto a diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Advantage Workstation Site Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a KICKSTART diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Configuration Diskette or USB key Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADOBE ACROBAT Reader Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADVANTAGE WOKSTATION Database Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recover Database from the Root Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the SMPTE Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the SMPTE pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Monitor Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Display a Coloured SMPTE Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
187
188
188
189
189
189
190
190
190
190
190
190
190
191
191
191
191
191
192
192
192
193
193
193
193
193
194
195
195
196
197
3
3-1
3-2
ON–LINE DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Access to the Operator’s documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Access to Service documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
CHAPTER 4 – TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
1
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
2
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE HP XW8400 AND XW8200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
3
TROUBLESHOOTING JOB CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
JOB CARD TSG 001 – INITIALIZATION PHASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
JOB CARD TSG 002 – APPLICATION IS RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
5
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD TSG 003 – FILES SYSTEM CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD TSG 004 – REFORMATTING AND/OR REPARTITIONING DISKS . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD TSG 005 – USING HP DIAGNOSTICS TOOL CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD TSG 006 – TROUBLESHOOTING PHYSICAL NETWORK PROBLEMS . . . . .
JOB CARD TSG 007 – USING AN USB KEY FOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD TSG 008 – CREATE A KICKSTART DISKETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD TSG 009 – LOGFILES INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD TSG 010 – INFORMATION ABOUT RUNNING PROCESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD TSG 011 – COMMON SERVICE DESKTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOB CARD TSG 012 – CREATE A FLASH DISKETTE FOR BIOS AND FIRMWARE . . . . .
213
219
223
231
233
235
237
243
247
255
CHAPTER 5 – DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
1
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
2
TOOLS REQUIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
3
PREREQUISITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
5
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP Service Manual disassembly/reassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer box replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU box swap. Do not leave on site the following items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU box swap. Fill up the new CE rating plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fill up the new ICD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send back the defective unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
261
262
262
263
265
265
266
266
CHAPTER 6 – RENEWAL PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
CHAPTER 7 – FILMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
1
INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
2
2-1
2-2
TROUBLE SHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Laser Imager Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Error and Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
3
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
CHECKS AND UTILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utility Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing and using the log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Print AET of your AW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Older DICOM Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
278
278
278
281
281
282
CHAPTER 8 – OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
1
DICOM OPTICAL DISK DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
6
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
Physical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maxoptix MOD Drive Physical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sony SMO–S551–SD MOD Drive Physical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dicom MOD Software Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
De–installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running MOD Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
284
285
285
286
286
286
2
2-1
2-2
ADD SECOND MONITOR OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Add 2nd Flat Panel LCD Color Landscape (1L1 >>> 2L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Removing the 2nd Monitor from an Installed System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
3
3-1
3-2
MEMORY ADD–ON OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
XW8400 Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
XW8200 Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4
DVD–RAM OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
5
VOLUME VIEWER APPLICATIONS PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
6
REPORTING TOOL PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
7
CT AND FUSION APPLICATIONS PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
8
MR APPLICATIONS PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
9
X–RAY APPLICATIONS PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
10
PET AND NETWORKING PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
11
OTHER SOFTWARE OPTIONS PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
12
INSITE OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
13
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
COLOR PRINTER OPTION (CODONICS NP–1600 M OR MD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing the Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Printer Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Paper Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
296
296
297
300
300
301
302
302
14
14-1
14-2
14-3
GREYSCALE PRINTER OPTION (LEXMARK OPTRA S1650) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
De–Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
304
304
304
306
CHAPTER 9 – NETWORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
1
SAMPLE NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
7
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
Basic Intra–Suite Network: MR SIGNA ADVANTAGE, MR HORIZON . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Intra–Suite Network: CT–HLA, CT–HSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Network: CT SYTEC, PACE, PROSPEED – MR VECTRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Network: DRS, DLX (without Digital Gateway) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Workstations Network with no Router – DLX with a Fast Ethernet Gateway .
Workstations Subnetworks with one Router –DLX with a Digital Gateway and ... . .
Advantage Workstation within the MR SUITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantage Workstation within the CT SUITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantage Workstation on the LOCAL BACKBONE (Gateway in CT Operator ... .
Advantage Workstation within the MR, CT and LOCAL SUITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIXED Sources Configuration Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
307
307
308
308
308
309
310
311
312
312
313
314
2
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
AW LINUX HOST DECLARATION ON IMAGE SOURCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AW4.4 Declaration on UNIX Based Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AW4.4 Declaration on GENESIS Based Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AW4.4 Declaration on non Genesis Based Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AW4.4 Host Declaration on CT9800 Image Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AW4.4 Host Declaration on Dicom Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AW4.4 Declaration on DRS / DLX Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AW4.4 Declaration on YMS Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
315
315
315
315
316
316
316
317
3
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
NETWORKING OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing Table Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency procedure: Forcing the network speed and mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More information on subnetworks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Netmask Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
320
320
321
323
325
326
CHAPTER 10 – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
1
TO BE DONE ONCE A YEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
2
TO BE DONE DURING THE IMAGE SOURCE MAINTENANCE OR ONCE ... . . . 328
3
TO BE DONE EVERY 5 YEARS: SYSTEM BATTERY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . 330
APPENDIX A – GLOSSARY & LINUX COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
1
GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
2
LINUX COMMAND SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
8
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS
THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD
This Service Manual is available in English only.
If a customer’s service provider requires a language other than English, it is the customer’s
responsibility to provide translation services.
Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or patient from
electric shock, mechanical or other hazards.
ATTENTION
NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENIR SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS
TANT QUE LE MANUEL DE SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS
Ce Manuel de Service n’est disponible qu’en anglais.
Si le technicien du client a besoin de ce manuel dans une autre langue que l’anglais, c’est au client
qu’il incombe de le faire traduire.
Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l’opérateur ou le patient des
blessures dues à des dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
ATENCION
NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO,
SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
Este Manual de Servicio sólo existe en inglés.
Si algún proveedor de servicios ajeno a General Electric Medical Systems solicita un idioma que no
sea el inglés, es responsabilidad del cliente ofrecer un servicio de traducción.
La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de servicios, el operador o
el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas eléctricas, mecánicas o de otra naturaleza.
WARNUNG
ERSUCHEN SIE NICHT DIESE ANLAGE ZU WARTEN,
OHNE DIESE SERVICEANLEITUNG GELESEN UND VERSTANDEN ZU HABEN.
Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.
Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es Aufgabe des Kunden für eine
entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des Kundendiensttechnikers, des
Bedieners oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge, mechanische oder sonstige Gefahren kommen.
9
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
ATENÇAO
NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA
Este Manual de Assistência Técnica só se encontra disponível em Inglês.
Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica, que não a General Electric Medical Systems,
solicitar estes manuais noutro idioma, é da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os serviços de
tradução.
O não cumprimento deste aviso pode por em perigo a segurança do técnico, operador ou paciente
devido a‘ choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
AVVERTENZA
SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVER
CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO
Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in inglese.
Se un addetto alla manutenzione esterno alla General Electric Medical Systems richiede il manuale in
una lingua diversa, il cliente è tenuto a provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
Non tenere conto della presente avvertenza potrebbe far compiere operazioni da cui derivino lesioni
all’addetto alla manutenzione, all’utilizzatore ed al paziente per folgorazione elettrica, per urti
meccanici od altri rischi.
10
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This Volume Share 2 / AW4.4 Service manual is to be used for the AW4.4 release running on the
HP XW8200 and XW8400 Workstation.
WARNING
VOLUME SHARE 2/AW4.4 IS 64 BITS.
IT IS NOT SUPPORTED ON THE X4000 AND XW8000 HARDWARE PLATFORMS.
Volume Share 2 is the name of the product delivered to the customer.
It can be found under 2 main configurations and is running on the new AW4.4 hardware platform :
Volume Share 2 with Volume Viewer 3 applications
Volume Share 2 without Volume Viewer 3 applications.
It is also the new platform for Seno Advantage 2.1 product.
Chapter 1: Installation
Refer first to the Flowcharts to find out which Job Card(s) you need to follow, depending on the task you want to
perform. Then follow step by step the instructions given in the mentionned Job Card(s), in order to either install a
new system and its optional devices or advanced applications, or to re–install it after a system crash or software
upgrade. Each time additional information is necessary in order to set–up an optional device, you will be warned
to get it from Chapter 8 at the corresponding Section or paragraph.
Chapter 2: Upgrades
This chapter gives information about the various proposed upgrades.
Chapter 3: Common Procedures
This chapter gives information about the various LINUX commands necessary for System Administration.
Chapter 4: Troubleshooting
This chapter gives troubleshooting information and tips to ease diagnostics of hardware and software.
Chapter 5: Disassembly/reassembly
This chapter is a link to the hardware manufacturer(s) Service manuals. It summarizes the
disassembly/reassembly procedures and gives references to the appropriate manual.
Chapter 6: Renewal Parts
Find there the necessary part number for the Field Replaceable Unit, you need to order.
Chapter 7: Filming
This chapter gives information about connection to the various validated Laser Cameras.
Chapter 8: Options
This chapter gives additional information about the optional devices and softwares. You will refer to it, in order to
check if needing first to setup a device (i.e: dip switch) before attempting to connect and declare it to the
workstation.
Chapter 9: Networking
This chapter gives additional information about networking, such as subnetworks and routers.
Chapter 10: Preventive Maintenance
This chapter gives the preventive maintenance procedures, as well as the check lists.
Appendix A: Glossary and LINUX commands
Glossary of terms used in this manual, and summary of the most usual LINUX commands.
11
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
CONVENTIONS FOR THIS MANUAL
Text and Messages in a Command Window are shown using the Courier font :
e.g : Do you want to continue [y,n,?,??,q]
Responses or commands to be typed in by the FE appear in bold characters:
e.g : ./install.aw
The Return or Enter hardkey is shown in bold characters and between brackets:
e.g : [Return] or <ENTER> or [Enter]
Keyboard hardkeys are shown in bold characters and between brackets :
e.g : <Alt> <F3>
Pull down menu selections, to be selected by the FE appear in bold characters
e.g:
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Display Configuration
Save Configuration
Command Window
Recover Database
Service Tools
AW Administration
Install package
Service Tools
Restart AW
EA3 Configuration
Exit AW
Note:
Triangles do NOT indicate an individual selection only, but rather a menu of sub–menu
selections.
USEFUL LINKS
If you run into problems during installation or maintenance of your AW, or want to check if some
additional information exists on known issues, please consult the following Web sites:
D http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com
D http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_products.asp?prod_id=16107
12
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION CONFIGURATION FORM
Complete this form at the end of installation.
Leave it attached to the site’s Service Manual. Upgrade it for each new option or software release.
MACHINE TYPE:
............................................
SERIAL NUMBER:
............................................
HOSTNAME:
............................................
IP ADDRESS:
............................................
NETMASK:
............................................
DIRECT–CONNECT IP ADDRESS:
............................................
DIRECT–CONNECT NETMASK:
............................................
ROOT PASSWORD:
............................................
SDC PASSWORD:
............................................
LICENSE ID: (use command licenseId)
............................................
HOSPITAL NAME:
............................................
SYSTEM ORDER (SO) NUMBER:
............................................
SYSTEM ID (SYSID) NUMBER:
............................................
APPLICATIONS SUPPORT TELEPHONE : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SALES SUPPORT TELEPHONE :
............................................
MISCELLANEOUS:
............................................
SOFTWARE INITIAL VERSION:
AW4.4_ . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOFTWARE UPGRADE VERSION:
............................................
AW SOFTWARE LICENSE KEY:
............................................
VOLUME VIEWER LICENSE KEY:
............................................
ADVANCED VESSEL ANALYSIS
............................................
ADVANCED LUNG ANALYSIS
............................................
CT COLONOGRAPHY LICENSE KEY:
............................................
CARDIQ LICENSE KEY:
............................................
CARDEP LICENSE KEY:
............................................
AUTOBONE LICENSE KEY:
............................................
DENTASCANPLUS LICENSE KEY:
............................................
DENTASCAN LICENSE KEY:
............................................
CT PERFUSION 2 LICENSE KEY:
............................................
CT PERFUSION 3 MULTI–ORGAN
............................................
CT PERFUSION 3 BODY LICENSE KEY:
............................................
13
INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 1 – INSTALLATION
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
INSTALLATION
CT PERFUSION 3 NEURO LICENSE KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUNCTOOL PERFORMANCE.
............................................
FUNCTOOL SPECTROSCOPY.
............................................
FUNCTOOL DIFFUSION TENSOR.
............................................
SMARTSCORE LICENSE KEY:
............................................
BMD LICENSE KEY:
............................................
CARDIQ FUNCTION LICENSE KEY:
............................................
ADVANTAGE SIM LICENSE. KEY:
............................................
PREMIUM VIEW LICENSE. KEY:
............................................
CAD–R2 LICENSE. KEY:
............................................
.................................LICENSE KEY:
............................................
.................................LICENSE KEY:
............................................
.................................LICENSE KEY:
............................................
.................................LICENSE KEY:
............................................
NETWORK HOST #1 :
Hostname: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.E. Title: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Connect IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Misc.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NETWORK HOST#2
Hostname: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.E. Title: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Connect IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Misc.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NETWORK HOST #3
Hostname: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.E. Title: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Connect IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Misc.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NETWORK HOST #4
Hostname: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.E. Title: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Connect IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Misc.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Hostname: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.E. Title: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Connect IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Misc.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NETWORK HOST #6
Hostname: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.E. Title: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Connect IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Misc.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NETWORK HOST #7
Hostname: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.E. Title: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Connect IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Misc.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NETWORK or DICOM PRINTER #1 :
Hostname: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.E. Title: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NETWORK or DICOM PRINTER #2
Hostname: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.E. Title: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NETWORK or DICOM PRINTER #3
Hostname: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.E. Title: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROUTING TABLE:
on /etc/rc5.d/S93route
route add default:
............................................
route add net:
............................................
route add net:
............................................
route add host:
............................................
route add host:
............................................
15
INSTALLATION
NETWORK HOST #5
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
INSTALLATION
REV 2
1
sm 5178823-100
INTRODUCTION
This chapter outlines the procedures to follow, in order to successfully complete 6 main different
operations. The overall flow of the six operations (see brief explanation below) is in the flowchart on
Section 2–4. Each operation is then explained in detail in the following flowcharts:
D Section 3
New System Installation.
D Section 6
Advantage Workstation software (re)installation.
D Section 7
Load From Cold: O.S. and AW Software (re)installation.
D Section 8
Demo Exams installation.
D Section 9
Add second Monitor option.
D Section 10
Px Patch Cdrom (re)installation.
So your entrance points into this chapter will be as follows:
D NEW SYSTEM INSTALLATION: You have a new system to install for the first time:
– refer to the conditions described in the VS2 / AW4.4 and Seno Advantage 2.1
Pre–Installation Manual, (PIM 5180573–100).
– refer to flowchart section 3.
D LOAD FROM WARM (AW RE–INSTALL): You have a workstation running release 4.4 of
Advantage Workstation software and you want to fully reload the release 4.4 software but not the
Operating System):
– refer to flowchart section 6.
D ADD NEW HW OR SW OPTION: You have a new option (hardware or software) to add for the first
time to an existing system running release 4.4 of Advantage Workstation software:
– refer to flowchart section 4 and section 5. Also refer to Chapter 8.
D LOAD FROM COLD (O.S. + Application software RE–INSTALL): You have an Advantage
Workstation and you want to fully reload the software of the workstation:
– refer to flowchart section 7.
D DEMO EXAMS INSTALLATION: You have an operational Advantage Workstation and you just
want to load the demo exams:
– refer to flowchart section 8.
D SECOND MONITOR UPGRADE OPTION: You have a second monitor to add to an Advantage
Workstation system :
Note:
This step is not to be done for a new system delivered with 2 monitors.
– refer to flowchart section 9.
– refer to Chapter 8.
D Px PATCH CDROM (RE)INSTALLATION: You have a Px Patch Cdrom to (re)install (where ’x’ is
the number describing the revision of patch e.g.: P1 , P2, Pn).
– refer to flowchart section 10.
16
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
2
sm 5178823-100
INSTALLATION GUIDE
WARNING
WARNING
Illustration 1 –
AW4.4 CANNOT INSTALL ON THE HP X4000 OR XW8000 WORKSTATIONS OF
THE INSTALLED BASE, WHICH ARE NOT 64 BITS COMPATIBLE.
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION HAS UNSHIELDED MONITORS. PLACING THE
CARTONS CONTAINING THE MONITORS OR THE UNPACKED WORKSTATION
NEAR THE MR MAGNET (INSIDE THE 1.3 GAUSS LINE) WILL PERMANENTLY
DAMAGE THE MONITORS AND POTENTIALLY VOID THE WARRANTY.
Advantage Workstation HP XW8400 Basic Overview
Illustration 2 –
Advantage Workstation HP XW8200 Basic Overview
17
INSTALLATION
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
INSTALLATION
REV 2
2-1
sm 5178823-100
Required Hardware Environment
2-1-1 HP XW8400
See illustration 1.
HP XW8400 Workstation hardware comprising:
D 2 x 3 GHz CPU modules on Mother board.
D RAM 4096 MB (4 x 1024 MB modules).
D One internal 73 GByte SAS 15000 rpm disk for System files.
D Two internal 146 GByte SAS 15000 rpm disks for Images files.
D One 3 1/2” floppy disk drive.
D One Internal DVD/CD–R writer drive.
D Power cables, connectors, internal speaker, keyboard, mouse and pad.
D One additional Single Port Gigabit PCI Ethernet board .
D One NVIDIA 285NVS 128 MB Graphic board.
D One DVI–D double output Y Adapter cable (connect Master monitor to connector labeled 1).
WARNING
USE HE DVI/DVI CABLE DELIVERED WITH THE NEC 1980SXI AND NEC 1990SXI
LCD MONITORS TO CONNECT TO AW. DO NOT USE THE DVI/VGA CABLE ALSO
DELIVERED WITH THE MONITOR.
D One LSI 20320 Ultra 320 SCSI PCI board is needed to support the Installed Base SCSI Dicom
MOD from upgraded systems. It shall be ordered (CAT NR= M81501SC ) and installed into the
XW8400 box at installation. See chapter 1, IST004.
2-1-2 HP XW8200
See illustration 2.
HP XW8200 Workstation hardware comprising:
D 2 x 3.4GHz CPU modules on Mother board.
D 2GB DDR–2 RAM (2 x 1GB modules).
D One internal SCSI 36 GByte disk 15000 rpm for System files.
D Two internal SCSI 73 GByte disks 15000 rpm for Images files.
D One 3 1/2” floppy disk drive.
D One Internal Combo DVD/CD–R writer drive.
D Power cables, connectors, internal speaker, USB keyboard, USB mouse and pad.
D One additional Single Port Gigabit PCI Ethernet board.
D One LSI 20320 Ultra 320 SCSI PCI board.
D One NVIDIA 280NVS 64 MB or 285NVS 128 MB Graphic board.
18
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
sm 5178823-100
D One double output Y Adapter cable (connect Master monitor to connector labeled 1).
2-1-3 Common items to the workstations
D RJ45 Ethernet connection.
D External Dicom MOD drive 5.2GB option (Chapter 8 section 7).
2-1-3-1NON–SCSI OPTIONS (PERIPHERALS):
D Color Printer connected to network (DIA, see Chapter 8).
D Greyscale Printer connected to network (DIA, see Chapter 8).
D InSite option (see Chapter 8).
2-1-3-2
MONITOR CONFIGURATIONS are:
CRT monitors are no longer supported with AW4.4 workstations
CAUTION
D One or two NEC Flat Panel Color LCD Landscape monitor(s).
(to be used in a magnetic field up to 10 Gauss maximum).
D Cables for monitors.
Note:
Refer to the Color Graphic Display documentation, delivered with the monitors, for more
information about monitor settings and adjustments.
Illustration 3 –
NEC 1980 / 1990SXi 1K Landscape LCD Monitor
RESET/
ROTATE
OSD
INPUT selector
INPUT selector
UP/
DOWN
OSD
EXIT
<
>
+
–
SELECT 1–2 RESET/OSM
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
INPUT
EXIT
LEFT/ RIGHT OSD
Front View
NEC 1980SXi
NEC 1880SX
Note:
Front View
NEC 1990SXi
Make sure that the video cable is connected to input INPUT 1/DVI (XW8400 ; XW8200) at the
rear of the monitor.
Refer to Job Card IST002 Section 5, to set the monitor auto–adjust to OFF.
19
INSTALLATION
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
INSTALLATION
Illustration 4 –
HPXW8400 with 1K NEC 1990SXi LCD Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration
XW8400 REAR VIEW
INPUT 1/ DVI
DVI–D / DVI–D
video cable
INPUT1 / DVI
(MASTER)
DVI–D / DVI–D
video cable
2
CAUTION : DO NOT USE THE DVI /
VGA CABLE ALSO DELIVERED
WITH THE NEC MONITOR.
USE THE DVI–D / DVI–D CABLE AND
THE Y ADAPTER CABLE WITH THE
NEC 1980SXI MONITOR.
Illustration 5 –
LEFT MONITOR
NEC 1980SXI FLAT PANEL
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
RIGHT MONITOR
NEC 1980SXI FLAT PANEL
1
DOUBLE DVI–D Y
ADAPTER CABLE
Note:
AW4.4 workstations are only delivered with
LCD monitors configuration.
HPXW8200 with 1K NEC 1980SXi LCD Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration
Prior to April 2006, the AW workstations were delivered with the NEC 1980SXi monitor.
Use the DVI to VGA cable to connect. See Illustration 6 for NEC 1990SXi monitor.
XW8200 REAR VIEW
INPUT 1/ DVI
DVI / HD15
VGA cable
CAUTION : DO NOT USE THE DVI /
DVI CABLE ALSO DELIVERED WITH
THE NEC MONITOR.
USE THE DVI / VGA CABLE AND Y
ADAPTER CABLE WITH THE NEC
1980SXI MONITOR.
LEFT MONITOR
NEC 1980SXI FLAT PANEL
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
RIGHT MONITOR
NEC 1980SXI FLAT PANEL
INPUT1 / DVI
(MASTER)
DVI / HD15
VGA cable
2
1
DOUBLE VGA HD15
ADAPTER Y CABLE
Note:
20
AW4.4 workstations are only delivered with
LCD monitors configuration.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
sm 5178823-100
Illustration 6 –
WARNING
HPXW8200 with 1K NEC 1990SXi LCD Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration
STARTING APRIL 2006, THE NEW NEC 1990SXI MONITOR IS DELIVERED WITH
THE AW FORWARD PRODUCTION.
DVI CONNECTION HAS BEEN FULLY VALIDATED WITH THE NEC1990SXI
MONITOR, AND SHALL BE USED TO CONNECT YOUR AW WORKSTATION.
Starting April 2006, your new AW4.3 workstation is delivered with a double DVI Y adapter cable.
Therefore, you must use the DVI to DVI cables delivered with your NEC 1990SXi monitor.
(MASTER)
XW8200 REAR VIEW
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
RIGHT MONITOR
NEC 1990SXI FLAT PANEL
INPUT 1/ DVI
LEFT MONITOR
NEC 1990SXI FLAT PANEL
INPUT1 / DVI
DVI / DVI cable
DVI / DVI cable
2
1
DOUBLE DVI TO DVI
ADAPTER Y CABLE
CAUTION : DO NOT USE THE DVI / VGA
CABLE ALSO DELIVERED WITH THE
NEC MONITOR.
USE THE DVI / DVI CABLE AND Y
ADAPTER CABLE FOR THE NEC
1990SXI MONITOR
Note:
AW4.4 workstations are only delivered with
LCD monitors configuration.
To summarize:
XW8400 stations:
Connect to NEC LCD monitor with the DVI–D / DVI–D cable and adapter cable.
XW8200 stations delivered prior to April 2006:
Connect to NEC LCD monitor with the DVI / VGA cable and adapter cable.
XW8200 stations delivered from April 2006:
Connect to NEC LCD monitor with the DVI–D / DVI–D cable and adapter cable.
21
INSTALLATION
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
INSTALLATION
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2-1-4 Ethernet connection
WARNING
Illustration 7 –
RJ 45 CABLES OF CATEGORY > 5E MUST BE USED FOR 1GBPS CONNECTION.
CAT 5E IS FINE ; CAT 6 IS SURE. CATEGORY IS MARKED ON CABLE.
HP XW8400 and HP XW8200 connection to the network
CAUTION : XW8400 AND XW8200 STATIONS:
Connect the network to the additional Ethernet
board (which defaults to ETH0).
The controller on the Mother board (defaults to
ETH1) is reserved for ”Direct connect”.
Type: ifconfig –a to
get information about
Ethernet Interface(s)
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
XW8200 REAR VIEW
XW8400 REAR VIEW
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
eth1
eth0
eth0
DO NOT USE
USE THE ADDITIONAL
ETHERNET CARD
(defaults to eth0)
HOSPITAL NETWORK BACKBONE
2-1-5 Optional ”Direct Connect” Ethernet connection
WARNING
RJ 45 CABLES OF CATEGORY > 5E MUST BE USED FOR 1GBPS CONNECTION.
CAT 5E IS FINE ; CAT 6 IS SURE. CATEGORY IS MARKED ON CABLE.
Direct connection is aimed to connect AW to the Modality system (image source), or to other
workstations which support the same direct connect feature, at 1Gbps speed.
If your site wants to use this feature, you will be asked to select it from the Configuration menu.
Direct connect can be done either through the second Ethernet port (eth1), using a separate
network, or directly through the Hospital Network port (eth0), if the hospital network is at
1Gbps.
Direct Connect IS NOT SUPPORTED FOR 10 OR 100Mbps NETWORKS.
If the hospital network is not at 1Gbps, you will need to use the second ethernet port with a
1Gbps hub for Direct connect.
22
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
sm 5178823-100
Illustration 8 –
HP X8400 and HP XW8200 direct connection
CAUTION : XW8400 AND XW8200 STATIONS:
Connect the network to the additional Ethernet board (which defaults to ETH0).
The ethernet port on the Mother board (which defaults to ETH1) is
reserved for direct connection .
Direct Connection network
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
eth1
1Gbps Switch (or Hub)
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
XW8200 REAR VIEW
XW8400 REAR VIEW
eth1
Type: ifconfig –a to
get information about
Ethernet Interface(s)
IMAGE SOURCE
ethernet 1
ethernet 0
eth0
eth0
HOSPITAL NETWORK BACKBONE
At time of installation, to activate ”Direct connect”, you will asked to configure both the ”eth0”
and ”eth1”ethernet ports, even if you do ”direct connect” through the hospital network.
DO NOT choose addresses inside the same subnetwork :
i.e: your AW IP address (in class C) is 192.100.9.45.
DO NOT choose an address for direct connect like 192.100.9.24, which is part of the same
sub–network. Choose any other address such as 193.1.2.5 for example.
You must also choose a valid Netmask for Direct Connect .
i.e: you can use the default Class C netmask = 255.255.255.0, unless otherwise specified by the
Network administrator. Any non–valid entry of a netmask will not be saved and will return to the default
class C value. Refer to Chapter 9, section 3–4 for information on netmasks.
Illustration 9 –
Direct connection example (2 hosts) using 2nd Ethernet port
Direct connect between 2 hosts can be done using an RJ45 cross–over (red) cable category 5E or 6.
Direct Connect through RJ45 cross–over cable : Maximum length = 50 meters.
eth1
193.1.1.2
AW1
eth0 192.100.9.48
eth1
193.1.1.1
i.e:
– 193.1.1.1 and 193.1.1.2 are on the
same subnetwork. Connection is OK.
IMAGE SOURCE
eth0 192.100.9.47
HOSPITAL NETWORK BACKBONE
23
– 192.100.9.47 and 192.100.9.48 are
on the same subnetwork, but different from
193.1.1.x. Connection is OK.
INSTALLATION
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
INSTALLATION
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Illustration 10 – Direct Connect example (multiple hosts) using 2nd Ethernet port
Note:
Direct connect between several hosts can be done using an RJ45 cables category 5E or 6
and a 1Gbps switch or hub to connect the hosts.
Direct Connection through 1Gbps Switch (or Hub) separated from Hospital network
eth1
eth1
193.4.5.4
eth1
193.4.5.3
193.4.5.2
PACS
AW2
AW1
eth0 192.100.9.52
eth0 192.100.9.45
eth0 192.100.9.48
eth1
193.4.5.1
IMAGE SOURCE
eth0 192.100.9.47
HOSPITAL NETWORK BACKBONE
Illustration 11 – Direct Connect example using Hospital Network 1Gbps
DO NOT USE DIRECT CONNECT THROUGH THE HOSPITAL NETWORK, IF THE
HOSPITAL NETWORK IS NOT PROTECTED FROM THE OUTSIDE NETWORK BY
A FIREWALL.
WARNING
eth1
193.4.5.4
eth1
193.4.5.3
eth1
193.4.5.2
PACS
AW2
AW1
eth0 192.100.9.52
eth0 192.100.9.45
eth0 192.100.9.48
eth1
193.4.5.1
HOSPITALFIREWALL
IMAGE SOURCE
eth0 192.100.9.47
DIRECT CONNECT THROUGH THE HOSPITAL NETWORK BACKBONE (1GBPS MANDATORY)
2-2
Required Software Environment
D Operating system: GEHC LINUX 5.2 for AW4.4
D Release AW4.4 of Advantage Workstation software.
2-3
Further Assumptions
In this document, we also assume that an Internet Address, a hostname and a root password are
given by a central or local authority for each ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION.
24
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
Installation / re–installation flowcharts
INSTALLATION
2-4
sm 5178823-100
START
NEW AW SYSTEM
INSTALLATION?
Yes
GO TO SECTION 3
page 26
No
NEW SENO
ADVANTAGE
INSTALLATION?
Yes
No
LOAD FROM WARM ?
( AW re–install)
Yes
GO TO SECTION 6
page 32
No
LOAD FROM COLD ?
(OS +AW re–install)
Succeeded State
Pre–requisite State
Yes
GO TO SECTION 7
page 32
No
Px PATCH
(re)installation ?
Basic system, Operating system,
and AW software Operational
Yes
GO TO SECTION 10
page 33
No
DEMO EXAMS
INSTALLATION ?
Yes
GO TO SECTION 8
page 33
No
Second Monitor
Upgrade option
Yes
GO TO SECTION 9
page 33
No
Add New
HW or SW
Option?
HW : GO TO SECTION 4,
page 31
SW : GO TO SECTION 5
page 31
Yes
No
END
25
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
INSTALLATION
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
3
NEW SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Note:
It is NO LONGER possible to restore setups from AW3.1, AW4.0. The parameters are now
too different to be usable.
It is possible to restore setups from AW4.1 / AW4.2 /AW4.3.The procedure is described in this
manual in Job Card IST009, and at Chapter 2, Section 8. Before de–installing/removing the
old AW4.1 , AW4.2 or AW4.3 workstation, proceed with ”Save Configuration on Cdrom )”
procedure as described in your old AW Service Manual, Chapter 1, IST009.
3-1
Foreword
In order to ease the installation steps, you should make sure that the Installation Checklist (see
Pre–installation Manual, Section 5) is as complete as possible.
WARNING
YOUR WORKSTATION IS NOT DELIVERED WITH THE ADVANTAGE
WORKSTATION SOFTWARE LOADED.
THE SOFTWARE LOAD IS NOW PART OF THE INSTALLATION STEPS.
Your workstation is not delivered with the AW software loaded. However a basic HP Linux software is
loaded, in order to allow you to check that the workstation hardware is operational.
When turning on your workstation, it will boot up to the ”Welcome” message screen, to inform you that
the Advantage Workstation software has to be loaded from the AW Fast load DVD, delivered with your
workstation.
Make sure you have the following items available before you start
1. Applications CDs (including documentation) purchased by the site if applicable.
2. Fast load DVD : Including:
– GEHC Linux OS
– AW software and documentation, and Service Tools class A (CSD menu).
– Basic Applications and documentation (Volume Viewer, Fusion, Functional apps, etc...
OR
The DVD/CD set can be used instead of the Fast Load DVD (see Job Card IST011, section 5–1–2).
1. DVD : GEHC Linux OS
2. CD : AW software (including documentation)
Field supplied material:
3. Service Tools cdrom (InSite and Service Tools software)
Note:
The following intends to guide you through the various installation steps, and , proposes to
’parallelize’ the tasks , in order to avoid as much as possible any waiting time:
i.e 1: If there are images to transfer from the old system to the new, start the software load on
your new AW, then prepare your old workstation for image transfer during this time.
i.e 2: Your customer does not request that you transfer the images from the old system to the
new system; prepare your old AW for recycling during software load of the new one.
26
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
New system installation flowchart
INSTALLATION
3-2
sm 5178823-100
NEW SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
Install AW System Hardware:
– Install additional memory option
– Install and connect the workstation
– Install the SCSI board (CAT Nr: M81501SC) in XW8400 (see IST004)
– Connect the MOD drive to SCSI
(do not turn on the MOD device yet)
– Place the safety sticker on keyboard
Power on the workstation:
5 ’ – The workstation boots up to the ”Welcome” screen
NEC parameters settings:
5 ’ – Enter the NEC maintenance menu to check settings.
IST 001 Part 1
IST 001 Part 2
1 hour / 1 FE
1/2 hour / 1 FE
(AW software DVD =
OS + AW + Apps+ documentation +Service Tools)
Insert the AW Fast Load DVD:
No
25’
to
30’
Images to transfer
from old to new
workstation?
Insert the AW DVD into the drive and reboot the workstation
The Linux OS, AW, basic Applications,
documentation and Service tools software
is loaded from the Fast Load DVD
Yes
Configuration Cdrom
(if applicable)
Prepare old workstation
for image transfer (see
Chapter 2: upgrades)
10 ’
Enter the local Host (your AW) parameters
AND
5’
When the software load has completed,
the workstation reboots.
Enter the hostname, IP, netmask, etc ...
or insert the Configuration Cdrom
Basic software is loaded
Connect old workstation
for image transfer
(see chapter 2, section 5)
Shutdown the workstation
Prepare old
workstation
for recycling.
(image deletion)
Turn On the
MOD drive
Reboot the workstation
see chapter 2 section 7
GO TO B
GO TO A
27
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
INSTALLATION
A
B
Login as sdc and start the Common Service
Desktop from the Root Menu/Service Tools
– Select the Configuration tab, and type in the
root password to begin the configuration steps.
IST 002 1 hour / 1 FE
Select ”Complete setup”:
– The ”Site’s Parameters menu displays
5’
Enter the Site’s parameters, and save upon
completion. Click Next Step when done.
– The ”Host Management” menu displays
Enter the Remote Hosts parameters, and save
upon completion. Click Next Step when done.
10’
– The ”Routers Management” menu displays
Enter the Routers parameters, and save upon
completion. Click Next Step when done.
10’
AND
Start NOW Image transfer
from old workstation.
Continue with
Configuration steps
– The ”Dicom Printers Management” menu
Image transfer in progress
(up to several hours,
dependent on number
of images to transfer)
displays
Enter the Printers parameters, and save upon
completion. Click Next Step when done.
5’
per
printer
– The ”Postscript Printers Management”
menu displays
Enter the Printers parameters, and save upon
completion. Click Next Step when done.
5’
per
printer
The ”MOD Install” menu displays
Install MOD and save upon completion.
Click Next Step when done.
5’
GO TO D
GO TO C
28
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
sm 5178823-100
C
D
IST 002 continued
The ”Applications and Licensing” menu displays:
– Select Network mode if your site will use shared licenses
– Select Standalone mode for usual Applications management.
To install now the Applications, you need to:
– Restart AW
– Start Easy Install from the User Interface.
(install Licenses)
10’ / Apps / 1 FE
Refer to IST 005
Start Applications install from:
– HDD : Basicpreloaded Apps
– CDs : Other Apps
Applications
CDs/DVDs
10’
per
Apps
Install all Applications purchased by customer.
Close the EasyInstall utility when all applications have been installed.
Back to the Configuration Menu:
Click Next Step when done.
IST 002 continued
Image transfer in progress
10’
Refer to IST 008
30’
The ”HTTP Configuration” menu displays
Enter the HTTP parameter, and save upon
completion. Click Next Step when done.
1/2 hour / 1 FE
InSite/iLinq Configuration menu displays
Open a Command Window and proceed with
Insite installation
Checkout and
tests with OLC
Back to the Configuration Menu:
Click Next Step when done.
The ”Users Management” menu displays
Enter the Users parameter, and save upon
completion. Click Next when done.
GO TO E
GO TO F
29
IST 002 continued
5’
INSTALLATION
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
INSTALLATION
F
IST 002 continued
E
The ”Passwords Management” menu displays
Change the sdc and root Users passwords, and
save upon completion. Click Next when done.
5’
IST 003 1 hour / 1 FE
– Start the Utilities menu. Select the Utilities tab
– Check/configure the PNF Firewall
– Configure InSite 2.0 for Software download
– Configure CCOW application
– Configure the SoftSwitch application.
AW workstation is now configured:
Quit the Common Service Desktop
Image transfer is complete
Prepare old workstation
for recycling (image deletion)
See chapter 2
Complete the
Configuration steps
Reboot AW workstation
AW workstation is operational
IST 007 0.5 hour / 1 FE
Declare AW to other Hosts
IST 009 0.5 hour / 1 FE
Turnover to Customer
Perform functionality checks
Paper work done
Old workstation
packed up
AND
30
Site is ready for customer
15’
15’
15’
15’
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
4
sm 5178823-100
ADD NEW SCSI OPTION
INSTALL NEW SCSI
HARDWARE OPTION ?
External SCSI Peripherals Physical
Connection:
IST 001
IST 004
– Shutdown workstation
– Connect SCSI peripheral into the Daisy chain.
– reboot workstation
1/4 hour
1 FE
IST 002
IST 004
For each new SCSI peripheral
Next
peripheral
1/4 hour
per option
1 FE
Logical Installation:
install.<option_name>
Turnover to Customer:
IST 009
– Test the newly installed device
– Save configuration on Cdrom
1/4 hour
Done
1 FE
Note:
The only SCSI device supported on AW4.4 is the Dicom MOD drive (rea–only)
5
ADD NEW APPLICATION (SOFTWARE OPTION)
INSTALL NEW APPLICATION
SOFTWARE OPTION ?
IST 002
IST 005
For each new software option
Logical Installation:
run : install.<option_name>
Next
peripheral
1/4 hour
per option
1 FE
Turnover to Customer :
IST 009
– Test the newly installed application
– Save configuration on Cdrom
1/4 hour
1 FE
31
Done
INSTALLATION
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
INSTALLATION
REV 2
6
sm 5178823-100
AW SOFTWARE RE–INSTALLATION
Station to be reloaded with AW
application software only
Advantage Workstation application software reload
– AW software load (Configuration parameters are stored on the
workstation hard disk, and automatically restored)
IST 010
Advanced applications software preload/install from Cdroms
(Volume Viewer apps, Functional Analysis apps, etc ...)
1 hour to
several
hours if
images
on HDD
Check configuration re–installed :
– site parameters
– hardware options
– software options
– Dicom & Postscript printers
Reinstall InSite (or restore InSite parameters)
Final checks before turnover to customer
1 FE
END
7
LOAD FROM COLD: O.S. AND AW SOFTWARE RE–INSTALLATION
Station to be fully reloaded
Complete load from cold
– Check and update NEC monitors parameters
– Linux O.S. and AW software load
– Restore Configuration parameters from Configuration Cdrom
Advanced applications software reload/install from Cdroms
(Volume Viewer apps, Functional Analysis apps, etc ...)
Check configuration re–installed :
– site parameters
– hardware options
– software options
– Dicom & Postscript printers
Reinstall InSite (or restore InSite parameters)
Final checks before turnover to customer
END
32
IST 011
1.5 hours
1 FE
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
8
sm 5178823-100
INSTALLATION
REV 2
DEMO EXAMS INSTALLATION
Station operational
INSTALL DEMO EXAMS
Loading demo exams from CDROM:
IST 012
– Check for disk space
– Load demo exams
1/4 hour
1 FE
End
9
SECOND MONITOR UPGRADE
Station operational
ADD 2nd MONITOR
Add Second Monitor
Chapter 8
1/4 hour
1 FE
– Connect and configure for 2 Monitors
End
10
Px PATCH (RE)INSTALLATION
NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE PRESENT RELEASE
Station operational
(re)install Px patch
(re)install Px patch
– Insert the .Px (*) Patch cdrom into drive and run install.cdrompatches
– Run the Recover Database routine (if necessary). This can take several
hours depending on the number of images stored on the hard disks.
1/4 hour to
several hours
1 FE
* where x is the number describing the
revision of patch (e.g.: P1, P2, Pn)
End
33
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
INSTALLATION
REV 2
11
sm 5178823-100
INSTALLATION JOB CARDS LIST
WARNING
JOB CARD
NO
ALWAYS START A NEW SYSTEM INSTALLATION WITHOUT THE EXTERNAL
SCSI OPTION DEVICES SWITCHED ON. THIS WILL HELP YOU MAKE SURE THAT
YOUR BASIC SYSTEM IS OPERATIONAL AND WILL PREVENT ANY SCSI
ADDRESSING CONFLICT WITH THE INTERNAL DISKS OF THE WORKSTATION.
DURING SOFTWARE RE–INSTALLATION (LOAD FROM COLD OR LOAD FROM
WARM), THE EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICES CAN BE LEFT CONNECTED, AND
SWITCHED ON.
PURPOSE
NEEDS TO BE DONE FOR ...
NEW
SYSTEM
INSTALL
LOAD
FROM
COLD
LOAD
FROM
WARM
IST001
HARDWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION
YES
NO
NO
IST002
SITE CONFIGURATION WITH CSD
YES
YES
YES
IST003
UTILITIES CONFIGURATION WITH CSD
YES
YES
YES
IST001
IST002
IST004
EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICE OPTION INSTALLATION
(DICOM MOD)
YES
YES
YES
IST002
IST006
POSTSCRIPT & DICOM PRINTERS INSTALLATION
YES
YES
YES
IST002
IST005
APPLICATIONS (SOFTWARE OPTIONS)
INSTALLATION
YES
YES
YES
IST007
NETWORK CONFIGURATION ON IMAGES
SOURCES
YES
NO
NO
IST008
INSITE INSTALLATION
YES
YES
YES
IST009
TURNOVER TO THE CUSTOMER
YES
YES
YES
IST010
AW APPLICATION SOFTWARE RELOAD (L.F.W.)
NO
NO
YES
IST011
LOAD FROM COLD (L.F.C.)
NO
YES
NO
IST012
AW DEMO EXAMS REINSTALLATION
CHOICE
CHOICE
CHOICE
34
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Time: 0 h 30 min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 12
SUPPLIES
HP workstation installation set comprising:
D Computer box HP XW8400
D One or two Landscape 19” LCD color monitor(s).
Note:
CRT monitors are no longer supported .
D Cable(s) and adapters for monitor(s).
D Keyboard , Mouse and pad.
D Cable set.
D ETHERNET RJ45 cable.
2
TOOLS AND PARTS REQUIRED
D If your customer requests that you transfer patient data from old to the new workstation, you will
need the following, or equivalent tool:
2212538 : RJ45 network cross–over cable (red cable) : Length = 4.5 meters
D AW Fast Load software DVD for XW8400 or AW Fast Load software DVD for XW8200
Note:
The set of OS DVD + AW CD can be used instead if the Fast Load DVD is not operational.
Refer to IST011 section 5 for loading instructions.
D One SCSI controller board for XW8400, if it is an upgrade from an older AW (AW3.1, AW4.0,
AW4.1, AW4.2) and your customer wants to reinstall the Dicom MOD (read only).
CAT NR = M80501SC. See Job Card IST004 for special instructions.
3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
THE MAXIMUM MAGNETIC FIELD ALLOWABLE FOR INSTALLING ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION
WHEN NOT USING SHIELDED MONITOR IS 1 GAUSS TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION.
4
PREREQUISITES
The site must be prepared for installation of the workstation:
Refer to VS2/SA2.1 Pre–Installation Manual : 5180573-100.
D Desk and chair.
D Line voltage power supply outlets.
D ETHERNET connection.
The following information must also be available before starting. It can be obtained from the network
administrator of the hospital or from the ”Needs Assessment Form” filled by the ”Network Champion”.
35
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 12
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration
D Hostname of workstation.
Note:
“A.E. Title” (Application Entity Title) = Hostname of the AW workstation.
D Internet Protocol (IP) Address of workstation.
D Netmask Value (if applicable).
This procedure does not describe the ETHERNET network installation, which is assumed to be
already installed.
The hostname, IP address, and netmask value should be available from the Network Administrator of
your Site.
5
PART 1: PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
WARNING
5-1
IN CASE STANDARD HP MANUFACTURER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND
HP LINUX CDROMS WOULD BE DELIVERED WITH YOUR AW WORKSTATION,
DO NOT USE THEM, DO NOT LEAVE ON SITE, DISCARD THEM.
ONLY USE GEHC DOCUMENTS AND GEHC SOFTWARE CDROMS.
Workstation Unpacking
D No special tools are needed.
Monitors and workstation are heavy. Ask for help to handle. Handle with care.
5-2
Memory Extension Option Installation
D Insert your memory extension option module(s), if applicable, into the computer box. (Refer to
Chapter 8 for installation).
5-3
Line Voltage Selection
LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION IS AUTOMATIC FOR THE WORKSTATION, MONITORS AND ITS
PERIPHERALS.
5-4
Power Connections
D One power outlet is required for the computer.
D One power outlet is required for each of the monitors.
D One power outlet is required for each of the optional SCSI devices (MOD, ...).
Note:
Power cables must be fitted with proper plugs for the country where the workstation is
installed.
5-5
Video Connection
D Between monitor(s) and computer or via Video Recorder option Interface.
Refer to illustrations at Chapter 1, Section 2 at the beginning of this manual.
36
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
3 of 12
5-6
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration
Mouse connection
D USB: Connect the mouse to one of the computer’s USB ports.
5-7
Keyboard connection
D USB: Connect the keyboard to one of the computer’s USB ports .
The keyboard is delivered with a set of safety labels in different languages.
DO NOT remove the existing English safety sticker. Use the sticker in the
appropriate language, and just stick it upon the English sticker.
This step is mandatory for the Chinese market to be CCC compliant.
CAUTION
5-8
Network Connection
D Between computer and Image Source through Ethernet network.
Note:
The XW8400 (and XW8200) workstation MUST BE connected through the additional
Ethernet Interface card. Refer to Illustration 11, page 24.
Also refer to chapter 9 for more information concerning networking.
5-9
External SCSI Connection (MOD drive)
D From computer SCSI port to external SCSI device.The MOD SCSI target address must be set to 3.
Note:
Refer to Job Card IST004 and to chapter 8 for installation of the additional SCSI
controller for XW8400 and connection of the external SCSI Dicom MOD device.
Also see part numbers of various SCSI cables length at Chapter 6 FRU list.
SONY or MAXOPTIX DICOM MOD drive
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
XW8400
ËË ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
XW8200
SCSI ID select switch : set to ID = 3
Additional SCSI
interface board.
See IST004
Do not use the built–in
terminator switch.
Use a SCSI external
active terminator:
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
SCSI controller is in
standard for XW8200
SCSI port
WARNING
Centronics 50p to wide SCSI 68p cable
SCSI port
CONNECT THE EXTERNAL SCSI MOD DRIVE NOW , BUT DON’T TURN IT ON
YET, AS IT COULD INTERFERE WITH YOUR WORKSTATION DURING THE BOOT
SEQUENCE. YOU WILL BE INSTRUCTED TO TURN IT ON LATER, DURING THE
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
37
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
4 of 12
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration
6
PART2: POWER UP WORKSTATION. SOFTWARE LOAD
YOUR NEW ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION NEEDS TO BE LOADED WITH THE AW
SOFTWARE. PREPARE THE AW FAST LOAD SOFTWARE DVD FOR THE NEXT
STEPS.
WARNING
D Turn the monitor(s) and the workstation ON.
After the power up test is complete, check that no LEDs remain lit (LEDs can flash from times to
times) and that the Power LED is lit but not flashing (indicating a system error).
In the other case, refer to the trouble shooting guide, chapter 4.
The system starts to boot up and displays the BIOS version at the bottom left of the screen.
D Check that the BIOS version is v1.17 (XW8400) and v2.10 (XW8200)
If not, you must ”flash” the BIOS before going any further. Refer to Chapter 4, TSG 012.
This could be the case after the replacement of the workstation, for instance.
Press any key to see the system settings display, followed by the hard disks size, memory size and
other information on the internal hardware devices.
D Informational step: Check SCSI bus reliability (XW8200)
You will see messages from “Searching for device at HBA 0, ID 0, LUN 0” to “Searching for device at
HBA 2, ID 15, LUN 0”.
– Press Pause key when table below is displayed (Use CTRL+ALT+DEL to reboot the station if
the table disappears before you perform the verification).
Good XW8200 configuration in case of Seagate hard disks:
HBA
Id
lun
Vendor
Product
Rev
Sync
Wide
Capacity
0
7
0
LSILogic
LSI1030[ 40B]
1032500
320.0
16
1
0
0
Seagate
ST336753LW
HPS3
320.0
16
1
7
0
LSILogic
LSI1030[ 402]
1030800
320.0
16
2
1
0
Seagate
ST373453LW
HPS3
320.0
16
73412 MB
2
2
0
Seagate
ST373453LW
HPS3
320.0
16
73412 MB
2
7
0
LSILogic
LSI1030[ 402]
1030800
320.0
16
36422 MB
– Carefully check that parameters in bold above are strictly identical on the workstation.
– Also check the order the disks are displayed. The 36422 MB must be displayed first (as above).
If you find differences, check disk and cable connections inside the workstation and re–start the
installation process. If the difference occur again, please call your OLC for further investigation
before replacing internal disks.
Note:
The XW8400 workstation has 1 x 73GB SAS disk for system files at ID=0 and 2 x 146GB
SAS disks for images at ID=1 and ID=2.
Then the ”Intel Boot Agent GE v1.2.XX” boot up process displays some messages, and finally the
Welcome to your new AW station ”splash menu” is started.
38
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Note:
The Welcome to your AW new station is provided with a Launch Diagnostics button to
access the HP Insight Diagnostics. You DO NOT NEED to run the Diags now. They are
provided in case you would have some difficulties to boot from the AW Fast Load DVD, so
that you are able to run the hardware diagnostics directly from this screen.
Welcome to your new
Advantage Workstation
This station needs to be loaded with the AW software.
1
Insert the ”AW Fast Load” software DVD in the DVD reader.
2
Click on the ”Load Software” button to start the software load process.*
Load Software
3
Follow the instructions
* No User Input is required.
For Hardware diagnostics, click on the Launch Diags button to start the ”HP Insight Hardware Diagnostic Tool”.
This tool is also available from the HP Insight diagnostics bootable CD delivered with your workstation.
Lanch Diagnostics
GE imagination at work
Your workstation needs to be loaded with the Advantage Workstation software.
Prior to start loading the AW software, you must check and update the NEC monitors parameters.
6-1
Preliminary steps: NEC monitors inputs settings
This step shall be done only for XW8200 stations delivered prior to April 2006, with a DVI to
VGA adapter cable.
For more recent XW8200 and XW8400 stations, keep the DVI ”digital” factory default setting,
as workstations are systematically delivered with a DVI–D to DVI–D adapter cable..
Prior to start the software loading sequence, you must check and update if necessary the NEC
monitors parameters. The following must be done for each monitor. The monitors must be connected
and have an active video signal at their input (the LED is green).
D Turn OFF the monitor
D Press the Select 1/2 button and turn ON the monitor.
Keep the Select 1/2 button depressed for at least 2 seconds, then release the button.
The monitor turns on and displays the Maintenance menu.
D Press several times the > button to reach Tab 7
D When Tab 7 is highlighted, confirm by pressing the Select 1/2 button
DVI selection :
Set up the DVI input to ”Analog” : XW8200 prior to April 2006
39
INSTALLATION
5 of 12
JOB CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
6 of 12
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration
D Press several times the > button to reach DVI selection.
Confirm by pressing on Select 1/2 button
D Press on the + or – button to change from Digital to Analog
Confirm by pressing on Select 1/2 button
VGA selection :
Set up the VGA input to ”None” or ”Last detect” : XW8400 / XW8200
D Press several times the > button to reach VIDEO DETECT selection.
Confirm by pressing on Select 1/2 button
D Press on the + or – button to change to the appropriate selection:
None or Last detect for XW8400 and XW8200
Confirm by pressing on Select 1/2 button
Exit the maintenance menu :
D Press twice on the Exit button to save and quit the Maintenance menu.
Proceed with the same steps for the second monitor.
6-2
Software loading
D Insert the ”AW Fast Load DVD”, delivered with your workstation, in the DVD drive and
click on the Load Software button.
CAUTION
Make sure to use the appropriate Fast Load DVD corresponding to your
workstation:
Fast Load DVD for XW8400 or Fast Load DVD for XW8200.
Note:
The set of OS DVD/AW CD can be used instead if the Fast Load DVD is not available or
operational. Insert the GE HC OS DVD into the drive and click on Load Software.
Refer to IST011, section 5–1–2 for help.
Note:
The HP Diagnostics utility will be erased from your Hard disks upon AW software installation
completion. Nevertheless, HP diagnostics can be launched from the HP Insight diagnostics
Cdrom delivered with your new workstation.
The workstation reboots from the Fast Load DVD and the software load starts displaying the following:
AutoInstallation of Linux and AW4.4 application on XW8400 (or XW8200)
”Fast LOAD From COLD” (LFC)
===========================================================================
Please choose the workstation type:
This will take about 35mn, you do not need to standby. Symantec window
will appear and the progress indicator ..................
... get the CONFIGURATION CD or collect AW settings and Applications keys
At the end of system installation, you will be asked ........
...............................................................
40
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
1
If you do NOT want to continue, eject the DVD and press Ctrl Alt DEL
to reboot
!!!! DO NOT REMOVE THE DVC when the Symantec window is displayed
Press [Y] to continue the installation ?
D Press Y to start the loading process
DVD check
The Ghost installation Menu displays after a few seconds
Symantec Ghost .......
Progress indicator
0%
25%
50%
75%
100%
Restoring compressed data ...
Nothing seems to happen during one minute or so, then the progress indicator displays the
percentage of loaded data.
The Load process will take about 30 minutes to complete and no User intervention is needed during
this time. You do not need to standby.
Now it is time for you to gather all necessary information if not done yet:
D From the Hospital Network administrator:
Hostname, IP address, Netmask, Routers, Remote Hosts, Direct connect, etc..
D From the Hospital Network administrator or Camera Vendor:
Dicom and/or Postscript Printers information
When the software load has completed, the following messages display:
The boot procedure will
1 – ask if you want a recover database in case of reinstallation (up to
several hours for a full database)
2 – ask for the network configuration data
3 – ask for configuration CD (if available) to configure AW
Log as ”sdc” and install the advanced applications:
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Remove the DVD and press on Ctrl Alt Del to reboot.
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
A:\>
41
INSTALLATION
7 of 12
JOB CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2
INSTALLATION
2.5JOB
8 of 12
CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration
D Eject the Fast Load DVD from the drive.
D Simultaneously press the <Ctrl> <Alt> and <Del> keys, to reboot the workstation
The workstation reboots from the hard disks and you will get the next set of questions, in order to
configure the Host information:
Please choose the installation type:
A – setup of a new station
B – setup with images recovery possibility) (up to several hours for a full
database)
C – Cancel
Choose type [ABC]?
D Press the <A> key as there are no images to reload on your station.
The image partition /export/home1 is being created
Installing .........
Installing .........
We will now set the basic network parameters
You will have to confirm or re–enter the data at the end.
Please enter the hostname:
D Type in the Hostname for your workstation and press on the [Return] key when done.
i.e: aw–1 [Return]
Choose a hostname as independent as possible from the workstation’s type (think of future
upgrade). Avoid hostnames like AW4.4 , adw4.4, etc...
WARNING
WARNING
Note:
DO NOT USE THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERS FOR HOSTNAME:
. ! $ ” ‘ ’ { } [ ] * @ # ? ^ _ / etc..
ONLY USE ALPHANUMERICAL CHARACTERS WITHOUT SPACE.
However it is possible to use the – (dash).
THE HOSTNAME SHOULD BE 12 CHARACTERS MAXIMUM.
The Hostname will automatically be used as the Dicom A.E. Title for the workstation.
Please enter the IP address:
D Type in the IP address for your workstation and press on the [Return] key when done.
i.e : 192.100.9.48 [Return]
Note:
The Internet Protocol (IP) address value is only given as an example.
Use here the value given by the Network Administrator if applicable.
Please enter the netmask:
D Type in the appropriate Netmask then press on the [Return] key when done.
i.e : 255.255.252.0 [Return]
42
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
sm 5178823-100
3
JOB CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration
Note:
9 of 12
This Netmask value is only given as an example.
Use here the value given by the Network Administrator if applicable.
A confirmation message displays to allow you to modify your settings if needed:
hostname = aw–1
IP = 192.100.9.48
netmask = 255.255.252.0
Apply these settings ? (y/n)
y [Return] to accept,
or
n[Return] if you wish to modify the settings
(In the second case, you will be prompted to enter again the Hostname, IP address and Netmask)
DEVICE=eth0
...........
The next steps are for the configuration of the second ethernet card, in order to allow the ”Direct
connect” feature to work through an additional network.
Note that you do not need to configure eth1, to do ”Direct Connect” through Hospital network.
do you want to configure the second ethernet card (y/n) ?
D If you want to configure your workstation for ”direct connect” through additional network, answer
y [Return]. If you do not want to configure your workstation for ”direct connect”through additional
network, answer n [Return]
If you have answered ”yes”, the next set of questions displays:
Please enter the IP address for eth1 :
CAUTION
DO NOT choose an IP address for ”Direct connect” in the same sub–network
than the main IP address of your workstation.
i.e: Your AW IP address is 192.100.9.48. Do not choose a direct connect IP address
such as 192.100.9.15 (within the same sub–network).
Choose anything else like 193.1.1.1 (not in the same sub–network).
D Type in the ”direct connect” IP address for your workstation and press [Return] when done.
i.e : 193.1.1.1 [Return]
Note:
The Internet Protocol (IP) address value for ”direct connect” is only given as an example.
Use here the value given by the Network Administrator if applicable.
Please enter the netmask for eth1 :
D Type in the appropriate Netmask then press on the [Return] key when done.
i.e : 255.255.255.0 [Return]
Note:
This Netmask value is only given as an example.
Use here the value given by the Network Administrator if applicable.
Note:
You must also choose a valid Netmask for Direct Connect .
i.e: you can use the default Class C netmask = 255.255.255.0, unless otherwise specified by
the Network administrator. Any non–valid entry of a netmask will not be saved and will return
to the default class C value.
Refer to Chapter 9, section 3–4 for more information on netmasks.
43
INSTALLATION
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
4
10 of 12
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration
A confirmation message displays to allow you to modify your settings if needed:
IP = 193.1.1.1
netmask = 255.255.255.0
Apply these settings ? (y/n)
or
y [Return] to accept,
n[Return] if you wish to modify the settings
(In the second case, you will be prompted to enter again the direct connect IP address and Netmask)
Setting hostname = ............
...............................
Setting IP = ...............
Setting netmask = ............
activating the hostname/ip config
Now a graphical user interface will let you change the timezone, date and time
Please make your modifications, and click OK to confirm,
Press <ENTER> when ready
D Press on the [Return] key
A graphical interface displays, to allow you entering the Time Zone settings
The Date & Time / Time Zone window displays
Date and Time
Date & Time
Check and adjust
Date & Time
.......................
.......................
Check and adjust
Time Zone
Do not select unless your hospital
has internal Network Time server.
Time Zone
Enable Network Time Protocol
OK
Apply
D Set the date and time first, then click on the Time Zone tab to select the appropriate time zone for
your system.
When this is done, click on the Apply button. The Date & Time / Time Zone window pops–out.
The next message pops up, to allow you restoring the site configuration (if applicable)
Do you want to restore the configuration from a cdrom ? (y/n)
If your answer is yes (y [Enter]), you will get the next message:
Please insert a configuration CD and press <Enter>
D Insert your AW site configuration CD, and press [Enter].
The following Warning message may be displayed as you are installing a new station:
WARNING: The licenseId of this station and the one where the backup was
created are not the same!
Do you really want to restore the configuration ? (y/n) ? y [Enter]
restoring password....
44
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
sm 5178823-100
5
oJOB
CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration
11 of 12
restoring data .....
Lots of messages are displayed during the software installation.
Do not mind messages like ” xxxx A BAD SERVICE” which are ”normal error” messages.
License registered
Please press <Enter>
D Press on the [Enter] key.
The workstation reboots
WARNING
IN ORDER TO IMPROVE AW SECURITY, WE RECOMMEND THAT YOU MODIFY
THE ROOT, ADMINISTRATOR AND SDC PASSWORDS WHEN THE MACHINE IS
DELIVERED TO THE CUSTOMER.
D The default password for root is factory set to operator
We recommend that you change the root password to increase security for your workstation. In
order to change the root password, refer to Chapter 1, IST002, section 4.2.
IT IS NOW TIME TO WRITE DOWN WORKSTATION HOSTNAME, INTERNET ADDRESS, AND
NETMASK IN THE AW CONFIGURATION FORM LOCATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THIS
MANUAL.
7
TURN ON THE EXTERNAL MOD DRIVE
If your site has the external Dicom MOD drive option, you must turn it on now.
Shutdown your workstation, turn on the MOD drive and reboot the workstation.
If you have not installed yet the additional SCSI controller board in XW8400 (kit CAT # , and/or
connected the MOD drive, refer to section 5–9 , and to Chapter 8, for more information.
D Turn ON the external SCSI device first.
MOD DEVICE LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION IS AUTOMATIC
CAUTION
Never change the SCSI address of a device when power is on.
D Switch on the workstation .
The systems starts the Power On Self Tests.
D When the boot sequence has completed, make sure the MOD device has been properly
recognized by the workstation :
Start AW application by login as sdc, then open a Command window and type in :
cat /proc/scsi/scsi [Return]
You should find references to the hard disks and the MOD device.
45
INSTALLATION
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
6
INSTALLATION
oJOB
12 of 12
CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration
XW8200 workstation
Attached devices :
Host: scsi1 Channel: 00 Id 00 Lun: 00
Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST336752LW ....................
Host: scsi2 Channel: 00 Id 01 Lun: 00
Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST373453LW ....................
Host: scsi2 Channel: 00 Id 02 Lun: 00
Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST373453LW ....................
....................
XW8400 workstation
Attached devices:
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00 Id: 00 Lun: 00
Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST373454SS
Rev: HPS3
Type: Direct–Access
ANSI SCSI revision: 05
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00 Id: 01 Lun: 00
Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST3146854SS
Rev: HPS3
Type: Direct–Access
ANSI SCSI revision: 05
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00 Id: 02 Lun: 00
Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST3146854SS
Rev: HPS3
Type: Direct–Access
ANSI SCSI revision: 05
If the Dicom MOD drive is properly responding, you should read the following line as well
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00 Id 03 Lun: 00
Vendor: SONY Model: SMO–551–SD ......................
...................................
Note:
The DVD–RW drive in the XW8200 and XW8400 workstation shows up through the following
command:
cdrecord –dev=ATA –scanbus [Enter]
CAUTION
If the MOD has not been detected, do not continue. Shutdown the workstation,
check all connections and start again.
The system is now ready for SCSI options to be logically installed.
Proceed with steps described in Job Card IST 004.
8
SITE CONFIGURATION
Perform now the steps described in Job Card IST 002 to configure the Site’s parameters.
If your site has the external Dicom MOD drive option, it must be turned on now.
7
46
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Time: 1 h 00 min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 26
SUPPLIES
Site Configuration Cdrom of the older AW system to upgrade.
2
TOOLS REQUIRED
Not applicable.
3
PREREQUISITES
Steps from Job Card IST 001 have been completed. The Dicom MOD drive option is turned on.
4
PROCEDURE
D Login as sdc:
console login : sdc [Enter]
Password : adw4.4 [Enter]
(the sdc password is factory loaded as adw4.4)
Note:
AW will attempt to startup but will fail as the software protection key has not been
installed yet, so don’t be alarmed to see a pop–up window displaying the message:
Invalid software key for AW station
You can configure it using: Root menu/Servicetools/Servicetools/Configuration
4-1
Upgrade case: Extract configuration data from upgraded AW first
AW1.2 or AW2.0 or AW3.1 or AW4.0 case:
D
Bypass this step. No Site parameters, Protocols or Customer presets are compatible, so they
cannot be reinstalled from the older AW1.2, AW2.0, AW3.1 or AW4.0 system.
Jump to section 4–2.
AW4.1 (X4000 workstation) hardware upgrade (workstation swap):
D All Site parameters, Protocols or Customer presets of the older AW4.1 can be reinstalled into your
new AW system, but no license keys, as the upgrade consists on a hardware swap.
However, the License keys of the older AW4.1 system will be restored as well from the AW4.1
Configuration Cdrom and will have to be modified.
You will have to enter manually the appropriate keys , later on when prompted :
– IST002 : Configuration for the AW (sdc) key– IST005 : Application options installation
AW4.1, AW4.2/4.2P and AW4.3 software upgrade only:
D AW Site parameters (license keys, Protocols, Customer presets, ..) of the upgraded AW4.1 or
AW4.2 can be reinstalled on your new AW, but Patient List preferencies (Filters, Split mode,
number of fields, etc ..) are not properly restored, as too different from AW4.3, so will be lost .
The upgrade consists on performing a complete software reload (Load from Cold) as described in
Chapter 1, Job Card IST011, then following steps of IST002 section 4–2.
Note that from AW4.2, Volume Viewer application requires a license key.
47
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
8
2 of 26
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
Follow the steps described hereafter before continuing with steps described section 4–2.
D Move the mouse pointer to the screen background (dark area), press on the middle or right button
of the mouse, and select AW Administration .
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Display Configuration
Save Configuration
Service Tools
AW Administration
Restart AW
D Enter the Administrator’s password when prompted:
Password: administrator [Enter]
A command window pops up with the User Management menu.
Main MENU
USERS MANAGEMENT...................................1
SHARED PROTOCOLS MANAGEMENT........................2
EXAM CODES MANAGEMENT..............................3
CONFIGURATION......................................4
BACKUP THE WHOLE CONFIG ON CDROM...................5
RESTORE THE WHOLE CONFIG FROM CDROM................6
=================================================================
Enter your choice or <Enter> to display the current menu [?,q] ? [Enter]
D Insert the Site Configuration Cdrom from the upgraded AW4.1 system, before selecting option 6,
RESTORE THE WHOLE CONFIG FROM CDROM
6 [Enter]
WARNING : The current config will be overwritten
Please type ’restore’ then <Enter> to confirm or just <Enter> to abort
restore [Enter]
The whole configuration from your older AW4.1 / 4.2 system is restored on your new AW.
Note:
When restoring the configuration from an AW4.1x, AW4.2x, AW4.3, the sdc key ”adw4.1
adw4.2 or adw4.3” overwrites the ”adw4.4” key. So you need to login with the ”adw4.1,
adw4.2 or adw4.3” password, then be able change it back, as explained further in this Job
card
D Follow the steps described section 4–2, and make sure you modify the following parameters:
key
ser
sid
nod
delmin
delmax
: change the Software Key (current = xxxxxxx)
: change the Serial Number of the station (current = xxxxxxxx)
: change the GE System ID of the station (current = xxxxxxxx)
: change the Remote Node Control state (current = off)
: change the autodelete lower bound (current = xxxxx)
: change the autodelete upper bound (current = xxxxxx)
48
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
9
4-2
Start the Common Service Desktop (CSD)
D Press on the middle button of the mouse, and select the Root Menu / Service Tools / Service
Tools menu.
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Display Configuration
Save Configuration
Command Window
Recover Database
Service Tools
AW Administration
Install package
Service Tools
Restart AW
EA3 Configuration
Exit AW
The Common Service Desktop displays within the Mozilla navigator web page.
Note : A Warning message displays on top of the CSD menu when accessing the CSD remotely.
[JavaScript Application]
The customer should be aware of the manipulations you’re intending
to do on the site !
The workstation should not be in use while the diagnostic and Configuration tasks
are being performed !
OK
(1)
(3)
D Click (1) on the OK to close the Warning window (remote access).
49
(2)
INSTALLATION
3 of 26
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
10
4 of 26
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
4-3
Start the Configuration Tool menu
D Click (3) on the Configuration button.
The Configuration menu displays
If this is a new installation, click on Perform full configuration, in order to run in sequence all the
configuration steps necessary to complete your system installation.
If you simply want to add or modify one configuration parameter, you may want to click on Configure
single feature, in order to choose the only parameter you need to configure/modify.
The Configuration Menu allows you to configure the following parameters:
– Site parameters
– Remote Hosts
– Routers
– Dicom Printers
– Postscript Printers
– Applications and Licensing (options)
– HTTP support
– Insite/iLinq/RCOC
– Users
– Passwords
– Dicom MOD option
D Click on Perform full configuration to start the configuration tool .
50
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
5 of 26
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
D Click into the password field to select, and type in the root password (default root password is
operator) and click on OK .
4-3-1 Sites Parameters menu
The Configure Site Parameters menu pops–up allowing you to configure the following parameters:
– AW software license key
The SOFTWARE Protection key CODE can be found on a sheet of paper delivered with the machine.
It is also loaded into the configuration diskette SHIPPED WITH THE SYSTEM from manufacturing.
The floppy diskette contains a text file that can also be read on a laptop.
KEYS can be entered in EITHER lower or upper case letters.
Note:
If you need to know the workstation’s licenseId
number, in order to check (or request from your
OLC) the corresponding AW software license
key, you can click on
Display Configuration
or
you may open a Command Window and type in:
licenseId [Enter]
(with a Capital ”I” for Id)
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Display Configuration
Save Configuration
Service Tools
AW Administration
Restart AW
– User Interface language
– Monitors type (CRT/LCD ): Removed entry. !!! CRT are not supported with AW4.4 !!!
– Monitors configuration (1 or 2 monitors)
– Serial number of the workstation ; GE System ID of the workstation
– Country code (NOT IMPLEMENTED FOR THE CURRENT RELEASE !!!!!!!!!)
– GE System ID of the workstation
– GE System Order (S.O.) of the workstation
– Hospital name
Note:
Do not use the following characters for hospital name and phone number:
. ! $ ” ‘ ’ { } [ ] * @ # ? ^
51
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
6 of 26
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
Configure Site Parameters
Choose the parameters you want to install/configure by clicking on the
corresponding checkbox and filling or changing the data.
Click on Save Parameters to save the parameter checked.
When all settings are done, click on Next step (full configuration
mode), or quit the Common Service Desktop.
Software Key
English
French
German
Italian
Portuguese
Spanish
Chinese
Japanese
Language
Monitors Configuration
1 monitor
2 monitors
Serial Number of the Station
GE System ID of the Station
GE System Order of the Station
Click on (?) to get information
on the Remote Node Control
parameter
Hospital Name
Support Phone Number
Sales Phone Number
Remote Node Control (?)
Off
On
Autodelete Activity
Off
On
Start Autodelete at
MB of free disk space
Stop Autodelete at
MB of free disk space
Off
On
Autolock Activity
minutes
Autolock Delay
Screen Saver Activity
Off
On
minutes
Screen Saver Delay
Screen Saver Mode
GE
Blank
Direct Connect
Disabled
Enabled
Reset to last saved values
52
Save parameters
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
– Support phone number and Sales phone number
– Remote Node control
The Remote Node Control is useful to prevent undesired hosts to push to, and/or query/retrieve
images from your AW workstation, by limiting the push and query/retrieve rights, to the only remote
hosts you have declared into the AW Patient List Browser.
The filter is disabled by default. It means that any Dicom system on the network can push to and/or
retrieve images from your AW. If you set the filter ON, you will have to make sure that authorized
systems needing to push images or retrieve images from your AW, are properly declared in your AW
workstation . (see section 4–4–2)
– Autodelete activity and parameters
Note:
The suggested default values are made to start autodelete when the capacity is < 10% of the
disks capacity and to stop when it gets > 25% :
– HP XW8400 : 2 x146GB disks : delmin = 28002 ; delmax = 70005
– HP XW8200 : 2 x73GB disks : delmin = 14000 ; delmax = 35000
– Autolock activity and parameters
– Screen Saver activity and parameters (incl. Screen Power Saving mode)
– Direct Connect selection (on/off)
Allows you to define wheter or not you site will use the Direct Connect feature.
Note:
Graphical User Interface aspect (look and feel) :
Only Common User Interface (CUI) is now supported with AW4.3.
Therefore the entry in the Configuration menu has been removed for AW4.3.
D When you have properly entered all the desired parameters, click on the Save parameters button.
The Please Wait message pops–up until the parameters have been saved.
In progress ... Mozilla
Please Wait ...
Then a ”succesful installation” confirmation window message pops–up
[JavaScript Application]
Site parameters saved successfully
When you have finished the configuration, don’t forget to reboot
the station, so that the changes are taken in account
OK
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You will do this later, when instructed.
53
INSTALLATION
7 of 26
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
8 of 26
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
D Click on the OK button to continue.
D Click on the Next Step button to enter the next configuration menu.
4-3-2 Hosts management menu
CAUTION
You can declare up to a maximum of 50 Remote Host to your AW. There is no
software limitation, but declaring more than 50 Remote Hosts can bring erratic
behavior of the images Drag&Drop feature to the Remote Hosts, and/or a longer
time for Query.
The Hosts Management menu pops–up.
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
Host Management
To declare a new host, click on Add Host.
To modify a host, select the host in the below list and click on Modify Host.
To delete a host, select the host in the below list and click on Remove Host. .
When all settings are done, click on Next step (full configuration
mode), or quit the Common Service Desktop.
Add Host
Modify Host
Remove Host
To view your AW workstation’s network parameters, as must be entered at the
Remote Hosts consoles (CT, MR, other AWs, etc ..), in order to authorize
Dicom associations, click on the View Local Host parameter button.
View Local Host parameters
Note:
The View Local Host Parameters button allows you to view the Dicom parameters of your
workstation, as they must be entered in the other systems, in order to ensure successful
Dicom associations with these remote systems. This sub–menu is not User configurable.
AW4.3 is Dicom ”Study root” provider.
Click on Back to Host Management button, to return to the Host Management menu when
done.
D Click on Add Host button to create a new entry in the Remote Hosts table or select an existing
entry in the table then click on Modify Host, modify an existing remote host information.
D click on the Create button. The Remote host parameters window pops up
54
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
The Host Parameters Menu pops–up
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
Host Parameters
Host type :
Host label :
Hostname :
Host Application Entity Title (AET) :
IP address :
Port number :
Supported
Query retrieve :
Not Supported
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Storage commitment :
Application Entity Title for the storage commitment :
IP address for the storage commitment :
Review workstation
CTAquisition
MGAquisition
MRAquisition
PETAquisition
XRayAquisition
PACS
Media Storage stat.
Other
Port for the storage commitment :
Direct connect :
Connected workstation type :
IP used for direct connect :
Comment :
Cancel
Save Host
– Host type : Dicom or SdCNet host
– Host label: This is the name that will be given to the Host icon in the User interface.
– Hostname
– Host Application Entity Title (for Dicom hosts)
– IP address of the remote Host
– Port number (for Dicom hosts)
– Query retrieve capability (for Dicom hosts): Supported or Not supported
Note:
When restoring configuration from AW4.1 / AW4.2 config CD, the Query/Retrieve = ”Patient”
model will change to ’Not supported”. Manually set it to ”Supported”.
Connected workstation type must be set up as well, so that it reflects on the Icon type in the
Browser.
– Storage commitment capability (for Dicom hosts): Select Yes or No
Note:
Some archive systems offer the ”Storage commitment” feature. If you select Storage
commitment = yes, you will have to fill in the corresponding fields with the AET, network
address and port number of the Storage system. Check with the Network administrator for
”Storage commitment” capability of your archive system.
– Application Entity Title for the Storage commitment
55
INSTALLATION
9 of 26
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
10 of 26
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
– IP address for the Storage commitment
– Port number for the Storage commitment
– Direct connect option:
In order to to be able to select the option, two conditions are necessary:
– You have selected Direct Connect = ON when configuring the Sites parameters (see p 54)
– You have selected Query/Retrieve = Enabled
Select Available , to enable D.C. if applicable.
Note:
If you intend to use the Direct connect feature, either through the second Ethernet port (eth1),
or directly on the 1Gbps Network Hospital, you will have to fill in the corresponding fields with
the AET, network address and port number of the remote system.
If you want to do Direct Connect through additional network, you must have previously
configured your workstation (see IST001) for direct connection through additional network, by
giving a direct connect IP address to the ”eth1” second ethernet.
If you have not done it yet, you must do it, through the /export/home/sdc/scripts/sys–reconfig
script (you must be ”root” and this will reboot your workstation).
– Connected workstation type:
Choose among the pop–up menu list the type of host you connect to (i.e: workstation,
acquisition system, ...). Some types do not authorize yet Direct Connect.
– IP address for the Direct connect:
If direct connect through the hospital network, you must duplicate the IP address.
If direct connect through additional network, the address must NOT be in the same subnetwork
– Comments: This is general comments for the remote hosts. The field can be left blank.
D Click on Save Host , when done.
The Please Wait message pops–up until the parameters are configured.
Then the Host data saved successfully display
The Host Management menu displays again, in order for you to add/modify other hosts. When done
with hosts declaration, click on Next Step to continue.
See Section 4–4 for more details on Hosts management.
D When you are done with Hosts declaration, click on Next Step to continue.
See Section 5 (APPENDIX) for more details on Hosts management.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You will do this later, when instructed.
Note:
If you have selected Direct Connect through Hospital Network, and have not chosen to cancel
the message, don’t be alarmed to see at the next AW Restart, and at each AW restart, the
following Warning message:
It is recommended to use Direct Connect on a dedicated network
Please check the network configuration of remote hosts:
– <remote_host>
– <remote_host>
– .............
OK
56
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
4-3-3 Routers management menu
The Routers declaration main Menu pops–up
The central window of the menu, displays the routing tables (result of the ”netstat –r” command).
Refer to chapter 9, for more information on networks and routers.
D To declare a default router (gateway), click on Add Default Gateway.
The following window pops–up
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
Add Default Gateway
Gateway address :
.
Number of hops :
.
.
(No entry = No hops)
Cancel
Save Router
D Enter the Gateway address, and the number of hops (default=0), then click on Save Router.
(For more information, see chapter 9 : route add default gw ....)
The Default Gateway declared successfully message displays
D Click on the OK button to continue. You get back to the Routers declaration main Menu.
D To declare a route to a network, click on Add Network Router.The following window pops–up
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
Add Network router
Gateway address :
.
.
.
Network address :
.
.
.
Netmask :
.
.
.
Number of hops :
(may be empty)
(No entry = No hops)
Cancel
Save Router
D Enter the Gateway address (if any), the address of the network to reach, the netmask and the
number of hops (default=0), then click on Save Router.
(For more information, see chapter 9 : route add net ....)
The Network router declared successfully message displays
D Click on the OK button to continue. You get back to the Routers declaration main Menu.
57
INSTALLATION
11 of 26
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
12 of 26
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
D To declare a route to a host, click on Add Host Router.The following window pops–up
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
Add Host router
Gateway address :
.
.
.
Host address :
.
.
.
Number of hops :
(No entry = No hops)
Cancel
Save Router
D Enter the Gateway address, the address of the host to reach, and the number of hops (default=0),
then click on Save Router.
(For more information, see chapter 9 : route add host ....)
The Host router declared successfully message displays
D Click on the OK button to continue. You get back to the Routers declaration main Menu.
D When done with the routers declaration, click on Next Step to continue.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You will do this later, when instructed.
AW upgrade case:
CAUTION
If your customer has required that you transfer the patient images from the old
workstation to the new one, you can start to prepare the transfer now.
Refer to Chapter 2, Section 5 for procedure.
4-3-4 Dicom Printers menu
The Dicom Printer Management Menu pops–up
Note:
The View Dicom Print Parameters button allows you to view the Dicom Print parameters of
your workstation, as they must be entered in the Dicom printers, in order to ensure successful
Dicom associations with these remote printers. Therefore this menu is not User configurable.
Click on Back to Printer Management button, to return to the Dicom Printer Management
menu when done.
D Click on Add Printer to create a new Dicom printer entry, or select an existing entry in the table
then click on Modify Printer, to modify an existing Dicom printer information.
The Dicom Printer Parameters Menu pops–up
58
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
DICOM Printer Parameters
DICOM printer label :
Hostname :
Application Entity Title (AET) :
Network address :
.
.
.
Port number :
Layouts :
Slide formats :
12 bits image supported :
Colour supported :
Film size :
Letter Format
, 1x1 , 2x1 3x2
, 1x2 , 2x2 , 4x2
35mm , 40mm
3x3
4x3
3x5
4x4
4x5
4x6
,
8 in x 10 in
8,5 in x 11 in
10 in x 12 in
10 in x 14 in
11 in x 14 in
11 in x 17 in
14 in x 14 in
14 in x 17 in
24 in x 24 in
24 cm x 30 cm
A4
A3
A
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
W
W
H
H
Printer pixel size (micron):
Configuration
information:
Density :
Magnification type :
Min
Cubic
Smoothing factor :
Trim :
Max
REPLICATE
BILINEAR
CUBIC
NONE
No
MBytes
Printer memory size :
Cancel
Save Printer
D Enter the Dicom Printer parameters, as defined by the Vendor’s Printer Dicom conformance
statement. See Chapter 1, IST006 for more information.
Note:
The Dicom Printer Label (name you want to give to your printer) is at your own choice.
59
INSTALLATION
13 of 26
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
14 of 26
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
– 12 bits image supported : Not used for AW application.
– Pixel depth and Printer pixel size: Not used for AW application.
– Density: AW application uses this information if supplied for your camera, and entered in the
corresponding fields. In the other case, leave the fields blank.
– Configuration information: (i.e.: PERCEPTION_LUT=LINEAR):
Allows to select the LUT of the printer instead of the default AW LUT
D Click on Save Printer , when done.
The Printer data saved successfully message displays.
D Click on the OK button to continue. The Printer Management menu displays again, in order for
you to add/modify other Dicom printers.
D
When done with Dicom printers declaration, click on Next Step to continue.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You will do this later, when instructed.
4-3-5 Postscript Printers menu
The Postscript Printer Management Menu pops–up
D Click on Add Printer , or select an existing entry in the table then click on Modify Printer, to
create a new postscript printer entry or modify an existing postscript printer.
The Postscript Printer Parameters Menu pops–up
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
Postscript Printer Parameters
Printer name :
Codonics (1660M 1660MD)
Printer model :
A
or
A4
Printer type :
Color
Paper format :
Letter (or A for Codonics)
Network address :
.
.
.
Hostname :
Cancel
Save Printer
D Enter the Postscript Printer parameters, as defined by the Vendor’s Printer operator’s and service
manuals. See Chapter 1, IST006 for more information.
D Click on Save Printer , when done. The printer is ping’ed to check if it is alive. If it is not the case,
the printer declaration will not be taken into account.
The Printer data saved successfully message displays.
60
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
D Click on the OK button to continue. The Printer Management menu displays again, in order for
you to add/modify other Postscript printers.
The Postscript Printers supported with the present AW release are:
– Codonics (1660M 1660MD)
– Codonics Horizon
– HP LaserJet
– Kodak (DMI 3600)
– Lexmark (Optra 1650N 1855N SC1275N C710n C720N T612 T614)
– QMI GL2101HD Film/ThickPaper
– QMI GL2101HD Plain Paper
– Seiko (1720D)
– Tally (T8106)
– Phaser Xerox
D
When done with postscript printers declaration, click on Next Step to continue.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You will do this later, when instructed.
4-3-6 Dicom MOD Installation menu
Note:
The MOD drive must be on.
Note:
The MOD drive from Installed Base upgrades is supported read–only with AW4.4.
The Dicom MOD Installation Menu pops–up
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
Dicom MOD installation
To install Dicom MOD, click on Install. The result will appear in the text box below.
To uninstall Dicom MOD, click on Uninstall.The result will appear in the text box
below.
When all settings are done, click on Next step (full configuration mode), or quit
the Common Service Desktop if done with the configuration.
Install
Test MOD
Uninstall
Next Step
D Click on Install . The SCSI bus is scanned and the result is displayed in the window.
The SCSI options connected and turned on (Dicom MOD drive) will be installed.
If the MOD drive installation is not successful, you will get the following message:
”Checking Dicom Mod installation:
Verifying access to the drive ...
61
INSTALLATION
15 of 26
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
16 of 26
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
FAILURE OPENING THE DEVICE. ERROR FOLDER KEY NOT FOUND
The MOD configuration file appears corrupt.
..........................
FAILURE INSTALLING DICOM MOD”
If the MOD drive installation is successful, you will get the following message:
”Checking Dicom Mod installation:
Verifying access to the drive ...
..........................
DICOM MOD SUCCESSFULLY INSTALLED”
The Dicom MOD installed successfully message displays.
D Click on the OK button to continue.
D When done with the SCSI MOD drive installation, click on Next Step to continue.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You will do this later, when instructed.
4-3-7 Applications and Licensing menu
The Applications and Licensing Menu pops–up
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
Applications and Licensing
AW can work with local licensing, but can use network (floating) licenses as well.
Here you can see the licensing mode. Configure the licensing mode by clicking on
the corresponding checkbox and filling or changing the data.
Click on Save Parameters to save the parameters checked.
1
2
3
4
Floating License Client Access Enabler
Licensing mode
Standalone mode
Network mode
Primary license server IP address
.
License server port
.
.
.
.
17667
Secondary license server IP address
.
Inactivity release time
Disable
30 minutes
60 minutes
120 minutes
Contact phone number
5
Workstation local information
Reset to last saved values
62
Save parameters
Next Step
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
4-3-7-1Licensing configuration
1. First select if your site will have local licenses (Standalone mode) or Network licenses (Network
mode = floating licenses between several AWs managed by a remote server).
D If Standalone mode, jump to 4-3-7-2.
2. If Network mode, enter Primary and Secondary license server(s) IP addresses
3. Port is set to ”17767” by default. You may change it if otherwise specified.
4. Set the inactivity timeout, time before freeing the licences for another station when not in use.
5. Enter a contact phone number and workstation local information .
6. Finally click on Save Parameters, and click on Next Step when done.
4-3-7-2Applications installation
Applications installation is only accessible through the Easy Install menu.
D To access the Easy Install menu, you need to restart AW now.
Select Restart AW from the Root Menu. Refer to section 4–5 for details.
Do not be alarmed to see a Warning pop–up message, if you have selected ”Direct connect”
through the Hospital Network.
D Start Easy Install from the User Interface / Admin/Install Package, and install the Advanced
applications from the Hard disk (preloaded Applications), and/or from their respective Cdroms.
Refer to Chapter 1, Job Card IST005.
Note:
All Applications operator’s and installation instructions are now only accessible on–line.
Some applications are released on 2 Cdroms. The second Cdrom contains the Operator’s
and Installation documentation. This Cdrom should be loaded as well on your AW station.
Note:
When installing the newer Applications, the associated Installation Manual displays
automatically.
If you do not wish to read the manual at this time, DO NOT quit, but simply close or
iconify the document window.
Quitting it would close the Mozilla viewer, and your CSD window as well.
D When done with the Software options installation, press simultaneously on <Alt> <F3> to iconify
the AW Patient list and double–click on the Mozilla icon to reopen the Configuration menu.
Click on Next Step to continue.
63
INSTALLATION
17 of 26
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
18 of 26
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
4-3-8 HTTP support configuration menu
The HTTP support configuration Menu pops–up
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
HTTP support configuration
To install HTTP support, click on Install. The result will appear in the text box below.
To uninstall HTTP support, click on Uninstall.The result will appear in the text box below.
When all settings are done, click on Next step (full configuration mode), or quit the Common Service Desktop if done with the configuration.
Install
Uninstall
Next Step
The http server is intentionally disabled to increase network security.
This step allows to enable the HTTP server, in order to export files with DataExport through the http
protocol to a remote host running a Web navigator.
Only configure the DataExport http server, if you site intends to export files through the http protocol.
In the other case, directly click on Next Step to bypass this step.
D Click on Install .
The Please Wait message pops–up until the parameters configured.
Then the HTTP support enabled successfully message displays
You can read in the central window the status of the installation.
D Click on OK to continue.
D When done with the HTTP support configuration, click on Next Step to continue.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You will do this later, when instructed.
4-3-9 InSite Installation menu
The InSite 1 Installation and Configuration menu window displays.
There is no specific CSD based tool at this time, to help you configure Insite. This window is only an
informational window, to let you know what steps should be done.
For more information on InSite installation and configuration, refer to Chapter 1, Job Card IST008.
D When done with Insite configuration, close the Command window to return to the CSD
configuration menu and click on Next Step to continue.
64
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You will do this later, when instructed.
CAUTION
This section is not intended to enable Insite 2.0 for Software download.
To enable Insite 2.0 for SWD, refer to section 4.4.2
4-3-10 User management menu
The Add User management menu window displays.
Note:
If your site is going to manage Users through the EA3 Enterprise Authentication server,
refer to Job Card IST009, section 8 (8–2) to set the EA3 server first.
If your site is not going to use EA3, you can create Users now as follows :
D Click on Add User button.
The Change User Passwords window displays. Create the new User data (mandatory fields are
User name and password), then click on Add User button
The Please Wait message pops–up until the parameters are configured.
Then the User data saved successfully message displays
D Click on OK to continue.
D When done with the User management, click on Next Step to continue.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You will do this later, when instructed.
4-3-11 System passwords management menu
The Change passwords for sdc, sdc_admin and root menu window displays.
D Select/highlight the User (sdc, sdc_admin or root) whose password you want to change by clicking
on the name, and click on the Change Password button.
The Change user password menu window displays.
D Type twice the new password in the password fields, and click on the Change Password button.
The Please Wait message pops–up until the parameters are configured.
Then the User password saved successfully message displays
D Click on OK to continue.
D Proceed with the same steps for the next user
D When done with the passwords management, click on Next Step to continue.
The Installation done information window displays.
4-3-12 Print current AW parameters menu
You can display and/or print on the default Postscript printer, the whole AW parameters.
65
INSTALLATION
19 of 26
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
20 of 26
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
4-4
Restart Application and install SMPTE test pattern
D Select Restart AW from the Root Menu, or under Application, from the System menu (you can
bypass this step if you have just rebooted your workstation).
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Display Configuration
Save Configuration
OR
Service Tools
AW Administration
Restart AW
SMPTE pattern is automatically installed part of the Fast Load with DVD.
It is not automatically installed when using the AW CDrom to load AW software (Load From Warm).
Note:
!!! No access to the VIEWER or to any features of the workstation is possible, as long
as no images have been installed on the workstation. !!!
D Install the SMPTE test patterns (if not done yet)
D Check that the SMPTE test patterns are available in the Patient List.
D Check that the SMPTE test patterns have been correctly installed. They should appear in the
Patient list.
66
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
11
21 of 26
4-5
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
Additional Site parameters
4-5-1 configure.patient_key
CAUTION
This script should be used very carefully, because it might lead to mix Patients
data into the AW Database.
DO NOT CHANGE the Database Management model, unless explicitly requested
by the Site.
The standard Database patient identification is based on 4 information:
– Patient name
– Patient ID (unique number to identify a patient in the hospital)
– Patient birth date
– Patient sex
Some sites may require that this Database Management model is changed to a less ”restrictive”
model: For example, Emergency sites which might not know the name of the Patient upon arrival
to the Radiology department.
These sites, may consequently require to have the Patient ID + Patient sex model only
D If your site requests a different Database management model, than the standard
Name_ID_Birth_sex model, open a Command Window and run the following script :
./export/home/sdc/scripts/configure.patient_key [Enter]
======== Database patient key configuration ========
WARNING!!!–––––––WARNING!!!
MODIFYING PATIENT_KEY ON NON RELIABLE CENTRALIZED
PATIENT ID MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS MAY LEAD
TO MIX PATIENTS IN THE AW DATABASE
Database patient key configuration
1 NAME_ID_BIRTH_SEX
(SAFEST) Patient is identified by his name, birthdate, hospital id and sex
2 NAME_ID_SEX
Patient is identified by his name, hospital id and sex
3 ID_SEX_BIRTH
(UNSAFE ON NON CENTRALIZED PATIENT ID SYSTEM) Patient is
identified only by his hospital id and sex
4
ID_SEX
(UNSAFE ON NON CENTRALIZED PATIENT ID SYSTEM) is identified
only by his hospital id and sex
Please choose the
[NAME_ID_BIRTH_SEX]
desired
Database
patient
key
configuration
[?,??,q]:
i.e : 2 [Enter]
Database patient key configuration : NAME_ID_SEX
Please confirm [y,n,?,q] y [Enter]
Note:
At this time, the Database is going to be reconstructed, to take the change into account.
PLEASE WAIT !!! DATABASE IS BEING RECONSTRUCTED !!!
67
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
22 of 26
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
5
NEC LCD MONITORS SETTINGS
Note:
For more accurate information on the monitor settings, and/or if the right format cannot be
obtained automatically, you need to setup the format manually on the monitor.
Refer to the monitor’s documentation delivered with the monitor
5-1
Check DVI and VGA inputs configuration
If not done yet, you must make sure that the DVI and VGA inputs of your monitor(s) is(are) properly
configured. See Job Card IST001 , section 6–1
5-2
Set Auto–adjust parameter to OFF
The NEC 1880SX, 19980SXi and 1990SXi LCD monitors must be configured to have the auto–adjust
disabled, in order not to automatically ”catch up” the screen size, after the Screen Saver is releasing
and unblanks the screen, and possibly display the image bigger than the field of view.
In order to set the auto–adjust parameter to ”disabled”, proceed as follows with each monitor
Illustration 1 –
NEC 1K Landscape LCD Monitor
EXIT
<
>
+
–
SELECT 1–2 RESET/OSM
ON/OFF
NEC 1880SX / 1980SXi
LCD Color monitor
Front View
Pre–requisite: The workstation is up and running AW application.
– Left screen : Display the Patient list for catching up the 1280x1024 format
– Right screen : Display the Viewer + Filmer in full screen mode for catching up the 1280x1024 format
You can use the SMPTE test patterns for performing this adjustment.
D Catch up the image resolution (format), by pressing alternatively on the Select 1–2 button , and
the Exit button. Note that at the first time the system is powered up, the image can be shifted to
the left or right, or out of the screen limits.
D When the image has the right format, turn OFF the monitor.
D Turn ON the monitor, while keeping the Select 1–2 button pressed.
The Brightness/Contrast menu pops up. You can now release the Select1–2 button.
68
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
12
D Press on the Exit button. The Monitor adjustment menu pops up.
D Press again on the Exit button.
D Press twice on the > button, and move to Tab 3 (auto–adjust).
Your monitor is most probably set to ”single” or to ”full”.
D Press on the Select 1–2 button.
D With the + and/or – buttons, move auto–adjust to OFF
D Press on the Exit button.
D Press again on the Exit button to quit the Monitor adjustment menu.
Do the same steps in order to set the auto–adjust of the second monitor (if applicable).
5-3
NEC 1980SXi ”fine” adjustment
In order to avoid potentially ”fuzzy” lines with the SMPTE pattern grid lines, that could also be visible
on certain densities of clinical images, you can fine adjust the monitor by performing the following
steps:
D Display the SMPTE pattern and/or a clinical image format 1/1
D Check the SMTE pattern grids for ”fuzzy” lines (or black to white pixel alternance on clinical
images)
D Click on the monitor’s Exit button
D Click twice on the monitor’s > button
D Click on Select 1/2 button
D Click on the monitor’s < button
D Click on the monitor’s + or – button to fine adjust the pixel alternance rendering
D Click twice on the monitor’s Exit button, when done.
Now it is time to shutdown and reboot the workstation.
Advantage Workstation Basic System is operational.
IT IS NOW TIME TO WRITE DOWN AW SOFTWARE PROTECTION KEY, SERIAL NUMBER OF
WORKSTATION, APPLICATION SUPPORT TELEPHONE NUMBER, HOSPITAL NAME AND
USER’S INTERFACE INFORMATION IN THE AW CONFIGURATION FORM LOCATED AT THE
BEGINNING OF THIS MANUAL.
69
INSTALLATION
23 of 26
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
24 of 26
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
6
APPENDIX 1: DECLARING REMOTE HOSTS: MORE INFORMATION
Note:
Some archive systems offer the ”Storage commitment” feature. If you select Storage
commitment = yes, you will have to fill in the corresponding fields with the AET, network
address and port number of the Storage system.Check with the Network administrator for
”Storage commitment” capability of your archive system.
6-1
Declaring an SDC Based Product: (AW4.0, AW3.1, AW2.0 and 1.2...)
CAUTION
These older AW products ARE NOT Dicom Query/retrieve providers. Therefore
you cannot query/retrieve images from them using the Dicom 3.0 protocol.
However you can push images from AW4.0, AW3.1, AW2.0 or AW1.2 using the
Dicom 3.0 protocol, to your AW4.3.
AW4.1 and AW4.2 ARE Dicom Query/retrieve providers. Therefore, AW4.0, AW3.1,
AW2.0, AW1.2 can query/retrieve images from them using the Dicom 3.0 protocol.
6-1-1 AW2.0 and AW1.2 case
D For these products, you must use exclusively the DICOM 3.0 protocol .
HOST LABEL
: Enter the name you want to give to the icon that will represent the remote host
HOSTNAME
: Enter hostname
APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE : Enter the Application Entity Title (A.E.T.) *
NETWORK ADDRESS : Enter Internet address
PROTOCOL FIELD
: select DICOM 3.0
PORT NUMBER
: Enter the listened Port number of the Target station
*
QUERY RETRIEVE : Not supported :
AW1.2 and AW2.0 ARE NOT Dicom query/retrieve provider.
STORAGE COMMITMENT : choose: NO .
COMMENT
: In the Comment field, add any comments you want.
D Click on Save button to update and Quit.
6-1-1-1 AW4.0 and AW3.1 case
D For these products, you can use the DICOM 3.0 protocol to support the Dicom Push from AW4.4,
or the appropriate SdCNet protocol, if your site wants to use the Query/retrieve feature.
For Dicom Push only : See above: Same as case AW1.2 or AW2.0
For SdCNet Query/Retrieve, refer to instructions hereafter
70
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
13
SdCNet Query/retrieve OK
AW4.1 / AW4.2
Remote Host
Dicom 3.0
Dicom Push OK
AW4.0 / AW3.1
Dicom Query/retrieve OK
AW4.1x /
AW4.2x /
AW4.3 /
AW4.4
AW4.0 / AW3.1
Remote Host
SdCNet
Dicom Query/retrieve KO
HOST LABEL : Enter the name you want to give to the icon that will represent the remote host
HOSTNAME
: Enter hostname
APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE : DE–ACTIVATED
NETWORK ADDRESS : Enter Internet address
PROTOCOL FIELD :
For Advantage Workstation 3.1 : select SdC NET 3.1
For Advantage Workstation 4.0 : select SdC NET 3.2 / 4.0
PORT NUMBER : DE–ACTIVATED
PROVIDER TYPE : DE–ACTIVATED
COMMENT :In the Comment field , add any comment you want.
D Click on Save button to update and Quit.
6-1-2 Declaring an AdvantageNet Based Product: (IC, Signa 5.X, CT–HLA, CT/i...)
Note:
For these products, use the DICOM 3.0 protocol .
HOST LABEL
: Enter the name you want to give to the icon that will represent the remote host
HOSTNAME
: Enter hostname
APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE : Enter the Application Entity Title (A.E.T.) *
NETWORK ADDRESS : Enter Internet address
OR
PROTOCOL FIELD : select DICOM 3.0
PORT NUMBER
: Enter the listened Port number of the Target station
*
QUERY RETRIEVE : Supported or Not Supported (depend on the system and its release)
STORAGE COMMITMENT : DE–ACTIVATED
COMMENT
: In the Comment field, add any comment you want.
6-1-3 Declaring a DICOM3 Host: (AW4.4, AW4.3, AW4.2, AW4.1, MR Lx, CT/i, CT Synergy,
DLX, MR Lx... and Third party hosts)
HOST LABEL
: Enter the name you want to give to the icon that will represent the remote host
HOSTNAME
: Enter hostname
APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE : Enter the Application Entity Title (A.E.T.) *
NETWORK ADDRESS : Enter Internet address
71
INSTALLATION
25 of 26
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
26 of 26
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 002 Installation and Configuration Menu
PROTOCOL FIELD
: select DICOM 3.0
PORT NUMBER
: Enter the listened Port number of the Target station
QUERY RETRIEVE : supported
*
Note : AW4.1, AW4.2 / AW4.2P, and AW4.3 are Dicom ”Study_Root providers”.
However they should be declared as ”Patient” on AW stations.
STORAGE COMMITMENT : choose:
NO (unless otherwise specified by the product Dicom Conformance Statement)
COMMENT
: In the Comment field, add any comments you want.
* This information can be obtained from the Remote Host Conformance statement documents.
D Click on Save button to update and Quit.
Note:
The Port number depends on the DICOM system to be connected. For instance, AW listens
to DICOM Hosts on the Port 4006.
Note:
Network Remote Hosts are not updated in the /etc/inet/hosts file, but can be found in the file
/export/home/sdc/Prefs/SdCRHosts. For this reason, it is not possible to use “ping”, “telnet”,
“spray” and similar commands using the hostname. The internet address must be used
instead. For example, to ping the MR operator’s console from the A.W. workstation, do not
use /bin/ping MR01_OC0. Instead, use its internet address:
e.g.: /bin/ping –c 1 192.9.200.1. (–c 1 is the number of ping occurrences)
Therefore, though it is not mandatory to declare hosts in the /etc/hosts file, when using the
Dicom 3.0 protocol, we recommend you to do it in any case.
6-1-4 Declaring a Dicom IC (Independent Console)
Declare the host as any other Dicom3 host using the Dicom3.0 protocol.
7
APPENDIX 2: PRINTING DOCUMENTATION
It is possible to print part or all of the on–line documentation (Service and/or Operator’s manuals), on
the default Postscript printer declared with your AW workstation.
Open the desired documentation and select to print from the ”Acroread” reader print feature, but not
from the ”Mozilla” print feature.
This will send the document or parts of it depending on your selection, to the Postscript printer chosen
as default printer for your AW.
14
72
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Time: 0 h 10 min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 16
TOOLS REQUIRED
None
2
PREREQUISITES
Steps from Job Card IST 001 have been completed.
The workstation is up and running. Bypass steps 3–1 if you are continuing from IST002 configuration.
3
LAUNCH THE CONFIGURATION TOOL
D Login as sdc if not done yet:
console login : sdc [Enter]
Password : adw4.4 [Enter]
3-1
(the sdc password is factory loaded as adw4.4)
Start the Common Service Desktop (CSD)
D From the AW User Interface, select Admin / Service Tools.
(You may as well press on the middle button of the mouse, and select the Root Menu / Service
Tools / Service Tools menu).
The Common Service Desktop displays within the Mozilla navigator web page.
Note : A Warning message displays on top of the CSD menu when accessing the CSD remotely.
[JavaScript Application]
The customer should be aware of the manipulations you’re intending
to do on the site !
The workstation should not be in use while the diagnostic and Configuration tasks
are being performed !
OK
(1)
(3)
D Click (1) on the OK to close the Warning window (remote access).
73
(2)
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
15
2 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
3-2
Start the Utilities Tool menu
D Click (2) on the Utilities button.
The Utility menu displays within the Mozilla navigator web page.
4
CHECK PNF FIREWALL SETTINGS
PNF stands for Product Network Filters.
This is the common firewall used for the GE Healthcare products. The Firewall is turned on by
default on AW, to offer the maximum protection for the network, and in most of the cases, no
additional configuration is necessary. You should let the Firewall turned on, unless you experience
troubles contacting Host(s) or application(s), needing to open additional services or ports.
Note:
Upgrades from AW4.1, AW4.2 or AW4.3, with configuration restoration from CDrom turn
the PNFfirewall off. Therefore you will need to turn PNF on manually.
By default, all Dicom remote hosts that you have declared to your workstation (see section 4–4–2)
get the access rights to ping, ftp, and telnet to your AW.
The following steps are listed for your information only. No configuration of the Firewall is necessary,
unless otherwise specified by the installation instructions of an Application.
Note:
All settings that you will do to the PNF will be saved together with the other AW configuration
parameters in the AW Configuration Cdrom.
D Click on the Firewall configuration button.
As this is your first entry into the Firewall configuration menu, you will be prompted to type in the
Root password. The following window pops–up:
74
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
16
3 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
D Type in the root password and press [Enter].
The Product Network Filters utility displays with the ”Named Services” tab selected.
Named Services menu
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
Utilities
Firewall configuration
Product Network Filter
Firewall:
On
Off
Apply
Named Services Allowed Nodes DICOM Expert GE Service Debug Help
Named Services
Service
Allowed IP’s
ping (icmp)
New
Delete
(1)
*
Services
Services
Kerberos
ftp
http
https
......
Add
Firewall Settings
Apply
Backup
(3)
Restore
Factory Defaults
(2)
D Check that the Firewall is turned On.
This is the default setting. Unless you had turned it off previously, stored the settings, and that it is
a reinstallation, it should remain turned On, in order to offer the maximum network security.
75
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
17
4 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
Note:
In case you would meet some troubles contacting hosts, or using applications, you may
temporarily turn the Firewall Off, and check if this solves your issue.
Click on the Off button, then click of the Apply (1) buton located next to the On/Off buttons,
so the change is taken into account. When done, do not forget to turn On again the firewall.
By default, all other hosts are simply authorized to ping your AW. You can see it by the * placed in the
Allowed IP’s field on the side of the Ping service.
Nothing else is set by default, and unless otherwise specified, you should not add any new service.
The following are example steps for adding services:
D If you need to authorize one or several host(s) or network(s), to use one or more services, click on
the arrow (2) next to Services to open the services chooser menu, select a service (i.e: ftp, telnet,
etc ...) and type in the IP or range of IP addresses, or simply *, if you want to authorize all hosts.
D When done click on the Apply (3) button located at the bottom of the screen.
See example below:
Named Services Allowed Nodes DICOM Expert GE Service Debug Help
Named Services
Service
Allowed IP’s
ping (icmp)
ftp
New
(1)
*
192.100.1.18–192.100.1.22
telnet
192.100.1.5
telnet
192.100.1.19
Services
Add
Delete
Firewall Settings
Apply
(2)
Backup
Restore
Factory Defaults
(3)
In our example, we have authorized hosts from 192.100.1.18 to 192.100.1.22 to ftp to our AW, and
only host 192.100.1.5 and 192.100.9.19 to telnet to our AW.
This is the reason why you have 2 lines for the telnet service.
D To remove access rights, just click on the checkbox (1) next to the service name, then click on the
Delete button (2). Do not forget to click on the Apply button (3) to take the change into account.
Allowed Nodes menu
D Click on Allowed Nodes tab. The Allowed Nodes menu displays.
The Allowed Nodes menu allows you to open all ports for a dedicated host, a range or hosts or
subnetwork.
76
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
18
Named Services Allowed Nodes DICOM Expert GE Service Debug Help
Allowed Nodes
Node IP
New
Add
Delete
(4)
(1)
Apply
(5)
(2)
Firewall Settings
Backup
Restore
Factory Defaults
(3)
D In case you would need to give all access rights to one or several host(s) or network(s), click into
the IP field (1) next to New, and type in the IP address or range of IP addresses. Click on Add (2).
When done click on the Apply (3) button located at the bottom of the screen.
D To remove access rights, just click on the checkbox (4) next to the service name, then click on the
Delete button (5). Do not forget to click on the Apply button (3) to take the change into account.
DICOM menu
D Click on DICOM tab. The DICOM menu displays.
By default ports 4006 and 4008 are open for the DICOM communication.
– Port 4006 is used for Dicom Query and Retrieve
– Port 4008 is used for Dicom Storage Commitment
These ports cannot be manually removed. They are in sync with the Remote Node Control (see
section 4.4.1 : Site parameters). Turning Remote Note control ON disables the ports.
D You can add more ports if needed, by entering the port number and clicking on the Add button.
When done click on the Apply button.
D To remove a Port, just click on the checkbox next to the Port name, then click on the Delete button.
Do not forget to click on the Firewall Settings Apply button to take the change into account.
Expert menu
D Click on Expert tab. The Expert menu displays.
This menu is reserved for giving the access rights to an Application(s) of a host, and not to the whole
host. You can add applications if needed, by entering Application name (or title), port number,
choosing the network protocol and clicking on the Add button. When done click on the Apply button.
CCOW application:
D If your site is going to use the CCOW application, check that the following ports have been
enabled following the CCOW configuration steps completion (see section 6, page 85):
– Name : RMI – Port : 1099 – Protocol : tcp – Allowed IP’s : *
– Name : CCOW – Port : 12355 – Protocol : tcp – Allowed IP’s : *
77
INSTALLATION
5 of 16
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
19
6 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
D To remove access rights, click on the checkbox next to the Application name, then click on the
Delete button. Do not forget to click on the Apply button to take change into account.
GE Service menu
D Click on GE Service tab. The GE Service menu displays.
This menu is aimed for giving the access rights for InSite through the VOLC server:
– Through the standard GE Service network
(default: general case)
or
– Through the NHSnet dedicated network for certain UK sites
or
– Through the SJUnet dedicated network for certain Northern Europe sites
or
– Through entering a ”manual IP address” for any other dedicated network
Named Services Allowed Nodes DICOM Expert GE Service Debug Help
GE Service
InSite Remote Service Connectivity
No connectivity
Pre–defined settings
Standard (150.2.0.0/16)
Manual IP
Update
Firewall Settings
(1)
Apply
Backup
Restore
Factory Defaults
(2)
If your site is not going to use InSite, you may select No connectivity and click on the Update button,
then on the Firewall Settings Apply button to take the change into account.
If your site is not going to use the standard 150.2.0.0/16 Network address for InSite connectivity, you
may select one of the preset (UK NHSnet or SJUnet) networks if applicable to your country.
Click on the Apply settings button, then click on the Firewall Settings Apply button to take the
change into account.
78
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
20
7 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
Named Services Allowed Nodes DICOM Expert GE Service Debug Help
GE Service
InSite Remote Service Connectivity
No connectivity
Pre–defined settings
Standard (150.2.0.0/16)
Select a preset
UK NHSnet (62.130.238.0/24)
Northern Europe SJUnet (82.136.152.0/24)
Standard (150.2.0.0/16)
Manual IP
Update
(1)
Firewall Settings
(2)
Apply
Backup
Restore
Factory Defaults
(3)
If none of the presets fits for your site, you may select Manual IP entry, type in the IP address of the
network corresponding to your case, and click on the Update button, then click on the Firewall
Settings Apply button to take the change into account.
Debug menu
D Click on Debug tab. The debug menu displays the IP table output.
– Firewall is off (all trafic allowed) if you have turned off the firewall
– IP addresses and protocols used of all authorized hosts
or
Help menu
D Click on Help tab. The Help menu displays.
Before exiting from the PNF Firewall menu, make sure that the Firewall is ON, and verify on the
modality console (CT, MR, ...) that AW can be reached via telnet and ftp.
Backup and Restore buttons
D Click on Backup button to store your settings.
If you are not sure of your changes, you can choose to restore the Factory defaults , or the
settings previously saved (Restore button).
All settings that you have done will be saved, together with all the other AW parameters, into the AW
Site Configuration CD. See IST009, section 9.
79
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
8 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
5
INSITE 2.0 CONFIGURATION: SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD FEATURE.
WARNING !!! SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD feature shall not be used WITH THE PRESENT AW4.4_04
release, until further communication is done by Service Note or OLC letter !!!
Note:
Prior to be able to configure InSite 2.0 Software Download, you need to enter in the Site
Parameters, the System ID number for your site. If not done yet, refer to section 4.3.1.
For regular use of InSite (InSite 1.0, telnet and ftp tools), refer to Chapter 1, IST008
D Open a Command window (click Admin / Command Window ) and type in:
su – root [Enter]
Password : operator [Enter]
/export/home/sdc/scripts/configure.swdownload [Enter]
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
After the Software Download Agent is turned on, the fields marked * shall be changed
on the server first and then on the agent side!
Please follow top–to–bottom order when filling up the fields below.
All fields are mandatory in order to have the Agent registered on the IDM server.
If a numeric data is not known, please enter 0.
If a text data is not known, please enter n/a.
––––––––––––––––– Software Download Configuration –––––––––––––––––––––––
descr
: *description of the device (current = )
addr
: *address /street and number/ (current = )
city
: *city name (current = ).
state
: *state or province name (current = )
zip
: *postal code (current = )
country
: *country name (current = )
loc
: *location (current = )
lat
: *latitude coordinate (current = )
lon
: *longitude coordinate (current = )
inst
: *institute description (current = )
net
: network type (current = ISDN)
server
: GE server URL (current = )
proxy
: proxy server IP or URL (current = )
auth
: proxy authentication [on|off](current = off)
if authentication is on:
login
: change the proxy login name
pass
: change the proxy password
acc
: acceptance popup prior download [on|off] (current = yes)
dfire
drec
drecf
: first download popup display time [hh:mm] (current = 09:00)
: download recurrence availabile [yes|no]
: download acceptance popup recurrance frequency in hours
(current = 10)
ifire
irecf
: first install popup display time [hh:mm] (current = 09:05)
: install acceptance popup recurrance frequency in hours
(current = 10)
80
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
poll
: server polling time frequency in hours (current = 1)
status
: Software Download status [on|off] (current = off)
––––––––––––––––––
q : restart agent and quit this menu (use it when configuration was modified)
e : exit this menu without restarting the agent (use it when the configuration was
not modified)
Enter the keyword :
Note:
All fields are mandatory. If one field is not applicable to your site, please enter n/a for a text
value or 0 for a numeric value.
– Start by answering the site description and location fields. Type in each keyword one by one
followed by [Enter] (descr ; addr ; city ; state ; zip ; country ;...) and fill up each field to properly
and uniquely describe your system to the SW download server.
These fields can be modified as long as the connection to the SW download server has
not been done. Once connection has been done, your system is identified and
information marked with a * must not be modified, unless it is modified as well on the
SWD server !!!
i.e:
descr [Enter] AW4.4 system Engineering Buc
addr [Enter] GEMS , 283 rue de la Miniere
city [Enter] BUC
state [Enter] n/a (for not applicable or enter state name)
zip [Enter] 78530
country [Enter] FRANCE
(use capital letters)
loc [Enter] Room RTG3104
inst [Enter] BUC RTG 3104
lat [Enter] 20 (or enter 0 if not known)
lon [Enter] 40 (or enter 0 if not known)
net [Enter] ISDN (or any other suitable network system for your site)
– Then enter the GE Server IP address : Type in:
server [Enter]
Enter GE server address : https://plt.us1–ws.service.gehealthcare.com:443 [Enter]
– Now enter the proxy server IP address: Type in:
proxy [Enter]
Enter proxy address : i.e : 3.231.200.170:88 [Enter]
(Ask the IT manager of the hospital for the appropriate proxy address to enter)
– Keep the default values for auth , acc and poll, unless otherwise specified:
– Keep the default values for the popup displays, unless otherwise specified:
dfire
: first download popup display time [hh:mm]
drec
: download recurrence availabile [yes|no]
drecf
: download acceptance popup recurrence frequency in hours
ifire
: first install popup display time [hh:mm]
irecf
: install acceptance popup recurrence frequency in hours
81
INSTALLATION
9 of 16
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
10 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
– Check that everything you have entered is OK, because once SW download is turned on, it will
no longer be possible to change any data.
Finally turn on Software download: Type in:
status [Enter]
Would you like to turn on/off Software Download: [off] on [Enter]
D Enter the User name : insite (all lower case) and the InSite password : 2getin
Starting Questra Service Agent: qsaDaemon ...........
The system name being declared to the SW download server displays.
i.e:AW_FR_AW42PTESTNET
corresponding to: AW_<country–code>_<SysID>
– Quit the configuration menu when done: q [Enter]
Error messages :
The following messages may display during preliminary configuration steps:
:
– You must be root to run this script!
Workaround: switch user to root
– You need to configure the System Id first!
Please check install.site and enter sid or Service Tools–>Configuration! :
System ID not declared. :
Workaround: Configure System ID : see IST002, section 4.3.1, Site parameters
Service Agent:
D Back to CSD. Start the Service Agent.
From the Utilities menu, click on the Insite 2.0 link.
The Questra Service Agent allows you to check the downloaded packages, and manually launch
installation of them, if your site does not allow automatic installation by the customer.
Note:
In case you would want to access the Service Agent from a remote station or PC, open your
Navigator window and type in : http://<IP address of the AW station>:7001/home.html
The Questra Service Agent window pops–up:
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
QUESTRA
Questra Service Agent
User Name
Password
Login
82
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
11 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
D Click on the Login button.
The Available Software Packages window pops–up:
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
QUESTRA
Available Software Packages for ALL
Device Name
Download
Package Name
Install
Decline
Description
Status
Mandatory
Install–by Date
Update Status
D Click on the View Available Packages button.
A list of all packages (patches, updates, etc...) appropriate for your workstation displays.
D Select the package you want to download or install by clicking on the corresponding checkbox,
and click on the Download or the Install button.
D When you are done, quit the Questra Service Agent.
Useful files and directories :
D /export/home/sdc/logfiles/swdlog:
This is the SWDownload logfile
D /export/home/sdc/Prefs/qsa:
qsaconfig.xml ; properties.xml ; swdpolicies.xml
These are the configuration files, stored into Prefs that you can save onto the AW config CD, for
future reinstallation if necessary.
D /usr/share/qsa/bin
This directory contains the configuration, download and installation scripts:
configure.swdownload ; pre_download ; pre_install
D /usr/share/qsa/etc
This directory contains the country codes list file. You can check your country code by typing :
more country_code [Return]
83
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
12 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
6
CCOW OPTION CONFIGURATION
6-1
Configuration steps on AW
D From the CSD / Utilities menu, click on the CCOW configuration link.
The following window pops–up:
CCOW Properties
This page created to modify the default CCOW properties.
After the settingd modified, please click on Save Settings button and please log out .
System settings
Enabled
(1)
License key:
(2)
(3)
Default Language
English
Port to be used for communication. This port has to be enabled in Firewall settings.
Port
(4)
12355
Launch applications on context change :
(5)
Context Change Behavior
Enable context change for AW :
(6)
If context change enabled, then AW is able to send context change messages,
when only the exam changed for the same patient.
Enable exam change :
(7)
Suffix to be used at message creation. The Patient.Id.MRN.<suffix> will be sent to
context Manager.
Suffix
(8)
CCOW
When context change initiated for AW, then AW is able to force the change independently whether any application is able to make the change or not.
Force context change :
(9)
At incoming context change, AW selects the most recent series of a given patient. If
default modality configured, then the most recent exam will be selected with this
modality, if available.
Default modality
(10)
MG
It is possible that some applications are not able to store long patient identifiers values. AW is able to make partial patient identifier matching at patient search.
In this case, the first N characters of the patient identifier will ne used.
Enable partial patient identifier match :
(11)
Character count at partial patient identifier change
User messages
Show popup message after every successful context change :
Show ballon messages :
(12)
Save settings
(13)
84
15
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
1. Enable the CCOW application manager. Click on Enabled checkbox.
2. Enter the license key.
3. Choose the language.
4. Keep default Port 12335. Port 12355 will be enabled by default in the PNF Firewall when
saving (13) CCOW configuration. Additionnaly, Port 1099 for RMI will be also enabled
See section 4: PNF configuration ”Dicom menu” tab.
5. Launch applications on Context change.
This feature is selected by default.
When the RIS sends a context change request to AW, then AW will select the patient in the
Browser, and lauch the default application on the selection.
If the feature is not selected, the application will not launch upon Context change request.
6. Enable Context change behavior.
Do not select by default. This depends on the RIS behavior. If you select it, this will allow you to
modify the default behavior settings of the Context manager as follows:
Note : The RIS shall support DICOMStudy context change.
If only Context change is enabled, the AW will send selection change to the RIS, only when a
new patient is selected in the Patient List:
See section 6–3: CCOW RIS synchronization behavior
7. Enable exam change.
Pre–requisite: Context Change Behavior (6)is enabled.
If Exam change is enabled, the AW will send selection change to the RIS, only when the exam is
changed within the same patient.
8. Suffix to be used at message creation.
Pre–requisite: Context Change Behavior (6)is enabled.
The default suffix put for Patient identification is ”CCOW”.
Your customer may ask you to change this suffix to another suitable value.
Type in the new suffix: (i.e : RIS)
9. Force context change.
Pre–requisite: Context Change Behavior (6)is enabled.
The default setting allows AW to force a context change whether or not the modality is able to do
it itself.
10. Default modality.
The default setting is MG (Mamography). Your customer may want that another default modality
is selected when a context changed is initiated.
11. Enable partial Patient identification.
The default setting is to enable this feature and allow identification with only15 characters.
This setting can be modified in order to allow a different number of characters to be used for
partial identification.
12. User messages.
The default setting is to enable popup messages in ballon, after each successful context
change.
13. When done with all the changes, click on Save settings button to save and exit the CCOW
configuration tool.
85
INSTALLATION
13 of 16
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
14 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
D Logout and login to make the changes effective.
D Check that CCOW and RMI ports are enabled in PNF Firewall. See section 3–2–1 page 77.
Note:
The CCOW license will be checked at the next logout/login.
If the license key is not valid, you may get the message:
xmessage
Invalid or no license key for CCOW functionality
Dismiss
6-2
Configuration steps on the RIS PC
See Section 8 : APPENDIX
6-3
CCOW RIS synchronization behavior
It is possible that the RIS/MIS system installed at your site, does not handle the incoming Context
Change request correctly from AW4.4.
Data loss is possible in the RIS system if context change request is coming from AW4.4/Seno
Advantage 2.1 while the user is creating/dictating the report.
It is possible that the RIS system may not save the data modifications to the active patient if an
incoming context change request from the AW4.4/SA2.1 causes the RIS to switch to another patient
without warning before the report is completed and saved.
This behavior has to be explained to the customer and if the customer does not accept it then the
context change from AW4.4 shall be disabled.
Note:
We recommend that you do not enable by default the Context Change from AW, unless
explicitly required by your customer.
If your customer requires that you enable the Context Change from AW,, the following helps you to
check the correct system behavior:
1. Ensure that the context change initiation is enabled for AW4.4 (in Service Tools under
Utilities/CCOW Configuration menu the Enable context change from AW option is checked) and
working properly (selection changes in the AW Patient List initiates context change so the same
patient is selected in the RIS system automatically).
2. Edit some data in the RIS system for the currently selected patient. Do not save your
modifications.
3. Change the selected patient in the Patient List of AW.
4. Check the behavior of the RIS system:
– A/ The RIS system changes to the new patient without any notification.
i. Change back to the previous patient in the RIS and check that your modifications saved
correctly. Independently whether the RIS saved the modifications in its database, explain the
situation to the customer, and if requested then disable the context change from AW4.4
(unselect the Enable context change from AW option).
86
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
– B/ The RIS system does not change to the new patient.
i. This means that the RIS system blocks the change until the changes saved correctly. I this
case the systems are out of sync. Explain the situation to the customer, and if requested then
disable the context change from AW4.4 (unselect the Enable context change from AW option).
– C/ The RIS system asks the user whether they want to save/change.
i. This means that the RIS system requires the user to decide what to do. Explain the situation
to the customer, and if requested then disable the context change from AW4.4 (unselect the
Enable context change from AW option).
5. If you modified the CCOW configuration on AW then click on the Save Settings button of the
CCOW Configuration page and log out and log in to AW.
After log in ”reconnect” the RIS computer to AW4.4 using the Connect to AW feature of AW CCOW
Proxy configuration tool on the RIS PC.
If the Customer requested you to unselect Enable Context Change from the AW4.4/SA2.1 you should
retest the system behavior following steps 2–4 above. Confirm that selecting a different patient at the
AW4.4/SA2.1 does NOT initiate a context change (select a different patient) at the RIS. Demonstrate
this operation with the customer and confirm they are satisfied with its operation.
7
SOFTSWITCH OPTION CONFIGURATION
7-1
Configuration steps on AW
D From the CSD / Utilities menu, click on the SoftSwitch link.
The following window pops–up:
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
O Search
http://...............................................
SoftSwitch Properties
This page created to modify the default SoftSwitch properties.
After the settingd modified, please click on Save Settings button and please log out .
Softswitch is enabled :
/
(1)
License key:
(2)
The IP address of the computer to control :
(3)
(4)
VNC password of the computer to control
Determine which edge leads to the other screen :
1223456789
192.9.101.45
*********
Left
(5)
Save settings
1. Enable Softswitch. Click on the checkbox.
2. Enter the license key.
87
INSTALLATION
15 of 16
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
16 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
3. Enter the IP address of the RIS computer to control.
192.9.101.45 in our example above.
4. VNC password: Use the same password that has been entered (or that you will enter) on the
VNC server of the RIS PC. i.e: operator. The VNC password must be at least 6 characters long.
The password shows as ****** on the configuration screen.
5. Default setting is that the left edge of one screen leads to the next screen. You can change this
setting to ”bottom”or ”right” or ”top”, if needed.
D When done with all the changes, click on Save settings button to save and exit the SoftSwitch
configuration tool.
D Logout and login to make the changes effective.
D Quit the Common Service Desktop when done with configuration.
Note:
The Softswitch license will be checked at the next logout/login.
If the license key is not valid, you may get the message:
xmessage
Invalid or no license key for Soft Switch functionality
Dismiss
7-2
Configuration steps on the RIS PC
See Section 8 : APPENDIX
88
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
8
APPENDIX: CCOW / SOFTSWITCH INSTALLATION ON RIS PC
CAUTION
CCOW and/or SoftSwitch options MUST NOT BE installed on the RIS PC by the
GE FE unless explicitely required by the customer.
They shall be installed by the customer or IT administrator of the hospital.
The following guidelines are given to you for information only.
D Cdrom P/N: 5183658 (5183658-2) contains both the CCOW Enabler and the Softswitch options.
D Cdrom P/N: 5183922 (5183922-2) contains the Context Manager for CCOW software.
This Cdrom is only delivered if your site does not already have a Context Manager server.
Installation on the RIS PC goes through the standard Windows installation Wizard, so it is easy to
follow. The CCOW/Softswitch Cdroms include as well the installation/configuration documentation in
PDFformat and ius supported in several languages.
8-1
CCOW installation on the RIS
D Install the AW CCOW Enabler from the CCOW Cdrom P/N: 5183658–2 or up.
Follow instructions given on the booklet of the Cdrom for installation of CCOW option.
D If the site does not already have a Context Manager Server, install the Context Manager for
CCOW software from Cdrom P/N: 5183922 or up.
If installation is succesful, you can see on AW screen the message
”Connection Test Successful”
when clicking on the ”Test Connection” button on the RIS PC.
When connection to the RIS is successful, you should get on your AW, each time you login, the
following message:
”Mismatch possible between RIS selection and Patient List selection. Do you accept it ?”
warning the user that it is possible that Patients may not be exactly identified the same way on the
RIS and on the AW station.
If you accept the connection, you will get a pop–up message window ”Connection Successful”.
This message pops–up on the RIS PC as well.
You may use the AW CCOW Tester utility (on the RIS PC) to check that the Context manager is
operational.
Select Test Patterns , first Instance UID under the Dicom Study list relative to the Test Patterns, then
click on the Set Dicom button.
If the RIS synchronization is operational, the Test Patterns should open and display on AW.
89
INSTALLATION
17 of 16
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
18 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 003 – Utilities configuration with the CSD
8-2
SoftSwitch installation on the RIS
The softswitch option. to be used together with the CCOW option, is aimed to control the RIS PC with
the AW keyboard and mouse.
D Install the AW SoftSwitch feature from the CCOW Cdrom P/N: 5183658–2 or up.
Follow instructions given on the booklet of the Cdrom for installation of SoftSwitch option.
If installation is successful, the result is that you are able to use the AW mouse and keyboard to drive
the RIS PC.
21
90
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Time: 0 h 30 min per Option – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1 of 2
HARDWARE OPTIONS INSTALLATION
1
FOREWORD
At this time, the ONLY supported SCSI option is the Dicom MOD option from Installed Base upgrades.
The Dicom MOD drive is supported read only.
No License key is required to install the Dicom MOD option.
2
TOOLS REQUIRED
Standard FE tools case.
3
PREREQUISITE
3-1
XW8200 WORKSTATION
The HP XW8200 workstation already has a built–in SCSI controller.
Simply connect the external SCSI device option (Dicom MOD) to the SCSI port as shown in illustration
at next page, and power up the workstation.
The device will be automatically recognized at boot, and shall simply be declared to the AW software.
3-2
XW8400 WORKSTATION
The HP XW8400 workstation uses SAS hard disk drives, therefore it does not have a built–in SCSI
controller.
If your site is upgrading from an older AW and requires that you reinstall the Dicom MOD drive (read
only), you need to use a SCSI adaption kit . CAT NR = M80501SC
4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
OBSERVE VERY CAREFULLY THE ANTI–STATIC PRECAUTIONS WHEN OPENING THE
COMPUTER BOX AND HANDLING THE SCSI BOARD.
D Shutdown the workstation and turn it off. Disconnect all cables and open the side cover.
D Use an antistatic wrist wrap and antistatic mat to handle the printed circuit boards.
Refer to the HP XW8400 Service Manual, chapter 4, page 59, for more detailed information.
5
PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
Make sure you have correctly set up the SCSI device before starting the logical installation. Refer to
Chapter 8 for additional information.
91
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 004 – External SCSI Device Option Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
22
2 of 2
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 004 – External SCSI Device Option Installation
6
DICOM MOD DRIVE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
6-1
SCSI CONTROLLER BOARD INSTALLATION
This step shall only be done for the HP XW8400 workstation.
HP XW8200 workstation already has a built–in SCSI controller.
1. Shutdown the XW8400 workstation
2. Open the side cover.
3. install the SCSI board in PCI slot Nr 7
Refer to HP XW8400 Service Manual, 5180567–100, at chapter 4, page 69
4. Close the computer box
6-2
MOD DRIVE INSTALLATION INSTALLATION
1. Connect the external SCSI option as shown below.
SONY or MAXOPTIX DICOM MOD drive
ÀÀÀ ËË ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
XW8400
XW8200
SCSI ID select switch : set to ID = 3
Additional SCSI
interface board.
shall be inserted
in PCI slot Nr 7.
SCSI port
Do not use the built–in
terminator switch.
Use a SCSI external
active terminator:
ÀÀ
ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
SCSI controller is in
standard for XW8200
Centronics 50p to wide SCSI 68p cable
SCSI port
2. Turn on the Dicom MOD drive and power up the workstation.
The Dicom MOD drive option shall be installed through the CSD Configuration menu.
Refer to Job Card IST002, for Dicom MOD drive installation/configuration instructions.
When the installation has completed, you will need to shutdown and reboot the workstation, so that
the new device is taken into account by the AW application.
23
92
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Time: 0 h 30 min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1 of 14
APPLICATIONS (SOFTWARE OPTIONS) INSTALLATION
1
PREREQUISITE
WARNING
SOME APPLICATIONS MAY REQUIRE TO CONFIGURE THE PNF FIREWALL.
IN THIS CASE, REFER TO JOB CARD IST002, SECTION 4–3 FOR PNF
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE.
Advantage Workstation is configured (Job Card IST 001/002).
A Dicom Printer is installed (Job Card IST 006) prior to installing the Dentascan option.
2
FOREWORD
AW Applications options are protected by a software license key. These license keys are linked to
the workstation’s ID number (licenseId) of the Site which has purchased the option(s).
These keys are delivered under 2 forms:
– A Configuration USB key disk containing license keys matching the ID number of your workstation
(use command : licenseId) .
– A sheet of paper on which these license keys are written.
If several options are purchased for the Site at the time of first installation, only one Configuration
USB key containing the corresponding keys will be delivered. On the joined sheet of paper, these keys
will also be clearly written.
If this USB key is not available, or empty, or is corrupted, you may install your options by typing the
appropriate key when prompted, or one by one, using the appropriate ” install.xxx” script (see after)
There are two different ways to install new software options:
1. Preferred solution : Using the Easy Install utility.
2. By the specific command for each options ”install.xxx” where xxx is linked with option name
In this case, you will install options one by one, (see section NO TAG and Chapter 8 for more
information).
When all your options are installed, you can save all the software keys at once, on one blank
CDROM which will become the brand new Site Configuration parameters media.
This will be done by following steps described in IST009 Job Card.
3
TOOLS REQUIRED
No special tools are necessary.
However, if Manufacturing was not able to determine what licenses apply to your site, and delivered a
blank USB key, or in order to make sure the licenses delivered on your USB key by Manufacturing
apply to your site, you should connect to eLicense and check the licenses
93
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 005 – Applications (Software Options) Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 005 – Applications (Software Options) Installation
Checking licenses with eLicense tool
D Connect to the eLicense tool @
http://egems.gehealthcare.com/elicense/index.jsp
D Enter your Order number and the licenseId of your AW, in order to get or check the licenses
applicable to your system.
D Compare the licenses with those delivered on the USB key and on the sheet of paper.
Insert your USB key in one of the USB ports of your PC, allow some time for the USB key to be
declared (LED has stopped blinking) and open the Windows Explorer, to read the licenses text file.
Writing licenses on the USB key
This step is only necessary if licenses stored on your USB key do not correspond to what you get
with eLicense, or if Manufacturing was not able to determine the licenses for your site, and has
delivered a blank USB key.
In this case, you need to write the appropriate licenses on the USB key.
D Make sure the USB key is properly formatted.
A new blank USB key is normally DOS formatted (FAT), so it is directly usable on your PC and with
your AW workstation.
D The Volume Name shall be set to LICENSES (in capital).
To check this, open a Windows Explorer if not done yet, right click on the letter corresponding to
the USB key, and select Properties.
Change the Volume name to LICENSES if it is not already the case.
D In case the USB key would not be DOS formatted, you will need to format it before.
Right click on the letter corresponding to the USB key, and select Format.
Be careful not to select and format your hard disk !!
Note:
If the key is not visible in My Computer, you can go to Start > Control Panel > Performance &
Maintenance > Adminsitrative Tools > Computer Management > Storage > Disk Management
(local).
From here, identify the USB key (marked as removable), assign a new Windows letter to it,
and format it (using the right click).
4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Most Applications have been updated for the AW4.4 release. Check for compatibility with the current
AW in the FRU list at chapter 6. DO NOT USE Applications Cdroms from previous AW releases !!!
5
PROCEDURE USING EASY INSTALL
D Login as sdc if not already logged in as sdc:
console login : sdc [Return]
Password : adw4.4 [Return]
(default sdc password is factory loaded)
94
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
D When AW has completed its startup, click on the Admin button in the bottom left corner of the
Patient List (Browser). This will open a Menu displaying the available applications.
D Click on Install Packages
button from the pop–up
menu.
The Easy Install window pops–up.
Easy install
Select to install
from Hard disk
or Cdrom
Installation on workstation ’hostname’
........................
A– For Software preloaded on the Hard disk
........................
B – For Software on Floppy or Cdom
........................
........................
Driver
Contents
Hard disk
CDRom
Floppy
CDRom
Quit
Install
D Insert your USB key in one of the USB ports.
Allow some time for your USB key to declare before clicking on contents (the USB key LED should
no longer be blinking).
WARNING
IF YOUR SITE IS GOING TO USE FLOATING LICENSE, INSTALL THE FLOATING
LICENSE CLIENT SOFTWARE PRIOR TO INSTALLING THE APPLICATIONS.
REFER TO FLOATING LICENSE SERVICE MANUAL.
D Make sure the Hard Disk button is selected, then click on the Contents button.
Installation instructions display on the EasyInstall window.
Note:
If you receive on Cdrom, a more recent version of an Application (preloaded on the AW
hard disks), always use it instead of the preloaded release. In this case, select Cdrom.
95
INSTALLATION
3 of 14
JOB CARD IST 005 – Applications (Software Options) Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
4 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 005 – Applications (Software Options) Installation
The Easy Install window for optional software application(s) present on the hard disks, pops–up.
The example below may differ from what you get, depending on the pre–loaded or the already
installed applications, or if the Configuration diskette has been already inserted.
It also depends on the evolution of the applications (names may slightly differ).
Click on the checkbox of the applications candidate to be installed.
D Click on the corresponding button(s) of the optional software application(s) you want to install. The
display will change from Not installed to Ready to be installed.
D When this is done, click on the Install button to start the installation of the chosen application(s).
You will be prompted to enter the appropriate software protection key for each chosen application.
When the application has been installed, the display will change to Installation successful.
96
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD IST 005 – Applications (Software Options) Installation
Note:
5 of 14
Make sure the Uninstall button is not pressed inadvertently. This would mean that selected
applications are candidate to erase. In this case, the Install button changes to Uninstall.
D Quit the Easy Install utility.
D Eject now the USB key.
D Do not forget to restart AW so the Applications become available.
5-1
Installing applications from a Cdrom using EASY–INSTALL
WARNING
SOME APPLICATIONS MAY REQUIRE TO CONFIGURE THE PNF FIREWALL.
IN THIS CASE, REFER TO JOB CARD IST002, SECTION 4–3 FOR PNF
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE.
The following procedure is a COMMON procedure which describes how to install Advanced
applications delivered on a Cdrom media.
Note:
All Applications operator’s and installation instructions are now only accessible on–line.
Some applications are released on 2 Cdroms. The second Cdrom contains the Operator’s
and Installation documentation. This Cdrom has to be loaded as well on your AW station.
D Login as sdc if not already logged in as sdc:
console login : sdc [Return]
Password : adw4.4 [Return]
Note:
DO NOT login as “root” to install the software. The installation procedure may appear to work,
but you will not be able to start any of the software packages.
D Select Install package from the Service menu:
The package installation window pops up.
97
INSTALLATION
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
6 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 005 – Applications (Software Options) Installation
Easy install
Installation on workstation ’hostname’
........................
A – For Software preloaded on the Hard disk
B – For Software on Floppy or Cdom
Contents
Driver
Hard disk
CDRom
Floppy
Hard disk
Install
Quit
D Click on Hard disk / Floppy / Cdrom button and select CDROM from the pull down menu.
D Insert the USB key with the Licence key(s) .
D Insert the appropriate ”Advanced Application” software CDROM into the drive.
D Click on the Contents button.
The Application Package name appears in the window. A new window pops up:
Installation on Workstation ’hostname’
Package Name
Eject CDRom
Installation messages and
instructions display into
the window
Driver
CDRom
Install
Quit
D Click on the Install button.
A ”password” window like the following window pops up. If the Configuration USB key or Floppy
diskette containing the License key(s) has not been inserted into the USB port or Floppy drive, you
can type in the Licence key(s) manually.
Note:
The following window example may differ from what you get on your screen, depending of the
evolution of the various Applications name or kind.
The following example applies to the Volume Viewer applications.
98
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Volume Viewer Applications Installation
Select the applications you want to install :
Node–locked license
Floating license
–
–
xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx
Volume Viewer 3
Volume Viewer Booster
xxxxxxxxxx
Volume Viewer PET
–
xxxxxxxxxx
–
–
xxxxxxxxxx
AVA Xpress
VesselIQ Xpress
AdvantageCTC Plus
AdvantageCTC Pro
xxxxxxxxxx
Colon VCAR
–
xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx
AdvantageALA
LungVCAR
xxxxxxxxxx
CardIQ Xpress Plus
–
–
–
xxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx
x
xxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx
x
xxxxxxxxxx
CardIQ Xpress Pro
CardIQ Fusion PET
–
–
CardIQ Fusion SPECT
xxxxxxxxxx
CardEP
–
–
xxxxxxxxxx
AutoBone Xpress
–
xxxxxxxxxx
In Room 3D
–
xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx
–
–
The Volume Viewer package is not installed on this machine
The version that will be installed is 7.X.XX
Reload Software
License keys
OK
Abort
D Click on the check–box to enable the password field and type in the key corresponding to the
package you want to install.
D Click on OK to install the corresponding application(s) .
At this point, a number of messages display on the screen which tell the operator what is going on.
Note:
If the following window pops up, you probably have selected the wrong media (Floppy /
Cdrom), or the concerned drive is defective.
Notice
Notice
! Malformed package
! Error : Cannot access to media
OK
OK
For some older type Applications, the following window pops up.
99
INSTALLATION
7 of 14
JOB CARD IST 005 – Applications (Software Options) Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
8 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 005 – Applications (Software Options) Installation
Language
English
OK
Abort
D Select the language by clicking on the button located into the language field, then click on OK to
continue.
Note:
Applications check that the package is not already present on the hard disk, and if so, warn
you in order not to overwrite a posterior release. See example below.
.......
The Application version to be installed is
ANTERIOR to the version already installed .
..........
..........
Make sure before you accept to overwrite,
that this is really what you want to do !!!
D Click on OK to start installing the application, and wait until installation has completed.
D Click on Eject CDRom , then click on Quit unless you want to install another package.
Do not forget to restart the browser to
declare your new installed option
D
Click on OK to exit
OK
D The ”Application Name” software is now installed. Select Restart Software from the System menu
button, to validate the option.
The Application is available through a new ”Application” button located the Applications window.
100
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD IST 005 – Applications (Software Options) Installation
5-2
9 of 14
Installing applications from the DVD collector using EASY–INSTALL
5-2-1 Foreword
A set of 4 DVDs containing the main applications currently available for AW, is included into the
Upgrade kit to VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4) package.
Contents:
The upgrade kit to VolumeShare 2 includes a set of 4 DVDs, which contain the main applications
currently validated with the AW4.4 software.
Application(s) version:
Do not use applications cdroms from a previous AW release.
Always use the Applications from this DVD collector, unless you are getting a more recent compatible
application Cdrom, from an application software package purchased by the site.
Applications purchased:
Before installing applications from the DVD collector, make sure that the site has actually purchased
the application(s) you want to install, and that you have the corresponding license key(s) available
(paper sheet, USB key, AW config Cdrom).
Applications Preload:
You may choose to preload all or part of the applications from one or more of the DVDs.
You may want to preload them first from the DVD, then install them from the hard disks, or prefer to
directly install applications purchased by the site and preload the other.
Just beware that preloading all or part of the applications will take some time to load.
Note:
Currently, some applications cannot be preloaded, and those that cannot be, must be
directly installed from the DVDs or their dedicated Cdrom.
It is currently the case of Dentascan apps, Advantage Sim, and BMD
5-2-2 Applications DVDs : Contents details
DVD # 1:
5184668–2 : CT apps and Fusion apps DVDrom (including):
Smartscore 3.5_L_4014 – CT Perfusion 2.6.9 – Fusion Apps 1.3 – CardIQ Function 1.0.3
Advantage SIM 7.4 – Dentascan 3.0.58 theta – Advantage4D 1.4_12/1.0.24 – BMD7.06
DVD #2:
5184574–2 : MR applications DVDrom (including):
Functool 4.5.1 – MASS 6.1 – CV Flow 4.1 – MR Pasting 1.1.6
Report Card 3.6.1 – Cadstream 4.1.4 – Brainwave 1.6
DVD #3:
5184810–2 : XRAY applications DVDrom (including):
3D XR 2.0_12 – Advantage Paste 1.7 – Advantage Straight 1.06 – Adv Paste 2.0.2
Cardiac XRay 1.2 – Innova 3D XR 1.0.2
DVD #4:
5184916–2 : PET appls and networking apps DVDrom (including):
ECTb 2.6.1 – Remote Access 1.1
101
INSTALLATION
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
10 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 005 – Applications (Software Options) Installation
5-2-3 Applications installation:
Installation of the Applications from the DVDs shall be done through the EasyInstall utility.
Select ”CDrom” from the Field chooser
Easy install
Installation on workstation ’hostname’
........................
A – For Software preloaded on the Hard disk
B – For Software on Floppy or Cdom
Driver
Contents
Install
Hard disk
CDRom
Floppy
Hard disk
Quit
D Click on Hard disk / Floppy / Cdrom button and select CDROM from the pull down menu.
D Insert the USB key with the Licence key(s) if available.
D Insert the appropriate ”Advanced Application” software DVD into the drive.
D Click on the Contents button.
The Collector Package name appears in the window displaying the contents of the DVD:
Installation on Workstation ’hostname’
AW SW Apps refresh
DVD#N – Applications Family (i.e: CT + Fusion Apps)
PN: 51xxxxxx
+ Appli name XXXX Doc
+ Appli name XXXX S/W version xxxxxx
This applications set has
integrated documentation
so it will be installed automatically.
+ Appli name YYYY SW & Docs version yyyyy
Application 1 version a
Application 2 version b
Application 3 version x
These standalone applications have integrated documentation, which will be
installed automatically.
+ Appli name ZZZZ SW & Docs version zzzz
+ Appli name ZXZX SW & Docs version xxxx
WARNING: when installing a S/W & Doc package, the documentation
.......................................................................
Eject Cdrom
This first application
has separate documentation.
Install documentation first, so
you can open it from Admin /
Service Docs, to get more
info while installing the application.
Driver
CDRom
Install
Quit
102
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
D Click on the Install button.
The following window pops up on the right side of the EasyInstall main window
Easy Install
Collector Installation
Installation on Workstation ’hostname’
Select the appls you want to install
AW SW Apps refresh
DVD#N – Applications Family (i.e: CT + Fusion Apps)
PN: 51xxxxxx
Appli XXXX Doc
Appli XXXX version xx
Appli 1 YYYY SW & Doc
+ Appli name XXXX Doc
+ Appli name XXXX SW version xxxxxx
Appli 2 YYYY SW & Doc
Appli 3 YYYY SW & Doc
+ Appli name YYYY SW & Docs version yyyyy
Application 1 version a
Application 2 version b
Application 3 version x
Appli ZZZZ SW & Doc
Appli ZXZX SW & Doc
Appli ..........
+ Appli name ZZZZ SW & Docs version zzzz
+ Appli name ZXZX SW & Docs version xxxx
WARNING: when installing a S/W & Doc package, the documentation
.......................................................................
Eject Cdrom
Driver
CDRom
Install
Note:
Exit Collector
Quit
Moving the mouse cursor over the applications buttons, displays additional information about
the contents of the application, in the main EasyInstall window.
CAUTION
When an application has a separated documentation file, always select the
documentation installation first, so you will be able to open it (Admin/Service
Docs) and get additional information, before installing the application itself
D Click on the button corresponding to the application you want to install
i.e: Click on Appli XXXX Doc button.
A message window pops up to let you know that once the installation of this application package is
complete, you will have to click on the Quit button to return to the Collector Installation menu.
D Click on the OK button.
The EasyInstall main window changes to display what is going to be installed.
D Click on the Install button.
For separated documentation packages, a Command line window pops up to display the
installation steps. and prompts you to press the [Enter] key, once documentation installation is
complete.
D Click on the Quit button to return to the Collector Installation menu.
Do not mind the usual EasyInstall exit pop up message window ...
DO NOT forget to restart the browser to declare your new installed options
... click on OK to continue.
103
INSTALLATION
11 of 14
JOB CARD IST 005 – Applications (Software Options) Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
24
12 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 005 – Applications (Software Options) Installation
The EasyInstall Collector Installation window displays again
D Select another package to install, by clicking on the button corresponding to the application you
want to install
i.e: Click on Appli YYYY version yyyy button.
The EasyInstall main window displays the version/contents of the application candidate to install.
D Click on the Install button.
The application license window pops up
Easy Install
Application YYYY Installation
Installation on Workstation ’hostname’
Select the appls you want to install
Appli 1 YYYY
Appli 2 YYYY
Appli 3 YYYY
Appli name YYYY SW version yyyyy
.............
Eject Cdrom
Install
Driver
***********
***********
************
The Appli name YYYY version iinstalled
Reload Passwords
CDRom
OK
Abort
Quit
D Select the application(s) you want to install by clicking on the corresponding checkbox(es).
If the application(s) were previously installed and license(s) were saved on the AW configuration
Cdrom, then restored at the software reload, the license(s) will be displayed in the password fields.
Note:
D
D
D
D
D
If you select an application for which you do not have the license key available, it will be
preloaded on the workstation’s hard disks, so you can install it at a later time from the hard
disks. Remember that some applications cannot be preloaded.
See on your DVD collector for details.
Click on the OK button.
The application installation proceeds. Installation details show in the main EasyInstall window.
When the application(s) installation has completed, the message in the main EasyInstall window
says so.
Click on the Quit button to return to the Collector installation window.
Do not mind the usual exit EasyInstall pop up message window ...
DO NOT forget to restart the browser to declare your new installed options
... and click on OK to continue.
Select another package to install, by clicking on the button corresponding to the application you
want to install i.e: Click on Appli XXXX version xxxx button
OR
Click on the Exit Collector button if you have no more applications to install, or to install
applications from another DVD, then click on the Quit button to exit the EasyInstall utility.
The DVD is ejected from the drive.
Do not forget to restart AW to validate the applications.
Select System then Restart Software from the AW User Interface.
104
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
6
APPENDIX: MANUAL PROCEDURE
D Login as sdc if not already logged in as sdc.
D When AW completes its startup, open a Command Window from the Admin submenu.
Note:
DO NOT SWITCH USER TO ROOT.
D Change to the install directory by typing:
cd /export/home/sdc/install [Return]
The following are examples of installation scripts of a non–exhaustive list of Advanced Applications.
Installing the Autobone Package
D Run the installation script:
./install.autobonexpress XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the Autobone soft key)
D To validate the package, logout, click on the Restart AW button under Exit menu.
Installing the Advanced Vessel Analysis Package
D Run the installation script:
./install.avaexpress XXXXXXX [Return] (where XXXXXXX is the AVA soft key)
D To validate the package, logout, click on the Restart AW button under Exit menu.
Installing the CardEP package
D Run the installation script:
./install.cardep XXXXXXX [Return] (where XXXXXXX is the CardEP software key)
D To validate the package, click on the Restart AW button under Exit menu.
Installing the CardIQ package
D Run the installation script:
./install.cardiqplus XXXXXXX [Return] (where XXXXXXX is the CardIQ Plus software key)
./install.cardiqpro XXXXXXX [Return] (where XXXXXXX is the CardIQ Pro software key)
./install.cardiqfusionpet XXXXXXX [Return] (where XXXXXXX is the CardIQ PET Fusion key)
./install.cardiqfusionspect XXXXXX [Return] (where XXXXXX is the CardIQ SpectroFusion
key)
D To validate the package, click on the Restart AW button under Exit menu.
Installing Fusion applications package
D Run the Fusion installation script:
./install.fusion_ctmr XXXXX [Return] (where XXXXX is the Fusion for CT/MR key)
./install.fusion_ctpet XXXXXXX [Return] (where XXXXXXX is the CT_PET Fusion key)
./install.fusion_xmr XXXXXXX [Return] (where XXXXXXX is the XA_MR Fusion software key)
Installing the Dentascan Package
D Run the installation script:
./install.denta XXXXXXX [Return] (where XXXXXXX is the denta package key)
OR
./install.dentaplus XXXXXXX [Return] (where XXXXXXX is the dentaPlus package key)
105
INSTALLATION
13 of 14
JOB CARD IST 005 – Applications (Software Options) Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
25
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 005 – Applications (Software Options) Installation
Note:
14 of 14
FILMS WILL BE SENT TO THE LASER CAMERA!!!
./install.denta LicenseServer XXXXXXXX
(where XXXXXXXX is the Denta key)
The procedure will send 1 or 2 films to the camera
(2 films if Zoom is supported by the type of Camera)
Please check that your camera is connected and running.
Do you want to continue (y/n) y [Return]
...........................
Sending film to the camera
...........................
Note:
To answer the following question(s), you must get the film(s) sent to the camera by the
install.denta script. Measure the distance between the two vertical lines on the film(s) printed,
and enter the value(s) in MILLIMETERS (mm).
Enter the distance 1 in (mm) : XXX.X [Return]
Enter the distance 2 in (mm) : YYY.Y [Return]
(Distance 2 question only if Zoom is supported by the type of Camera)
Configuring Dentascan camera with Zoom disabled
To film real size, Field of View should be equal to: XXX mm
(if Zoom is not supported)
OR
Configuring Dentascan camera with Zoom enabled
To film real size, Field of View should be less than or equal to:XXX mm
(if Zoom supported)
...........................
Application declared
Note:
Older type GE–YMS scanners do not give exactly the same FOV value as the one prescribed
above. For example, a selected FOV of 130 can give something like 135 mm on the film.
This is why you should experimentally find a FOV value on the scanner giving a real FOV as
close as possible to the value ”Dist 1” found during installation and communicate it to the
customer. If the scanning FOV is too far away from the value ”Dist1” (more than 5%), you
may get the message: ”MAY NOT BE LIFE SIZE”.
Note:
If a communication error with the Printer occurs during installation, the Dentascan package
will be installed with NO CAMERA. In this case, when later on, your camera is installed and
running, run the installcamera.denta script under /export/home/sdc/install directory.
If any change is made later to the camera, it will also be necessary to run this script again so
the camera changes can be taken into account by the Dentascan software.
D Run the installation script (if applicable, see Note above):
./installcamera.denta [Return]
D To validate the package, logout, and login again as sdc.
26
106
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Time: 0 h 30 min per Printer – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
TOOLS REQUIRED
None.
2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None.
3
PREREQUISITES
Advantage workstation is configured.
Network Printers are connected to the Network and operational (see Chapter 8 for set–up
information).
Make sure the following information is available before starting to install your network printer:
(This information can be obtained from the Network Administrator of the Hospital.
D Internet address of Network printer(s).
D Hostname of Network printer(s).
D AE Title, Port number and other specific information for Dicom Printers
This procedure does not describe how to connect the Network Printer(s) to the network, which is
assumed to be already installed.
PART 1: NETWORK POSTSCRIPT PRINTERS
Supported Networks Postscript printers are:
Codonics NP1660 M or NP 1660 MD ; Codonics Horizon
Seiko 1720D ; Kodak DMI 3600 ; Tally T8106 ; HP LaserJet ; Xerox Phaser
Lexmark 1650N ; Lexmark C710n ; Lexmark C720N ; Lexmark T612 ; Lexmark T614 ; Lexmark
SC1275N ; Lexmark Optra S1855N.
QMI GL2101HD Film/ThickPager ; QMI GL2101HD Plain Paper
Note:
If your site has purchased the Dicom option for the Codonics NP1660MD or the Seiko
1720D printers, you may skip to PART2: DICOM PRINTERS installation.
107
1 of 8
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 006 – Postscript and DICOM Printers Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 8
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 006 – Postscript and DICOM Printers Installation
1
PROCEDURE
1-1
Testing the Network Connection to the Postscript Printer
Once the Network printer is connected to the network and set with an IP address (refer to Chapter 8,
for details), the Network printer should respond to TCP/IP messages from another Host on the
network. Before logically installing the Network printer on AW, check the following items:
D Go to the Advantage workstation, open a Command Window and switch User to root:
su – root [Return]
Password: operator [Return] (factory loaded default root password)
D Type in the following command:
ping <IP_address_of_network_printer> [Return]
i.e.: ping 192.100.9.5 [Return]
<IP address of Network printer> is alive
Note:
Do not enter leading zeros in any of the four numeric fields separated by dots of the IP
address.
e.g.: do not type in 192.100.009.005, but type 192.100.9.5 instead.
This ”alive” answer from the system means that the Network printer can be reached from the
Advantage Workstation system through the network.
If the system displays ”unknown host”, your color printer may not be correctly declared on the network.
Do the steps described in Chapter 8 again.
If the system displays ”Network unreachable”, you probably have given the printer an IP address
incompatible with your Advantage workstation’s IP address. Check that they belong to the same
network, 192.100.9.X, for example.
D exit [Return]
1-2
Postscript Printer Installation
The Postscript Printers shall be installed through the CSD Configuration menu.
Refer to Job Card IST002, Section 4–3–5 for Printers installation/configuration
instructions.
You may also install the printers the usual way, through command lines as follows:
D Login as sdc, if not already logged in as sdc:
console login: sdc [Return]
Password: adw4.4 [Return] (factory loaded default sdc password)
108
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
D When AW has completed its startup, click on the Admin button, then on the Command Window
button to open a Command Window:
Note:
It is suggested that you move this window to the lower right corner of the screen so that it
does not get overwritten by AW pop-up windows.
D Switch user to root:
su – root [Return]
Password : operator [Return]
D Change to the sdc install directory:
cd /export/home/sdc/install [Return]
D Run the printers installation script:
./install.printers [Return]
Do you want to install new printer(s) [y,n,?,q] y [Return]
Define the local name of the printer [?,q]
<printer1–name> [Return]
At this point, you should give the name you have chosen for your printer. It can be the same as the
network Hostname of your printer but it is not mandatory.
Installing Printer
Printer model
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
c
h
hp
k
l
qf
qp
s
t
Codonics (1660M 1660MD)
Codonics Horizon
HP LaserJet
Kodak (DMI 3600)
Lexmark (Optra 1650N 1855N SC1275N C710n C720N T612 T614)
QMI GL2101HD Film/ThickPaper
QMI GL2101HD Plain Paper
Seiko (1720D)
Tally (T8106)
10
x
Phaser Xerox
Enter selection [?,??,q]: 5 [Return]
(e.g.: you are selecting a Lexmark printer)
109
INSTALLATION
3 of 8
JOB CARD IST 006 – Postscript and DICOM Printers Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
4 of 8
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 006 – Postscript and DICOM Printers Installation
Printer type
1 c
Colour printer
2 g
Greyscale printer
Enter selection [?,??,q]: 2 [Return]
(e.g.: you are selecting a greyscale printer)
Printer format
1 a
Letter (or A for Codonics)
2 a4
A4
Enter selection [?,??,q]: 2 [Return]
(e.g.: you are selecting A4 format)
Printer internet (IP) address [?]
Printer hostname [?]
Note:
e.g.: 192.9.100.6 [Return]
e.g.: lexmark–1 [Return]
Make sure to use a hostname with less than 10 characters, and avoid special characters else
than the – and _ signs.
Checking if lexmark–1 is alive ...
......................
lexmark–1: lpd: scaled: unknown printer
*** WARNING : Greyscale Printer (lexmark–1 is installed but not idle . ***
Do you want to install new printer(s) [y,n,?,q]
Type y [Return] if you want to declare another printer. The same set of questions will be asked or the
next printer.
Type n [Return] to exit.
Note:
If message...
install.printer error : <printer_host_name> not responding ...
Printer *Greyscale Printer (printer_name)* installation aborted
... the printer is not responding. You must check that it is connected to the network
and properly configured.
D Switch user back to sdc:
exit [Return]
The workstation is now configured for one optional Network printer operation.
Install other postscript printers the same way then click on Restart AW button to validate the
installation of the printer(s).
1-3
Printing in A3 format
Some printers can support A3 format printing. If your site requires that the Postscript printer is
configured for A3 format, (and if applicable to the kind of Printer), the Service Note SNAW2006–10
can help you to set up your printer accordingly.
Service Note SNAW2006–10 is available on the AW–IB Web site @ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com
110
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
PART 2: DICOM PRINTERS
1
PROCEDURE
The Postscript Printers shall be installed through the CSD Configuration menu.
Refer to Job Card IST002, Section 4–3–4 for Printers installation/configuration
instructions.
You may also install the printers the usual way, through command lines as follows:
Note:
The Dicom Print software is part of the AW basic features. Therefore it does not require any
software License key.
D Click on the Tools button in the bottom left corner of the Browser. This will open a Menu displaying
the available applications.
D Click on the Printer Manager button.
The Dicom Printer selection window pops up.
Printer Manager
Modify, add or remove printers
Select DICOM printer :
Close
Modify
D click on Add button:
The Define New Printer parameters window pops up
111
Add
Remove
INSTALLATION
5 of 8
JOB CARD IST 006 – Postscript and DICOM Printers Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
6 of 8
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 006 – Postscript and DICOM Printers Installation
Define new printer parameters
DICOM printer label :
Hostname :
Application Entity Title (AET) :
Network address :
Port number :
Layouts :
Slide formats :
35mm
3x5
4x5
4x4
4x6
40mm
12 bits image supported :
Colour supported :
Film size :
8 in x 10 in
W
H
14 in x 17 in
W
H
8_5 in x 11 in
W
H
24 in x 24 in
W
H
10 in x 12 in
W
H
24 cm x 30 cm
W
H
10 in x 14 in
W
H
A4
W
H
11 in x 14 in
W
H
A3
W
H
11 in x 17 in
W
H
A
W
H
14 in x 14 in
W
H
Letter Format
Printer pixel size (micron) :
Configuration information :
Min
Density :
Magnification type :
Max
None
Smoothing factor :
Trim : No
Printer memory size :
Cancel
MBytes
Clear
REPLICATE
BILINEAR
CUBIC
NONE
Save
D Enter the Dicom Printer parameters, as defined by the Vendor’s Printer Dicom conformance
statement.
112
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD IST 006 – Postscript and DICOM Printers Installation
Note:
7 of 8
The Dicom Printer Label (name you want to give to your printer) is at your own choice.
– 12 bits image supported : Not used for AW application.
– Pixel depth and Printer pixel size: Not used for AW application.
– Density: AW application uses this information if supplied for your camera, and entered in the
corresponding fields. In the other case, leave the fields blank.
– Configuration information: (i.e.: PERCEPTION_LUT=LINEAR):
Allows to select the LUT of the printer instead of the default AW LUT
D Finally click on Save to update and Quit.
The following information is available from the Codonics and Seiko manufacturers, but is subject to
change without notice, so it is given as information only. Please check with the camera vendor.
Codonics NP 1660 MD:
Application Entity Title (A.E.T): PRINT_SCP
Port number: 104
Medium: Paper or Blue Film
Destination: Magazine
Film size: 8 x 10
Film format: Select all formats
Seiko 1720 D:
Application Entity Title (A.E.T): 1720D–1 to 1720D–16
Port number: 104
Medium: Paper
Destination: Magazine
Film size: 8 x 10
Film format: Select all formats
Once created, the printers logical devices can be found under the following directories:
D Dicom Printers :
cd /export/home/sdc/Prefs [Return]
i.e : more printer1.dev [Return]
set dUid ”/export/home/sdc/Prefs/printer1.dev”
set dName ”printer1”
set dType dicom
set dColour greyscale
set dQueueType DICM
set dQueueName ”dicom”
props canDoSaveOnDisk
props canDoMultiCopies
props canDoCustomResolution
.........................................
set defaultFormat 1x1_fid
113
INSTALLATION
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
27
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 006 – Postscript and DICOM Printers Installation
8 of 8
pformat 1x1_fid
set filmingMode FittedSize
pfilmingMode FittedSize
set printerMemorySize 20971520
D Postscript Printers :
cd /export/home/sdc/app–defaults/devices [Return]
i.e : more lexmark.dev [Return]
more lexmark.dev
set dName ”lexmark”
set dType postscript2
set dColour greyscale
set dQueueType LP
set dQueueName lexmark
# Options
props canDoMultiCopies
props canDoCustomResolution
# List of supported formats
set defaultFormat 2x2_fid
pformat 1x1_fid
pformat 2x1_fid
.........................
pformat 6x4_fid
set filmSize ”A4”
pfilmSize ”A4” 2560 0
set printerMemorySize ”25165824”
props canDoMixResolution
IT IS NOW TIME TO WRITE DOWN PRINTERS INFORMATION IN THE AW
CONFIGURATION FORM LOCATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THIS MANUAL.
Note:
You will be invited to save later on (Job Card IST 009), the Dicom Printer parameters on the
Configuration Cdrom.
CAUTION
CAUTION
The AW Application Entity title (A.E.T) to be declared to Dicom printers (when
requested) is PR_hostname and not the Hostname of AW as for Dicom hosts.
i.e.: AW workstation hostname is AW01
AW Print AE Title is PR_AW01
Refer to Chapter 7 PRINTING, for detailed information concerning the supported
Dicom printers.
Also refer to the AW Dicom Conformance Statement delivered with the product.
28
114
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Time: 0 h 30 min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 2
SUPPLIES
None.
2
TOOLS REQUIRED
None.
3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
THE FOLLOWING MATERIAL IS INFORMATION ONLY. THE SCRIPTS USED TO DECLARE HOSTS
PROPERLY DEPEND ON THE SOFTWARE REVISION LEVEL OF EACH IMAGE SOURCE
SYSTEM.
4
PREREQUISITES
Advantage Workstation is installed and configured (IST 001 / 002).
5
PROCEDURE
Note:
Refer to IST 002, Section 4–2–2 ”Declare Hosts on the Network” under Site configuration, for
Network Setup of Image Sources on AW.
1. AW4.4 declaration on Genesis based sources (SIGNA 5.X, MR Horizon, CT HLA/HSA...).
D See Chapter 9 – Section 1 for network exaAW4.2Pmple.
AW4.4 is DICOM Query/Retrieve ”STUDY_ROOT” Provider.
D Refer to the manuals delivered with your system.
The only protocol supported on AW4.4 is the DICOM3.0 protocol, or the IC Dicom3.0 protocol.
Refer to your Image source system service manual.
2. AW4.4 declaration on non Genesis based sources (SIGNA 4.X).
D Direct connection to the Signa 4.X is no longer supported.
3. AW4.4 declaration on CT9800 IMAGE SOURCES –– VIA CT9800–IDLINK2.
D This direct connection is NOT supported.
4. AW4.4 declaration on GE DICOM Systems (DLX, CT/i, CT Synergy, MR Horizon LX, MR
Contour...) and Foreign devices using DICOM protocol.
D See Chapter 9 – Section 1 for network example.
AW4.4 is DICOM Query/Retrieve ”STUDY_ROOT” Provider.
115
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 007 – Network Configuration on Image Sources
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 2
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 007 – Network Configuration on Image Sources
D Refer to the manuals delivered with your system.
– The DICOM ”Application Entity Title” of the Advantage Workstation is its ”hostname”.
– The DICOM ”port number” of the Advantage Workstations is ALWAYS ”4006”.
5. AW4.4 declaration on YMS based sources (CT Sytec family, CT ProSpeed family, MR Vectra).
D See Chapter 9 – Section 1 for network example, and Section 2-6.
D Refer to the manuals delivered with your scanning system.
Use the DICOM3.0 protocol.
– The DICOM ”Application Entity Title” of the Advantage Workstations is its ”hostname”.
– The DICOM ”port number” of the Advantage Workstations is ALWAYS ”4006”.
6. AW4.4 declaration on AW1.2 and AW2.0.
D See Chapter 9 – Section 1 for network example.
D AW1.2, AW2.0 are not DICOM Query/Retrieve Provider.
AW4.4 is DICOM Query/Retrieve ”STUDY_ROOT” Provider.
D Use the DICOM3.0 protocol to connect to AW4.4
DO NOT use any of the SdCNet protocols !!!
– The DICOM ”Application Entity Title” of the Advantage Workstations is its ”hostname”.
– The DICOM ”port number” of the Advantage Workstations is ALWAYS ”4006”.
7. AW4.4 declaration on AW3.1 and AW4.0.
D See Chapter 9 – Section 1 for network example.
D AW1.2, AW2.0, AW3.1 and AW4.0 are not DICOM Query/Retrieve Provider.
AW4.4 is DICOM Query/Retrieve ”STUDY_ROOT” Provider.
D Use the DICOM3.0 protocol to connect to AW4.4.
Note:
On the AW4.4, you can use the SdCNet3.1 or 4.0 protocol to Query/Retrieve an AW3.1 or
an AW4.0 (which are not Dicom Query providers)
8. AW4.4 declaration on AW4.1 / 4.1P, AW4.2 / 4.2P and AW4.3.
D See Chapter 9 – Section 1 for network example.
D AW4.1s, AW4.2s and AW4.3 are DICOM Query/Retrieve ”STUDY_ROOT” Provider.
Note:
On AW4.1s, AW4.2s or AW4.3 side, declare AW4.4 as Patient provider, for better display in
the AW4.1s, AW4.2s or AW4.3 Patient list.
D Use the DICOM3.0 protocol to connect to AW4.4.
DO NOT use any of the SdCNet protocols !!!
29
116
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Time: 0 h 30 min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 14
INSITE OVERVIEW
D Installation
As the InSite/iLinq/RCOC software is no longer considered as proprietary class M software, it
has been decided to deliver it with the AW Forward production.
Therefore the InSite software is included now in the AW system/Application software, and no
longer needs to be loaded from a separate Service Tools Class–M (proprietary) CD–ROM.
Any AW4.4 system, which has a modem physically attached to it must have a PPP (serial port) and an
IP address allocated. This PPP IP address has to be unique and is totally independent of the AW’s
LAN network address. However the LAN and the PPP IP addresses must be the same if other Hosts
will be using the modem that is physically attached to your AW to get reached by OLC (systems that
use InSite via a secondary modem must have a unique LAN IP address that will be used as PPP IP).
To allocate this address .... 2 CASES:
1) The network administrator of your site gave you a registered (unique) IP address to setup your AW
that will be used by your OLC to connect to the system through InSite as well.
2) The site has NO internet network. In this case the support center will allocate a predefined address
class A (10.xxx.yyy.zzz).
CAUTION
2
This installation only concerns the regular InSite software and not the
Interactive InSite (iLinq). The iLinq icon will remain disabled.
For iLinq installation, contact your Service Marketing representative, in order to
have the appropriate license keys to enable the iLinq software.
SUPPLIES
Field supplied material
D One ”Global Multi–Tech” modem if applicable (refer to Chapter 6 for part number information).
D One RS–232 cable (refer to Renewal Part chapter for part number information).
To be supplied (hospital responsibility)
D A nearby AC power outlet for the modem.
D A nearby telephone line jack.
D A Router for Broadband connection.
3
TOOLS REQUIRED
None
117
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
5
HARDWARE INSTALLATION
These steps are only necessary for a direct connection through a modem
D Shutdown the workstation, and turn off power.
D Connect the RS232 serial cable to the computer serial port A or B, and connect the other end to
the back of the modem.
D Connect the line cable into the modem’s ”LINE” jack (not the ”PHONE” jack) and the other end into
a phone line wall jack.
CAUTION
There are two jacks available at the rear of the modem. One is labeled ”PHONE”,
the other one ”LINE”. The modem’s ”LINE” jack is not interchangeable with the
”PHONE” jack. Be careful then not plugging your line cable into the modem’s
”PHONE” jack.
D Connect the modem power supply cable to the back of the modem.
D Plug in the power supply cable to any open AC plug.
D Turn the modem on (first).
D Turn the workstation on.
6
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
6-1
Prerequisites
D Case 1 : Direct connection through modem
The modem is connected to Serial port A of the workstation, and powered up.
The Multitech Global modem does not require any particular hardware internal switch setting.
D Case 2 : Indirect connection through Modality
The Image Source system (CT, MR, ...) inSite ”connection” has already been checked out by your
OLC and is operational.
In this case, the AW will be ”inSiteable”, through ”telnet” remote login.
Declare the IP address of the Image source system as gateway.
D Case 3 : Direct connection through ”broadband connection ”: same subnetwork
The gateway or router is operational (ISDN, ...).
Declare the IP address of the ”broadband” router for the connection.
D Case 4 : Direct connection through ”broadband connection ”: different subnetwork
The gateway or router is operational (ISDN, beyond modem, ...), but is not on the same
subnetwork as the AW.
Declare the IP address of the gateway for the connection.
Refer to 2327643–100 for more information on the broadband routers/gateways
118
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
GEMS – Americas
On Line Center
Phone : 1–800–321–7937
Fax : (414) 524–5305
CAUTION
6-2
GEMS – Europe
O.L.C.–E
(33) 1–3920–0007
(33) 1–3070–9970
GEMS – Asia
O.L.C.–A
81–426–56–0033
81–426–56–0053
Case 3 & 4: The Gateway (or Router) MUST be previously declared, prior to run
the insite.config script. Refer to Chapter 9, Section 3.2–1.2 to declare the default
router, started at boot and properly backup’ed on the Configuration Cdrom.
Install Insite script
Step removed.
As the Insite software is now included into the AW software, the ”install.insite” script, (which was
previously used to extract the Insite files from the Insite Cdrom), has become useless and is now
removed from the script directories.
The ”uninstall.insite” script is also removed.
6-3
Set the ip_forwarding parameter to ”on”
Note:
IP forwarding is intentionally set to OFF, in order to increase network security.
You have to set it to ON in order to allow the indirect connection.
Bypass this step if you do not intend to use the indirect connection through modem.
D Make sure you are still logged as root.
D Edit the /etc/sysctl.conf file with the Vi editor, or any other suitable editor:
vi /etc/sysctl.conf [Return]
modify the line
net.ipv4.ip_forward = 0 to net.ipv4.ip_forward = 1
Save and quit the editor :
<Esc> : wq! [Return]
D In order to allow indirect connection now, type the following command to apply the change:
sysctl –e –p /etc/sysctl.conf [Return]
The result must now show
net.ipv4.ip_forward = 1
119
INSTALLATION
3 of 14
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
30
4 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
6-4
insite.config script
CAUTION
At the end of this step, you will have to perform a ”Checkout ” test with your
OLC. Be prepare to call for an OLC support, with the System ID, phone number
of the modem (if applicable), or IP address of the Image Source system (in case
of remote connection).
D Switch User to Root in the Command Window (if not done already).
su – root [Return]
Enter the root password
D Change to the installation directory and run the configuration script.
cd /export/home/sdc/install [Return]
./insite.config [Return]
Sourcing ~insite/.insiterc file ...
Updating /root/.cshrc file ...
Executing configuration ...
Warning: Cannot convert string ”<Key>Escape,_Key_Cancel” to type VirtualBinding
Warning: Cannot convert string ”<Key>Home,_Key_Begin” to type VirtualBinding
Warning: Cannot convert string ”<Key>F1,_Key_Help” to type VirtualBinding
.....................................
D The following screen pops up. The user is prompted to click on DECLINE if not a GE employee or
click on ACCEPT 3 times if the user is a GE employee.
CLICK 3 TIMES
ON THE ACCEPT
BUTTON
120
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
INSTALLATION
5 of 14
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
D After ACCEPT has been clicked on three times, the main tabs are initialized.
D Your workstation must be configured to support ProDiags and Sweeps.
Click on the ProDiags tab. The ProDiags configuration window displays.
Click on Custom
D Click on the Custom button.
The Netscape Proactive Diagnostics configuration window starts loading, then displays after a few
seconds.
121
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
6 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
Click on Apply
D The following confirmation window displays. Click on Yes to accept.
Java applet Window
?
Are you sure you want to apply changes ?
Yes
Click on Yes
No
There will be a pop–up Java applet window with a status bar during a few seconds, before the
configuration is complete.
Quit the ProDiags window when done.
Device connection
The next step to perform is either to configure the Modem (case 1) directly connected to your
workstation, or to configure the Network gateway/router parameters (case 2, 3 or 4).
When this is done, you will have to call your OLC for the ”checkout” phase.
The Checkout phase is a common step for the 4 cases.
Note:
Bypass the Checkout phase when restoring the parameters and iLinq licenses (insite.restore)
from the floppy diskette (see section 8–2).
122
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
6-4-1 Case 1: Direct connection through modem
D Click onto ”Device Connection” tab. Make sure MODEM is selected. The Device Tab allows the
user to configure and set up the serial port and modem for use with InSite. You must set seven (7)
items for configuration to be applied. The items are: Device Connection Type, Dial–out
Prefix,, Modem Type, CPU Serial Port Name, Dialing Mode, Country, Serial
Port Speed.
1. Device Connection Type: You must be set to ”Modem” if there is a modem that is physically
attached to your AW workstation (direct connection). Select ”Network” if your AW system is
”InSiteable” through another system (indirect connection) that has been previously checked–out
by your OLC. If you choose ”Network” you will then be asked to enter the IP address of the
system that can connect to the OnLine Center (the one that has the modem physically attached to
it, and that has been previously checked out by your OLC).
2. Dial Out Prefix: You must either select a Dial Out prefix or enter a site specific one if it is not
in the list. Dial Out Prefixes may be required on some sites to get a line outside of the hospital. If
you do not need any Dial Out Prefixes at all to get the line outside, just erase the one that appears
per default in the Dial Out Prefix field.
123
INSTALLATION
7 of 14
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
8 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
3. Dialing Mode: You must select a dialing mode Tone or Pulse. Tone is selected by default.
4. Modem Type: You must select ”MultiTech MT5634ZBA V.90” (GEMS Multi–Tech global
modem).
5. Country: You must set the country in which the site is located. ”Default – All Others” is
selected by default. If your Country is not listed in the pull down menu, then the correct selection is
”Default – All Others”.
6. CPU Serial Port Name: You must select the Serial Port Name (/dev/ttyS0 for port A or
/dev/ttyS1 for port B) that is used for the modem connection.
Note : Use Serial Port A by default.
7. CPU Serial Port Speed: You must select the CPU serial Port Speed. By default, the speed is
set to 38400 Bauds.
D After all selection is made, click onto ”Apply” button to set up the serial port and set up the
register on the modem, and store the values to the modem’s NVRAM. When the ”Apply” button
is pressed, another screen will be displayed meanwhile you should see the following status that
appears into the status area of the IIP Config window:
”Waiting for Port Monitor to become ready... The modem is ready to
accept commands...setting Modem Registers... Modem Configuration:
Completed Successfully”.
When this is done, the Checkout window pops up:
Note:
Bypass the Checkout phase (click on Exit) when restoring the parameters and iLinq licenses
from the Insite backup diskette, using the script insite.restore (see section 7–2).
Click on
Checkout
Now
D Click on Checkout Now . Go to 6–4–3 : Checkout Common Steps
124
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
31
6-4-2 Case 2, 3 and 4: Broadband connection or indirect connection through modem :
D Cick onto ”Device Connection” tab. Make sure NETWORK is selected.
The Device Tab allows the user to configure and set up the Router or Gateway IP address.
D Enter the Gateway address (indirect connection through Modem) or Router address (Broadband
connection) in the Gateway to OLC address field.
– If your AW uses the indirect connection through modem, you have to enter the IP address of
the system that can connect to the OnLine Center (the one that has the modem physically
attached to it, and that has been previously checked out by your OLC).
– If your AW uses the direct connection to the Broadband router , you have to enter the IP
address of the Router system that can connect to the OnLine Center, and which has been
previously checked out by your OLC.
D After all selection is made, click onto ”Apply” button to set up the network parameters.
The following status that appears into the status area of the IIP Config window:
”Network Configuration: Completed Successfully”.
When this is done, the following window pops up:
i
CAUTION: The system you entered the
IP address for must complete an InSite
Checkout, before attempting an InSite
connection on this system.
OK
125
Click on
OK
INSTALLATION
9 of 14
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
10 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
D Click on OK to accept.
The following window pops up:
Note:
Bypass the Checkout phase (click on Exit) when restoring the parameters and iLinq licenses
from the Insite backup diskette, using the script insite.restore (see section 7–2).
Click on
Checkout
Now
D Click on Checkout Now . Go to 6–4–3 : Checkout Common Steps
6-4-3 Checkout : common steps
D At this time, you have to call your OLC, in order to run the Checkout process of the inSite link.
Note:
Your OLC may at the same time download the 1 to 4 iLinq license(s), based on the level of
service contract purchased by the customer, in order to enable the iLinq/TVA features.
The Configure Insite Now dialout test menu pops up.
?
Configure InSite Now
Please call your local OnLine Support Center
to complete the InSite Checkout Process
Press OK to perform a dial out test to the OLC
after the InSite Checkout is completed
(Preferred selection)
Press CANCEL to bypass the dialout test
OK
Select ”Cancel”, to
bypass the dial–out test.
Cancel
The Model type to use for ”Checkout” of the AW4.4 workstation is AW44–LNX.
126
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Select ”Cancel”, to bypass the dial–out test.
D Once the Checkout has been successfully performed by your OLC, click on the Exit button to
close the Insite Interactive Platform configuration window.
DO NOT CLICK EXIT BEFORE CHECKOUT HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED !!!
Click on
Exit
............................................
Adding insite browser in application list and adding a script to launch it
net.ipv4.ip_forward = 1
********* End of INSITE modem (or network) installation *********
Please, Restart Browser to take into account the new configuration
D Restart AW to validate the installation.
After restart completion, you should see the iLinq button enabled if the iLinq licenses have been
installed on your site by the OLC.
7
ILINQ & RCOC/TVA START UP
Note:
The following screenshot are given for reference only, as they may vary depending on the
iLinq/RCOC releases. They are only accessible with the iLinq licenses installed.
D Click on the red iLinq button to start the iLinq application.
The iLinq Browser pops–up.
Contact GE
RCOC / TVA
127
INSTALLATION
11 of 14
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
32
12 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
Based on the iLinq licenses downloaded on your system, depending on the level of services
purchased for your site, you will be able to access some or all the services, as well as the Remote
Console Observation & Control / Tip Virtual Assist (RCOC/TVA) feature.
D Click on the Contact GE button. The Contact GE window pops up.
D Click on the Tip Virtual Assist button. The Tip Virtual Assist window pops up.
Preparing to start Training Mode
ATTENTION
Your GEMS Applications Specialist has launched a Tip Virtual Assist
(TVA) program that will allow access by the applications .......
....................................
Cancel
Accept
D Click on the Accept button. The Remote training window pops up.
D Your iLinq and RCOC/TVA link is ready for operation. You may exit the link at this time by clicking
on the Exit Training button, then quit the iLinq Main menu.
128
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
33
8
INSITE CONFIGURATION BACKUP AND RESTORE
CAUTION
8-1
DO NOT CHANGE THE ”insite”, ”sdc”, OR ”root” PASSWORD WITHOUT
NOTIFYING YOUR SUPPORT CENTER: OLC (ON–LINE CENTER), OLC–E
(EUROPEAN SUPPORT CENTER), OLC–A (ASIA SUPPORT CENTER).
Save InSite configuration on the AW Configuration Cdrom
Once the installation is completed, you should save the Insite parameters for future reinstallation.
The Insite parameters will be copied in the /export/home/sdc/Prefs directory , so that they can be
saved on the Configuration Cdrom at the same time you save the other parameters of your AW.
D Open a Command window and type in:
cd /export/home/sdc/scripts [Return]
./insite.backup [Return]
Please enter the Insite password:
Password:
2getin [Return]
Do not mind ”normal error” messages like chmod: operation not permitted displaying during
the save process , which are harmless.
Do not forget to save the AW configuration parameters on the AW Configuration Cdrom.
Perform steps described in Job Card IST009.
8-2
Insite Configuration Restore from the AW Configuration Cdrom
After software reload, you may reinstall the Insite parameters and the license keys from the AW Config
Cdrom, if the Checkout process and iLinq licenses have already been done once by your OLC at the
time of first InSite/iLinq installation.
As the Insite software is now embedded into the AW software, you do not need to reload it, but simply
restore the Insite parameters contained into the AW Configuration Cdrom.
D Open a Command window and type in:
su – root [Return]
passwd : operator [Return]
D Restore the inSite parameters
cd /export/home/sdc/scripts [Return]
./insite.restore [Return]
Restoring IIP files from file:
/tmp/restore/insite.restore.3260/config_insite.Z ...
.....................................
net.ipv4.ip_forward = 1
Restart Browser to take into account new configuration.
129
INSTALLATION
13 of 14
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
14 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
D Restart the Software to validate the new configuration.
D Make sure that the InSite functionality is operational.
9
INSITE UNINSTALLATION
As Insite software is now included in the AW software, the ”uninstall.insite” script is removed.
Insite software shall not be removed from the AW workstation.
34
130
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Time: 0 h 30 min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 14
TOOLS REQUIRED
D A blank CDROM
or
D A rewritable CDROM (see section 4–5: Erasing a rewritable Cdrom)
2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None.
3
PREREQUISITES
Advantage Workstation is configured (Job Card IST 001, IST002, IST003).
SCSI hardware options are installed (Job Card IST 004).
Other options are installed (Job Card IST 005, IST 006) and the Network is configured.
4
START AW APPLICATION
D Login as sdc
sdc [Enter]
Password : adw4.4 [Enter]
Wait for the Patient List (Browser) window to pop up.
5
REINSTALL SETUPS FROM OLDER AW SYTEMS UPGRADE
It is NO LONGER possible to reinstall setups of your older AW1.2, AW2.0, AW3.1 or AW4.0 (upgraded
systems, as the parameters are now too different from those of an AW4.3 system.
AW4.1 / 4.1P, AW4.2 / 4.2P and AW4.3 systems parameters can be restored to the AW4.4 system,
through the Configuration Cdrom. For non–compatibility reasons, filters will not be reinstalled.
6
AW BASIC FEATURES CHECK
6-1
Viewer basic features check
Open the Patient List (Browser) and check if some DEMO Exams are loaded. If not, you can either
select to install the SMPTE pattern, or refer to IST 012 to install the Demo exams.
Select some of these exams and check that they can be fully displayed with the VIEWER. Try some of
the System’s viewing functionalities and tools to make sure that your AW is fully operational.
6-2
Network Communication Test
– Test the Ethernet connection by pulling images (or pushing from an image source). Remember
that the scanning system data base must be active, to query remote host and pull images.
The Network Icon becomes active.
131
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
– Check that Telnet is possible from another station (CT, MR ...) on which inSite is installed.
If not, check for proper PNF settings. See IST002 , section 4–3.
6-3
”Direct Connect” Communication Test
If the Direct Connect option is installed, test the communication by querying a ”Direct Connect” host,
and run the Viewer application (or Volume Viewer application, if applicable) on remote images to
check that the link is active and the performances are acceptable.
6-4
Postscript Printer(s) check
– Open the Filmer by clicking on the Filmer button of the Browser.
– Click on Option button to select the right type of printer (Color or Greyscale printer(s) #n).
– Select 1x1 format.
Note:
The output device can be changed when images are loaded in the Film Composer if the
currently selected format is compatible with the new output device being selected.
– Move the pointer of the mouse to the displayed SMPTE image, press on the mouse left button
and slide the cursor to the Film Composer image field before releasing the mouse button.
The SMPTE pattern appears in the Film Composer image field.
– Click on the PRINT button. The message in the Film Composer ”Current Status” changes to
”Printing”.
Note:
The SMPTE pattern is printed in black and white on the Color Printer. To check the color
rendering, you need to make a 3D reconstruction.
– Stop the SMPTE image VIEWER.
6-5
Dicom Print Test
– Open the Filmer by clicking on the Filmer button of the Browser.
– Click on Option button to select the right type of printer (Dicom printer #n).
– Select 1x1 format.
Note:
The output device can be changed when images are loaded in the Filmer if the currently
selected format is compatible with the new output device being selected.
– Move the pointer of the mouse to the displayed SMPTE image, press on the mouse left button
and slide the cursor to the Film Composer image field before releasing the mouse button.
The SMPTE pattern appears in the Film Composer image field.
– Click on the PRINT button. The message in the Film Composer ”Current Status” changes to
”Printing”.
– Stop the SMPTE image VIEWER.
7
CREATE A BOOT DISKETTE
WARNING
CREATING A BOOT DISKETTE IS NO LONGER POSSIBLE, AS THE KERNEL OF
THE GEHC LINUX OPERATING SYSTEM IS TOO LARGE TO HOLD ONTO A
FLOPPY DISKETTE.
132
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
8
DEFINE USER(S) LOGIN ACCOUNTS
Before proceeding with these steps, you will have to check with the Site administrator whether or not
they wish to use the EA3 Enterprise Authentication feature to manage the Users of the site.
D If the site does not have a server to manages the Users, you do not have to set up EA3, and you
will declare the requested Users as usual (see 8–1).
D If the site has a server which manages the Users, you will have to set up EA3 (see 8–2) to allow
the sites Users to login to the AW system, through their User’s name and password, registered in
the Site’s server.
WARNING
8-1
WHEN SELECTING EA3 ENTERPRISE AUTHENTICATION FEATURE, ALL USERS
ACCOUNTS THAT MAY HAVE BEEN PREVIOUSLY DECLARED LOCALLY ON
YOUR AW (SEE 8–1) WILL BE DELETED.
THE ”SDC” USER IS OF COURSE NOT DELETED.
Define local user accounts
Users accounts can preferably be created through the CSD Configuration menu.
Refer to Job Card IST002, for User accounts configuration instructions.
You may also create Users the usual way, as follows:
Select User Management Tools from the Security menu.
To access the Root menu, press simultaneously the <Alt> and <Props> keys:
Password: administrator [Enter]
Note:
This tool is also accessible remotely as follows:
su – sdc_admin [Enter]
Password: administrator [Enter]
A command window pops up with the User Management menu.
Main MENU
USERS MANAGEMENT...................................1
SHARED PROTOCOLS MANAGEMENT........................2
EXAM CODES MANAGEMENT..............................3
133
INSTALLATION
3 of 14
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
4 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
CONFIGURATION......................................4
BACKUP THE WHOLE CONFIG ON CDROM...................5
RESTORE THE WHOLE CONFIG FROM CDROM................6
=================================================================
Enter your choice or <Enter> to display the current menu [?,q] ?
Type 1 [Enter] to enter User Management menu.
USERS MANAGEMENT
display the list of users..........................11
add a user.........................................12
remove a user......................................13
rename a user......................................14
set a user password................................15
restore users from a config cdrom..................16
=================================================================
Enter your choice or <Enter> to display the current menu [?,q] ? [Enter]
Type 12 [Enter] to create a User account.
Enter the user name [?,q]
(this will be the logging name)
e.g.: dr jones [Enter]
Enter the user family name [?,q]
e.g.: jones [Enter]
Enter the user given name [?,q]
e.g.: jones [Enter]
Enter the user middle name [?,q]
e.g.: a [Enter]
Enter the user name prefix [?,q]
e.g.: b [Enter]
Enter the user name suffix [?,q]
e.g.: c [Enter]
Account successfully created for jones
Enter the password [?,q]
e.g.: jone1s [Enter]
(mute typing of the password)
Enter the password again [?,q]
e.g.: jone1s [Enter]
(mute typing of the password)
Enter the other users the same way and when done, type 0 to return to the Main menu or q to quit, or
2 to enter the Shared Protocols menu etc...
Note:
To enter the new User account, click on Logout from Exit menu. Click on Yes button in the
pop up confirmation window and enter the User login and password in the Login window.
Note:
Refer to the Operator Manual for more information about User Management, Shared
Protocols Management, Exam Codes Management and Configuration.
You may now wish to setup other parameters through the Administration Menu.
See the following examples (note that some of them have already been set up during the install.site
phase (see IST002)
134
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Choose a command [?,??,q]: 2 [Enter]
SHARED PROTOCOLS MANAGEMENT
display the list of the shared protocols...........21
add a shared protocol in the library...............22
remove a shared protocol from the library..........23
rename a shared protocol in the library............24
restore shared protocols from a config cdrom.......25
Choose a command [?,??,q]: 3 [Enter]
EXAM CODES MANAGEMENT
display the list of the Exam Codes.................31
define new Exam Codes..............................32
remove Exam Codes definition(s)....................33
restore Exam Codes from a config cdrom.............35
Choose a command [?,??,q]: 4 [Enter]
CONFIGURATION
configure the autolock function....................41
configure the screen–saver function................42
configure the autodelete function..................43
D The auto–delete activity is disabled by default. Configure it if necessary: 43 [Enter]
Please choose the autodelete activity ?(off/on) :[off] on [Enter]
Enter the amount of free disk space under which autodelete starts (in MB) : 14000 [Enter]
Enter the amount of free disk space above which autodelete stops (in MB) : 35000 [Enter]
–––> To activate this setting, you will have to restart AW.
Note:
Default values are: For XW8200, delmin = 14000, delmax = 35000 . For XW8000,
delmin=12300 and delmax=30000 . For X4000, delmin=5200, delmax=12000
Note:
For upgrades from older AW4.1 or AW4.2 versions, the AW configuration restore from CD
process will force the autodelete values to the default values mentioned above, if they were
previously stored on the AW Configuration Cdrom, below the recommended values.
D The screen–saver function is ON by default. Configure it if necessary: 42 [Enter]
.................
D The autolock function is OFF by default. Configure it if necessary: 41 [Enter]
.................
D Quit the Administration menu
Choose a command [?,??,q]: q [Enter]
8-2
Setup EA3 server
WARNING
WHEN SELECTING EA3 ENTERPRISE AUTHENTICATION FEATURE, ALL USERS
ACCOUNTS THAT MAY HAVE BEEN PREVIOUSLY DECLARED LOCALLY ON
YOUR AW (SEE 8–1) WILL BE DELETED.
THE ”SDC” USER IS OF COURSE NOT DELETED.
135
INSTALLATION
5 of 14
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
6 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
To set up the EA3 Enterprise Authentication feature, you will have to configure your AW with all
information concerning the Hospital Users Authentication server.
This information must be obtained from the Hospital Network Administrator.
D Start the EA3 configuration tool:
To access the Root Menu , press <Alt> <F3> to iconfy the current windows.
Press on the middle button of the mouse, and select the Root Menu / Service Tools / EA3
Configuration menu.
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Display Configuration
Save Configuration
Command Window
Recover Database
Service Tools
AW Administration
Restart AW
Install package
Service Tools
EA3 Configuration
Exit AW
Note:
EA3 menu can be launched as well by typing the following command in a Command Window:
/export/home/sdc/scripts/configure.ea3 [Enter]
The following menu pops up:
EA3 configuration menu
======================
Current EA3 status: off
FUNCTION......................................... KEYWORD
Set authentication mode...........................mode
Start EA3 configuration GUI (needs EA3 enabled).. gui
Quit............................................. quit, q
Enter your choice:
D To turn on EA3: Type the following keyword :
mode [Enter]
The following messages pops up:
Enter authentication mode: (ea3/local): ea3 [Enter]
You need root account for EA3 configuration!
Please enter root password
Password: operator [Enter]
The EA3 authentication will be switched on. This operation
the previously created local AW users if any (except sdc).
Starting EA3 server services: done.
D Start the EA3 Graphical User Interface: Type the following keyword :
gui [Enter]
136
will delete
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
7 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
The following messages pops up:
You need root account for EA3 configuration!
Please enter root password
Password: operator [Enter]
Run administration screen
The EA3 administration screen pops up
GE Healthcare
Group and Permission Mapping
Configuration
Log Viewer
GEService
Administrator
StandardUser
LimitedUser
Show protected groups
Apply Group settings
Add Group
Remove Group
Exit
D Click on the Configuration tab
The Configuration window displays
GE Healthcare
Group and Permission Mapping
Configuration
Enterprise
Configuration
Audit Log
Log Viewer
LDAP Console
Inactivity Timeout (minutes)
0
Display Emergency Button
Display Emergency Prompt
Cache Enterprise Users
Enable Enterprise Authentication
Enable Authorization
Apply Configuration
Restore
Exit
D Click to select Enable Enterprise Authentication. Selecting Display Emergency Prompt and
Display Emergency Button is optional.
Make sure that Cache Enterprise Users and Enable Authorization features are deselected, or
click to deselect them.
137
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
8 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
D Click on Apply Configuration button. The button changes to Apply Now.
Click on Apply Now button. The button changes back to Apply Configuration.
Now you need to set up the Enterprise server. Before you proceed, request assistance from the
hospital administrator.
D Click on the Enterprise tab
The Configuration window displays
GE Healthcare
Group and Permission Mapping
Configuration
Configuration
Log Viewer
Enterprise Audit Log LDAP Console
Directory Types
Microsoft Active Directory
Authentication Type
LDAP Format
Server IP address
Kerberos
Domain
LDAP DN
Server Name
LDAP Login Attrib
Generate Defaults
LDAP First Name Attrib
LDAP Last Name Attrib
LDAP Group Attrib
Realm Name
Apply Configuration
Restore
Exit
– Directory Types :
Allows you to select Microsoft Active Directory or Novell e–Directory
– Server IP address:
Enter the IP address of the Enterprise Authentication server
– Server Name:
Enter the name,domain_name and extention (i.e: .com) of the Enterprise Authentication server
– Generate Defaults button:
This button is not used.
– Authentication Type:
Allows you to choose among Kerberos, LDAP or LDAP/SSL type.
– LDAP Format:
Allows you to select domain or LDAP/SSL type.
138
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
– LDAP DN:
This is LDAP settings. Make sure you do not type spaces between each characters:
i.e: DC=med,DC=ge,DC=com
– LDAP Login Attrib:
This is LDAP settings: i.e: sAMAccountName: Make sure to enter capital letters when needed.
– LDAP First Name Attrib:
This is LDAP settings: i.e: givenName
– LDAP Last Name Attrib:
This is LDAP settings: i.e: sn
– LDAP Group Attrib:
This is LDAP settings: i.e: memberOf
– Realm Name:
This is LDAP settings of the form DOMAIN_NAME.COM: i.e: MED.GE.COM
D Click on Apply Configuration button. The button changes to Apply Now.
Click on Apply Now button. The button changes back to Apply Configuration.
Now you are done with setting up the Enterprise server.
D Click on the Exit button to quit EA3 configuration
The following menu pops up:
EA3 configuration menu
======================
Current EA3 status: on
EA3 server IP: X.X.X.X (i.e: 10.24.32.1 is the IP address of the server)
FUNCTION......................................... KEYWORD
Set authentication mode...........................mode
Start EA3 configuration GUI (needs EA3 enabled).. gui
Quit............................................. quit, q
Enter your choice:
D Quit EA3: Type the following keyword :
q [Enter]
D Logout.
D Ask an hospital user to login, by using his/her user ID and password.
Note:
If you are not able to login with your User name and password, you may consider the
following causes:
– It is necessary to declare a router for your site and this has not been done.
Open a Command window and try to ping the Server to make sure you can reach it.
– The server is not responding. It may be down. Check with the Network Administrator.
– The User you have selected is not known or authorized by the server.
139
INSTALLATION
9 of 14
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
10 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
9
SAVE ALL SITE’S PARAMETERS ON THE CONFIGURATION CDROM
Note:
The blank CD can be either a CDROM or a rewritable CDROM.
In case you want to use a non–blank rewritable CDROM media, you should erase the media
before being able writing it again. See procedure below
Procedure to erase a non–blank rewritable CD–RW before saving the configuration
To erase a non–blank rewritable Cdrom, open a Command window and type the following command.
Note that it will take about 15 to 20 minutes to erase the Cdrom.
During this time, nothing seems to be happening. Please be patient.
D cdrecord dev=ATA:0,0,0 blank=all [Enter] (XW8400)
D cdrecord dev=ATA:1,0,0 blank=all [Enter] (XW8200)
Note:
For information: To erase a rewritable DVD, switch User to root and type in:
dvd+rw–format –force /dev/cdrom [Enter]
Saving the configuration
Click on the Admin button, then on the Display Configuration or Save Configuration button :
This allows you to display (screen) or save on a blank Cdrom all the installed Options protection keys,
and the Hosts files to simplify a future reinstallation. Select Save Configuration at this time.
The Save Configuration on CD window pops–up.
Please enter the administrator’s password :
administrator [Enter]
Users to backup: sdc user1 user2 user3 usern
backup of sdc...
backup of user1...
.............
backup of usern...
..........................
Please insert a blank CD in the cd writer, and press <ENTER> [Enter]
....................
140
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Note:
The following is an example, to later restore the whole configuration from the Backup Cdrom.
Click on the Admin button, then click on the AW Administration button.
Enter the Administrator’s password: administrator [Enter]
From the Main Menu, type 1 [Enter] to enter the User Management submenu.
Main MENU
USERS MANAGEMENT...................................1
SHARED PROTOCOLS MANAGEMENT........................2
EXAM CODES MANAGEMENT..............................3
CONFIGURATION......................................4
BACKUP THE WHOLE CONFIG ON CDROM...................5
RESTORE THE WHOLE CONFIG FROM CDROM................6
=================================================================
Enter your choice or <Enter> to display the current menu [?,q] ? [Enter]
6 [Enter]
WARNING: The current config will be overwritten
Please type ’restore’ then <Enter> to confirm
or just <Enter> to abort.
restore [Enter]
Note:
The following is an example, to later restore the Users parameters configuration from the
Backup Cdrom.
From the Main Menu, type 1 [Enter] to enter the User Management submenu.
USERS MANAGEMENT
display the list of users..........................11
add a user.........................................12
remove a user......................................13
rename a user......................................14
set a user password................................15
restore users from a config cdrom..................16
=================================================================
Enter your choice or <Enter> to display the current menu [?,q] 16 [Enter]
Please insert the backup CD and type <Enter> [Enter]
–– List of users on cdrom ––
user1
........
usern
Please enter the name of the user to restore (or ’no user’ to finish) : user1
[Enter]
restoring password for user user1 ...
restoring user user1 ...
141
INSTALLATION
11 of 14
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
12 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
9-1
LCD Color Monitor(s) Adjustments
D Install the SMPTE test patterns from the Admin menu. This takes a few seconds to appear in the
Patient List (Browser) window (refer to Chapter 3, section 2-7 for more information).
D Select the SMPTE MR pattern from the Browser menu by clicking on the image.
D Display the SMPTE pattern by clicking on the VIEWER button of the Browser. The correct viewing
levels are WW=100 WL=1024.
Choose the 1 x 1 format by selecting it from the Format icon on the Viewer.
Note:
To display the SMPTE pattern, use the Layout Manager and drag & drop the SMPTE icon
into the 2nd screen icon.
Choose the 1 x 1 format by selecting it from the Format icon (number of images per viewport)
on the Layout Manager in order to enlarge it on the screens.
D Check for correct adjustment of linearity, brightness and contrast of the monitor. Readjust if
necessary.
For detailed instructions concerning the monitors controls, refer to the monitor’s Users manual
supplied with the monitor.
9-2
LCD Color Monitor(s) Calibration
For color calibration of the LCD monitor(s),, please order tool 216 ”LCD color analyzer” from the
”pool of tools” and refer to Service notes SNAW2002–009, SNAW2002–012 and SNAW2004–10
instructions delivered with the Tool or available from the AW–IB web site
@ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com
142
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
10
EXAMPLE OF AW CONFIGURATION SCREEN
– Click on the Admin button and select Display Configuration. The system displays a window
containing all the configuration information of your workstation and its peripherals.
The following is a configuration example for the XW8400 workstation.
Site Identification
–––––––––––––––––––
Hospital name : BUC
Local language : english
S/N
: 10334000
System ID
: 72496M01
Appli. support : 01 30 70 40 40
Sales support : 06 80 55 00 13
Station Configuration
–––––––––––––––––––––
operating system
: Linux 2.6.15–2.5 (GEHC/CTT Linux 5.2.x)
machine type
: HP xw8400 Workstation
processor type
: x86_64 (Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU
5160 @ 3.00GHz)
number of processors
:4
processor 1 clock
: 2992.558 MHz
processor 2 clock
: 2992.558 MHz
processor 3 clock
: 2992.558 MHz
processor 4 clock
: 2992.558 MHz
number of graphic cards
:1
graphic card 1
: nVidia Corporation NV44 [Quadro NVS 285] (rev a1)
memory size
: 3933 MB
hostname
: awpc–BGL–1
internet address
: 3.249.13.231
internet netmask
: 255.255.252.0
second card internet address : 192.168.1.30
second card internet netmask : 255.255.255.0
licenseid
: 020eb68b
Floating License Configuration
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Standalone mode.
A.W. Configuration
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Option Hard Copy lexmark (hostname lexmark)
Environment Configuration
–––––––––––––––––––––––––
AW Version
: AW4.4_0X.0X_EXT_CTT_5.X
Software Key
: abae56fe
143
INSTALLATION
13 of 14
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
35
14 of 14
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
Monitors configuration
Database patient key
Autodelete Activity
Screen–saver function
Screen–saver delay
Screen–saver mode
Autolock function
Direct Connect configuration
Data Export Web Server
EA3 authentication
Firewall status
DICOM Remote Node Control
AW CCOW status
AW SoftSwitch status
: 2L1 (NEC)
: NAME_ID_BIRTH_SEX
: off
: on
: 5 min
: GE
: off
: off
: off
: off
: off
: off
: off
: off
Installed Application(s)
––––––––––––––––––––––––
Application Name
Volume Viewer 3
VesselIQ Xpress
Volume Viewer PET
CardIQ Xpress Pro
Advantage Straight
Note:
License key string
License information
Volume_Viewer
2779511285
VesselIQ_Xpress
3952319393
Volume_Viewer_PET 2322358726
CardIQ_Xpress_Pro 3590443941
Advantage Straight 1765020928
License availability Version information
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
(version vxtl_7_3_x)
(version vxtl_7_3_x)
(version vxtl_7_3_x)
(version vxtl_7_3_x)
(version unknown)
If only the license key has been reloaded from the Configuration Cdrom, but the application
has not been yet reinstalled, you will read (version unknown) after the the license key.
In this case, reinstall the application(s) from the concerned Application Cdrom.
The window automatically disappears after a few minutes.
IT IS NOW TIME TO COMPLETE A.W CONFIGURATION FORM LOCATED AT THE BEGINNING OF
THIS MANUAL.
ALSO MAKE SURE THAT YOU HAVE SAVED THE SITE PARAMETERS ON THE
CONFIGURATION CDROM, AS SHOWN SECTION 5, AND STORE IT TOGETHER WITH THE
SOFTWARE CDROMS AND THE SERVICE MANUAL.
36
144
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Time: 0 h 30 min to several hours – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1 of 10
Before you start, you must determine if the customer requests that you reinstall the existing images,
present on both internal disks.
If it is the case, be prepared for long reinstallation time.
i.e.: it takes about 1 hour to reinstall 126 000 images (35 images per second).
1
SUPPLIES
D Advantage Workstation 4.4 CDROM.
WARNING
THE AW FAST LOAD DVD CANNOT BE USED FOR WARM INSTALL
D Advanced Applications CDROMs or DVDROMs.
D Site Configuration CDROM.
D Demo exams CDROM(s) if necessary
2
TOOLS REQUIRED
None.
3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
BEFORE YOU START, MAKE SURE YOU WILL BE ABLE TO RE–INSTALL ANY
NON–RESIDENT SOFTWARES AND DATA SUCH AS ADVANTAGE SIM OPTION,
SO CHECK THAT YOU HAVE SAVED ALL THE NECESSARY DATA.
D Before proceeding, save InSite configuration on Hard disk: Refer to IST 008 section 8.
D Before proceeding, save system configuration (including InSite config) on CDROM.
Refer to IST 009.
D This procedure should only be used to reload AW application software.
It can only succeed if the O.S is fully operational and if Frame Buffers drivers and Disk Striping
software are still running properly. In this case, images can be preserved.
D In case of doubt on the OS integrity, preferably use IST 011 to reload both O.S and AW software.
In this case make sure Customer did not load personal files on disk that he should save before.
D The Site Configuration parameters (license keys, customer presets and protocols, etc ...) are
saved under the /export/home/backup directory at the beginning of the Load From Warm
procedure, and will be automatically reinstalled at the end.
Therefore the Configuration Cdrom does not need to be used, and should be considered as a
backup solution, in case all configuration parameters would not have been properly restored.
D The license keys for applications will be automatically recalled while you will be reloading the
applications from their respective Cdroms.
145
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 010 – AW Application Software Reload
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 10
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 010 – AW Application Software Reload
4
LOAD FROM WARM: INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Pre–condition: Linux Operating System is operational.
Start Load From Warm IST010 Part 1: Software reload
– Make sure you have the AW configuration Cdrom available
– Load AW software from the AW software Cdrom)
AW
Cdrom
Dicom MOD drive is turned on
The workstation reboots
AW software is reloaded
Part 2
Login as sdc and start the Common Service
Desktop from the Root Menu/Service Tools
– Select the Configuration tab, and type in the
root password to begin the configuration steps.
IST 002 0.5 hours / 1 FE
Select ”Complete setup”:
– The ”Site’s Parameters menu displays
Check that the Site’s parameters have been properly
restored Click Next Step when done.
2’
– The ”Host Management” menu displays
2’
Check that the Remote Hosts parameters have
been properly restored. Click Next Step when done.
– The ”Routers Management” menu displays
Check that the Routers parameters have been
properly restored. Click Next Step when done.
2’
– The ”Dicom Printers Management” menu displays
Enter the Printers parameters, and save upon completion. Click Next Step when done.
2’
– The ”Postscript Printers Management” menu displays
Check that the Printers parameters have been properly
restored. Click Next Step when done.
GO TO A
146
2’
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
37
3 of 10
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 010 – AW Application Software Reload
IST 002 continued
A
The ”MOD Install” menu displays
Check that the MOD has been properly reinstalled
Click Next Step when done.
5’
The ”Applications Installation” menu displays
warning you to launch EasyInstall
Start Easy Install from the User Interface.
Refer to IST 005
10’ / Apps / 1 FE
Start Applications install from:
– CDs : all Applications
Applications
CDs/DVDs
The license keys are restored
but you must reinstall all your
Applications from their respective Cdroms
Install all Applications purchased by customer.
Close the EasyInstall utility when all applications have been installed.
Back to the Configuration Menu:
Click Next Step when done.
IST 002 continued
10’
Refer to IST 008
30’
IST 002 continued
10’
per
Apps
The ”HTTP Configuration” menu displays
Check that the HTTP parameter has been
properly restored. Click Next Step when done.
1/2 hour / 1 FE
InSite/iLinq Configuration menu displays
Open a Command Window and proceed with
Insite reinstallation and parameters restore.
Back to the Configuration Menu:
Click Next Step when done.
GO TO B
147
Tests with OLC
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
38
4 of 10
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 010 – AW Application Software Reload
IST 002 continued
B
The ”Users Management” menu displays
Check that the Users parameters have been
properly restored. Click Next when done.
The default ”operator” root
password is restored upon
software reload.
The ”Passwords Management” menu displays
Change the sdc and root Users passwords, and
save upon completion. Click Next when done.
5’
5’
IST 003 20’ / 1 FE
– Start the Utilities menu. Select the Utilities tab
– Check the PNF Firewall configuration
– Check InSite 2.0 for SWD configuration
– Check CCOW application configuration
– Check the SoftSwitch application configuration.
AW workstation is now configured:
Quit the Common Service Desktop
Reboot AW workstation
AW workstation is operational
IST 009 0.5 hour / 1 FE
Turnover to Customer
Perform functionality checks
Paper work done
AND
148
Site is ready for customer
5’
5’
5’
5’
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
39
5
PREREQUISITES
D LINUX Operating System should be installed and running on the workstation (see IST 011).
D All Site information such as Software protection keys are available on paper and/or on the
Configuration Cdrom, if necessary.
D Load From Warm procedure will take longer time if the Software Download Agent is running.
Therefore you should turn the SWD agent off, before starting the LFW process.
Refer to IST003, Section 3.2.2.
Turn Status to off in the ”configure.swdownload” script.
6
LOAD FROM WARM PROCEDURE
6-1
PART 1: AW software reload
CAUTION
BEFORE YOU START THE AW SOFTWARE LOAD PROCEDURE, YOU MUST
POWER ON THE EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICES.
D Shutdown workstation if it is not already shutdown (Power down indicates system is shutdown):
– If you are logged in as ”sdc” and AW is running, you can click on the ”shutdown” button
available on the browser in tools menu.
– If you are logged in as ”root”, open an Xterm from the Workspace menu called Root Menu,
(press on the left button of the mouse and select Xterm), then type in :
init 0 [Return]
D Make sure that the external SCSI Dicom MOD drive option is turned on.
D Turn on and reboot workstation.Wait for boot completion.
D Login as root
<hostname> console login: root [Return]
Password: operator [Return]
CAUTION
!!! DO NOT RUN THE install.aw SCRIPT LOGGED IN AS sdc OR AS ANY OTHER
USER !!! LOGIN AS root TO PERFORM install.aw SCRIPT!!!
The Windows Manager is starting.
D Open an XTerm from the Root menu
D Type the following command to go to installation directory:
cd /export/home [Return]
D Insert the AW application CDROM into drive.
D Run Advantage Workstation installation script
./install.aw [Return]
WARNING : You are about to reinstall AW software.
If the release is on a CDROM, just press <ENTER>.
Otherwise, please enter the path of the directory containing the rpm
packages or enter q to quit
149
INSTALLATION
5 of 10
JOB CARD IST 010 – AW Application Software Reload
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
6 of 10
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 010 – AW Application Software Reload
D Press [Return]
Note:
If message /export/home/install.aw: Command not found pops up, it will not be possible to
successfully complete this procedure. Do the Load From Cold procedure as shown in Job
Card IST 011 instead.
Note:
If the Application CDROM is not already inserted into the drive, the following text appears:
Please wait .....................
*** ERROR : CDROM not found. Try again...
Please insert Application CDROM and type y when ready [y,?,q] :
y [Return]
Note:
If you typed q (for quit) the following text appears:
cdrom: No such file or directory
........................
INSTALLATION ABORTED : CONSULT YOUR SERVICE MANUAL.
........................
Restart installation by typing the command : ./install.aw [Return]
Note:
If a wrong CDROM is inserted instead of Application software, the following text appears:
Please wait ..........
*** ERROR : Missing file(s) on CDROM media.
Check that the loaded CDROM is the one of the Application.
Would you like to try again [y,n,?,q]
Replace the wrong Cdrom by the Application Cdrom and type:
y [Return]
The install.packages script then starts to install the AW software:
The screen turns dark and displays a rolling ball
CAUTION
LEAVE THE MOUSE IDDLE DURING INSTALLATION OF THE PACKAGES IN
ORDER TO AVOID POTENTIAL SYSTEM CRASH.
When the AW software reload process has completed, the system shutdowns and reboot.
Note:
You can review the installation logfiles later by typing the command:
more /export/home/installaw.log [Return]
The CDROM is ejected. The installation is now complete. The system shutdowns.
Advantage Workstation Operating System and AW basic software are now loaded.
Proceed now with the next step:
D Reboot the workstation (type reboot in the Terminal window) and start AW application.
150
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
7 of 10
6-2
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 010 – AW Application Software Reload
PART 2: Start the CSD tool.
D Start AW application :
Login : sdc [Return]
Password: adw4.4 [Return]
D Launch the Common Service Desktop from the User Interface, Admin / Service Tools or from the
Root Menu / Service Tools.
OR
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Display Configuration
Save Configuration
Command Window
Service Tools
AW Administration
Restart AW
Recover Database
Install package
Service Tools
EA3 Configuration
Exit AW
Note:
Refer to Job Card IST002 for more details on the configuration steps.
The Common Service Desktop displays within the Mozilla navigator web page
6-2-1 Start the Configuration menu
D Click on the Configuration button.
The Configuration menu displays
Click on Perform full configuration, in order to check that all the configuration parameters necessary
to complete your system installation have been properly reinstalled.
As this is your first entry into the Configuration menu, you will be prompted to type in the Root
password. The following window pops–up:
D Click into the password field to select, and type in the root password
operator [Return]
The Configure Site Parameters menu pops–up allowing you to check/configure the following
parameters:
– AW software license key
– User Interface language
– Monitors configuration (1 or 2 monitors)
– Monitors type (LCD or CRT monitors)
151
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
8 of 10
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 010 – AW Application Software Reload
– Serial number of the workstation
– GE System ID of the workstation
– GE System Order number
– Hospital name
– Support phone number
– Sales phone number
– Remote Node control
– Autodelete activity and parameters
– Autolock activity and parameters
– Screen Saver activity and parameters
– Direct Connect selection
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Host Parameters Menu pops–up
D Check that the Remote Hosts parameters have been properly restored.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Routers declaration main Menu pops–up
D The central window of the menu, displays the routing tables (result of the ”netstat –r” command).
Check that the necessary routers for your site have been properly restored.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Dicom Printer Management Menu pops–up
D Check that the Dicom Printers parameters have been properly restored.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
152
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
40
The Postscript Printer Management Menu pops–up
D Check that the Postscript Printers parameters have been properly restored.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Dicom MOD Installation Menu pops–up
D Check that the Dicom MOD parameters have been properly restored.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Software options installation Menu pops–up
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
http://...............................................
O Search
Installing Applications
To install Applications, you have to sit at the console of the AW workstation.
. Use the Easyinstall program. Start it from the Patient List.
. Install all Applications.
For detailed information on each step, refer to the Service Manual.
When all the settings are done, click on Next Step (Perform Full Configuration
mode), or quit the Common Service Desktop if done with the configuration.
Next Step
Note:
The Applications license keys have been restored, but you must reinstall all Applications that
the customer has purchased from their respective Cdroms.
D Install the Advanced applications from their respective Cdroms. Refer to Chapter 1, IST005.
D When done with the Software options installation, click on Next Step to continue.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The HTTP support configuration Menu pops–up
D Check that the HTTP support parameters have been properly restored.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
153
INSTALLATION
9 of 10
JOB CARD IST 010 – AW Application Software Reload
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
10 of 10
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 010 – AW Application Software Reload
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The InSite Installation and Configuration menu window displays.
There is no specific CSD based tool at this time, to help you configure Insite. This window is only an
informational window, to let you know what steps should be done.
For more information on the InSite installation/configuration, refer to Chapter 1, Job Card IST008.
D When done with Insite configuration, close the Command window to return to the CSD
configuration menu and click on Next Step to continue.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Add User management menu window displays.
D Check that the Users parameters have been properly restored.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Change passwords for sdc, sdc_admin and root menu window displays.
D Check that the sdc and/or sdc_admin passwords have been properly restored.
Note:
The root password is intentionally reset to the default ”operator” value.
If necessary, you have to set it again to the desired value.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
menu.
The Installation done information window displays.
6-2-2 Start the Utilities menu
D Click on the Utilities button. The Utilities menu displays.
Check that all utilities configurations have been properly restored. Refer to IST003.
Now it is time to Restart AW, or to shutdown/reboot the workstation
(if you have installed the Dicom MOD).
D Quit the CSD and select Restart AW from the Root Menu. or reboot the workstation.
Advantage Workstation basic software and Applications software are now reinstalled.
Proceed now with the next step: Job Card IST009: Turnover to customer.
41
154
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Time: 1 h 30 min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 16
FOREWORD
The procedure described here should only be used in case of software reload.
XW8400 workstation can be reloaded with the ”AW Fast Load DVD for XW8400”, which contains
the dedicated GEHC Linux OS, and the AW software.
XW8200 workstation can be reloaded with the ”AW Fast Load DVD for XW8200”, which contains
the dedicated GEHC Linux OS, and the AW software.
The OS DVD–Rom together with the AW Cdrom can be used instead if necessary.
If you have the Site Configuration Cdrom available, you will be prompted to insert it, and the Site’s
parameters (License keys, customer’s presets and protocols, etc ..) will be automatically reinstalled.
Finally, you will have to reload and install the Applications from their respective Cdroms, and to
reinstall the InSite connectivity (if applicable).
2
TOOLS REQUIRED
D Preferred solution:
AW Fast Load DVD for XW8200
AW Fast Load DVD for XW8400
or
(see procedure section 5–1–1)
D If AW Fast Load DVD is not available or defective:
– GEHC OS DVD–ROM
– AW4.4 software CDROM. (See procedure section 5–1–2)
D Common items
Site Configuration CDROM.
Advanced Applications CDROMs or DVDROMs.
Note:
The Service Tools Cdrom is no longer necessary to activate Insite, as the Insite files are
included in the AW software.
3
PREREQUISITES
3-1
Software items
WARNING
BEFORE YOU START, MAKE SURE YOU WILL BE ABLE TO RE–INSTALL ANY
NON–RESIDENT SOFTWARES AND DATA SUCH AS ADVANTAGE SIM OPTION,
SO CHECK THAT YOU HAVE SAVED ALL THE NECESSARY DATA.
D Before starting the installation, make sure that the following information is available (see AW
Configuration Form at beginning of manual or Chapter 3, Section 2-1-12) :
155
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
– Hostname of workstation.
– Internet Protocol Address of workstation.
– Netmask Value (if applicable) of workstation.
– AW Software Licence key.
D Before proceeding, save InSite configuration : Refer to IST 008 section 8.
D Before proceeding, save system configuration (including InSite configuration) on CDROM.
Refer to IST 009.
WARNING
IF YOU WISH TO RESTORE THE CONFIGURATION CDROM FROM AN UPGRADE
(I.E: UPGRADE FROM AW4.1), MAKE SURE THAT YOU KEEP THE SAME IP
ADDRESS AND HOSTNAME, TO AVOID SYSTEM DISCREPANCIES.
i.e:
your AW4.1 hostname was ADW01 and IP address was 192.10.56.3
your AW4.4 hostname MUST BE ADW01 and IP address MUST BE 192.10.56.3
Failing to do so would corrupt your /etc/hosts file. You may face problems with the HTTP Server or
some other Network problems, because the old host file is restored from the Configuration Cdrom
You may change later on the IP address and hostname using the sys–reconfig script (see chapter 3,
section 2)
3-2
Dicom MOD drive option
WARNING
THE EXTERNAL SCSI MOD DRIVE CAN BE LEFT CONNECTED , BUT MUST BE
TURNED OFF, AS IT COULD INTERFERE WITH YOUR WORKSTATION DURING
THE LOAD FROM COLD PROCESS.
YOU WILL BE INSTRUCTED TO TURN IT ON LATER IN THE INSTALLATION
STEPS PROCEDURE.
Refer to IST004 for more information on the SCSI connection, and to Chapter 8, Section 1 for more
information on SCSI address selection.
156
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
3 of 16
4
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
LOAD FROM COLD: INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Start Load From Cold IST011 Part 1: Software reload
Fast Load DVD
for XW8400
OR
Fast Load DVD
for XW8200
– Make sure you have the AW configuration Cdrom available
– Turn OFF the Dicom MOD drive option
– Load AW software from the AW software media
yes
Fast Load
DVD available ?
OS DVD+ AW
CDrom
no
– Insert the GEHC OS Cdrom(s) and reset workstation.
When the OS is loaded, the Cdrom is ejected
– Insert the AW Fast Load DVD and reset workstation.
– Select reinstall
– Choose or not to reinstall existing images
The workstation reboots
When Fast Load software reinstallation has completed,
existing images are reinstalled (if previously selected)
– Login as root.
– Insert the AW Cdrom.
When AW software is loaded, the Cdrom is ejected.
AW software is reloaded
AW Configuration Cdrom
Enter Host parameters
Insert the AW Configuration Cdrom
The workstation completes the boot
Turn on the Dicom
MOD drive option, and
reboot the workstation
Part 2
Login as sdc and start the Common Service
Desktop from the Root Menu/Service Tools
– Select the Configuration tab, and type in the
root password to begin the configuration steps.
IST 002 0.5 hours / 1 FE
Select ”Complete setup”:
– The ”Site’s Parameters menu displays
Check that the Site’s parameters have been properly
restored Click Next Step when done.
GO TO A
157
2’
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
4 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
IST 002 continued
A
– The ”Host Management” menu displays
2’
Check that the Remote Hosts parameters have
been properly restored. Click Next Step when done.
– The ”Routers Management” menu displays
Check that the Routers parameters have been
properly restored. Click Next Step when done.
2’
– The ”Dicom Printers Management” menu displays
Enter the Printers parameters, and save upon completion. Click Next Step when done.
– The ”Postscript Printers Management” menu displays
Check that the Printers parameters have been properly
restored. Click Next Step when done.
The ”MOD Install” menu displays
Check that the MOD has been properly reinstalled
Click Next Step when done.
5’
The ”Applications Installation” menu displays
warning you to launch EasyInstall
Start Easy Install from the User Interface.
Refer to IST 005
10’ / Apps / 1 FE
Start Applications install from:
– CDs : All Applications
– DVD: future applications
Applications
CDs/DVDs
The license keys are restored
but you must reinstall all your
Applications from their respective Cdroms
10’
per
Apps
Install all Applications purchased by customer.
Close the EasyInstall utility when all applications have been installed.
Back to the Configuration Menu:
Click Next Step when done.
GO TO B
158
2’
2’
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
42
5 of 16
IST 002 continued
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
B
10’
Refer to IST 008
30’
The ”HTTP Configuration” menu displays
Check that the HTTP parameter,has been
properly restored. Click Next Step when done.
1/2 hour / 1 FE
InSite/iLinq Configuration menu displays
Open a Command Window and proceed with
Insite reinstallation and parameters restore.
Tests with OLC
Back to the Configuration Menu:
Click Next Step when done.
IST 002 continued
The ”Users Management” menu displays
Check that the Users parameters have been
properly restored. Click Next when done.
The default ”operator” root
password is restored upon
software reload.
The ”Passwords Management” menu displays
Change the sdc and root Users passwords, and
save upon completion. Click Next when done.
IST 003 1 hour / 1 FE
UTILITIES
Click on Utilities button on the CSD tools bar.
* Check/configure the PNF Firewall
* Check/configure Insite 2.0 for Sotware Download
* Check/configure the CCOW context manager
* Check/configure SoftSwitch
AW workstation is now configured:
Quit the Common Service Desktop
Reboot AW workstation
AW workstation is operational
GO TO C
159
5’
5’
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
43
6 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
C
IST 009 0.5 hour / 1 FE
Turnover to Customer
Perform functionality checks
AND
Site is ready for customer
Paper work done
5
PROCEDURE
5-1
Load From Cold PART 1: Software reload
Before you start, make sure that:
D You have saved the AW parameters on the AW Configuration Cdrom
D All customer and/or patient data has been properly saved
D Applications Cdroms are available for reinstallation
5-1-1 Steps for LFC with the Fast Load DVD
Note:
If you want to use the set of CDs instead of the DVD to do the LFC, refer to section 5–1–2.
D Insert the AW Fast Load DVD media into the DVD drive.
CAUTION
Make sure to use the appropriate Fast Load DVD corresponding to your
workstation:
Fast Load DVD for XW8400 or Fast Load DVD for XW8200.
D Cycle power to the workstation to reboot from the DVD.
The systems starts the Power On Selft Tests.
The system settings display, followed by hard disks size, memory size and other information on the
internal hardware devices. The BIOS version is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.
D Check that the BIOS version is 1.17 for XW8400 and 2.10 for XW8200.
If not, (this can be the case after replacement of the workstation, for instance), you must ”flash” the
Firmware and BIOS before going any further. Refer to Chapter 4, TSG 012.
The workstation reboots from the Fast Load DVD and the software load starts displaying the following:
AutoInstallation of Linux and AW4.4 application on XW8400 (or XW8200)
”Fast LOAD From COLD” (LFC)
===========================================================================
Please choose the workstation type:
160
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
44
This will take about 35mn, you do not need to standby. Symantec window
will appear and the progress indicator ..................
... get the CONFIGURATION CD or collect AW settings and Applications keys
At the end of system installation, you will be asked ........
...............................................................
If you do NOT want to continue, eject the DVD and press Ctrl Alt DEL
to reboot
!!!! DO NOT REMOVE THE DVC when the Symantec window is displayed
Press [Y] to continue the installation ?
D Press y to start software load.
The DVD check message displays then the Ghost installation process starts
Symantec Ghost .......
Progress indicator
0%
25%
50%
75%
100%
Restoring compressed data ...
Nothing seems to happen during one minute or so, then the progress indicator displays the
percentage of loaded data.
The Load process will take 25 to 30 minutes to complete and no User intervention is needed during
this time.
When the software load has completed, the following messages display:
The boot procedure will
1 – ask if you want a recover database in case of reinstallation (up to
several hours for a full database)
2 – ask for the network configuration data
3 – ask for configuration CD (if available) to configure AW
Log as ”sdc” and install the advanced applications:
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Remove the DVD and press on Ctrl Alt Del to reboot.
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
A:\>
D Eject the Fast Load DVD from the drive.
D Simultaneously press the <Ctrl> <Alt> and <Del> keys, to reboot the workstation
The workstation reboots from the hard disks and you will get the next set of questions, in order to
configure the Host information:
161
INSTALLATION
7 of 16
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
45
8 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
Please choose the installation type:
A – setup of a new station
B – setup with images recovery possibility) (up to several hours for a full
database)
C – Cancel
Choose type [ABC]?
D Press the <B> key to start the software setup on your station with image reinstallation.
Do you want to recover the images (up to several hours for a full
database)? (y/n) y [Return]
the partition /export/home1, images partiton is going to be recovered ...
The screen saver displays the GE logo during the Database recovery time, and when done, the
following messages display
database recover successful
followed by
.... restoring the documentation
.... restoring.................
........restoring password for sdc
...................
Now we must set a few configuration parameters.
You will have to confirm or re–enter the data at the end.
Please enter the hostname:
i.e: aw–01 [Enter]
Please enter the IP address:
i.e: 3.45.12.145 [Enter]
Please enter the netmask:
i.e: 255.255.252.0 [Enter]
hostname = aw–01
IP = 3.45.12.145
netmask = 255.255.252.0
Apply these settings ? (y/n)
y [Enter] to accept,
or n [Enter] if you wish to modify the settings
do you want to configure the second ethernet card (y/n) ?
If you want to configure your workstation for ”direct connect” through additional network, answer
y [Return]. If you do not want to configure your workstation for ”direct connect”through additional
network, answer n [Return]
If you have answered ”yes”, the next set of questions displays:
Please enter the IP address for eth1 :
Type in the ”direct connect” IP address for your workstation and press [Return] when done.
i.e : 193.1.1.1 [Return]
Please enter the netmask for eth1 :
Type in the appropriate Netmask then press on the [Return] key when done.
i.e : 255.255.255.0 [Return]
The Date & Time windows pop–up.
D Go to section 5.1.3: Common steps
162
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
46
5-1-2 Steps for LFC with DVD/CD distribution
WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO LOAD AW4.4 SOFTWARE ON X4000 AND XW8000. THESE
PLATFORM ARE NOT 64 BITS CAPABLE, SO THEY ARE NOT SUPPORTED.
D Insert the GEHC OS DVD–ROM media into the DVD drive.
The GEHC OS DVD–Rom is common for the XW8200 and XW8400 hardware platforms.
D Reset the workstation by pressing on the Reset button of the workstation.
The systems starts the Power On Selft Tests.
D Press on the <Esc> key when prompted.
– Check that the BIOS version is 1.17 (XW8400) or 2.10 (XW8200).
If not (this can be the case after replacement of the workstation, for instance), you must ”flash”
the Firmware and BIOS before going any further. Refer to Chapter 4, TSG 012.
D Enter the BIOS setup menu by pressing on the <F2> key, when prompted.
D Press on the <Esc> key to quit, and confirm by pressing [Enter],to exit the BIOS setting menu.
The system now resets and start to boot up again.
The system settings display, followed by hard disks size, memory size and other information on the
internal hardware devices.
The GEHC/CTT Linux, Production release 5.5.X Welcome Menu displays:
– To install the standard GEHC distribution, type {i}GEHC{0,2} <ENTER>
...............................................................
Alternatively, type aw44 <ENTER> for the AW44 install, or
DL2x0 <ENTER> for the DL server install, or
CTDARC <ENTER> for the CTDARC install.
magic <ENTER> or sedna <ENTER> .............
GEHC–MR <ENTER> .............
– To enter rescue mode, type: linux rescue <ENTER>
– Use the function keys listed below for more information ...
...................
D At the boot : prompt, type:
boot : aw44 [Enter]
The system starts installing the Operating System on your machine.
The Welcome to GEHC/CTT Linux window pops–up displaying first ”Loading”, and lot of messages
display next.Different blue screens are popping up alternatively, then the ”Copying_file”, followed by
the ”Processing” messages display.
The Package Installation screen displays with the ”Install Starting” message first, then witht the
”Processing” message, then the different packages start to install.
163
INSTALLATION
9 of 16
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
10 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
Package Installation
Name
: XXXXXXXX
Size
: XXXX
Summary : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Total
:
Completed :
Remaining :
XXX
XXX
XXX
XXX
XXX
XXX
X:XX:XX
X:XX:XX
X:XX:XX
<Tab>/<Alt Tab> Between Elements | <Space> selects | <F12> Next Screen
The GEHC LINUX installation from the DVD takes about 15 minutes to complete.
When it is done, the installation process ejects the DVD.
D Remove the GEHC OS DVD
D When done, press <Enter> to continue
Then a blue screen displays for a minute or so.
CAUTION
The system will start to shutdown. The DVD drive opens. Quickly remove the
Linux Cdrom from the drive, before the carriage closes again and attempts to
boot from the DVD, starting a new installation sequence. In case you have not
removed the CD immediately, reboot the station pressing on
<Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Del> and press on the Eject button to remove the DVD.
D Remove the LINUX DVDrom from the drive.
The system now reboots. At the end of the boot up sequence, the following message displays
cold_installation login : root [Enter]
Password : operator [Enter]
Do you want to manually update any system files ? (y/n) n [Enter]
Checking the cdrom
Please insert the AW cdrom and press <ENTER>
D Insert now the AW Cdrom into the drive and type: [Enter]
Now we must set a few configuration parameters.
You will have to confirm or re–enter the data at the end.
Please enter the hostname:
i.e: aw–01 [Enter]
Please enter the IP address:
i.e: 3.45.12.145 [Enter]
Please enter the netmask:
i.e: 255.255.252.0 [Enter]
hostname = aw–01
IP = 3.45.12.145
netmask = 255.255.252.0
Apply these settings ? (y/n)
y [Enter] to accept,
or n[Enter] if you wish to modify the settings
164
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
11 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
Setting hostname = ............
Setting IP = ...............
Setting netmask = ...........
do you want to configure the second ethernet card (y/n) ?
If you want to configure your workstation for ”direct connect” through additional network, answer
y [Return]. If you do not want to configure your workstation for ”direct connect”through additional
network, answer n [Return]
If you have answered ”yes”, the next set of questions displays:
Please enter the IP address for eth1 :
Type in the ”direct connect” IP address for your workstation and press [Return] when done.
i.e : 193.1.1.1 [Return]
Please enter the netmask for eth1 :
Type in the appropriate Netmask then press on the [Return] key when done.
i.e : 255.255.255.0 [Return]
The installation process displays lots of messages while starting to install AW files, then the windows
manager is starting and the following Login screen displays
Welcome to <hostname>
login:
Password:
root
*********
D Login as root , and enter the root password (operator)
The Application Install window pops–up. Lots of installation messages are displayed.
The Date & Time windows pop–up.
5-1-3 Common steps
Check and adjust
Time Zone
Date and Time
Date & Time
Check and adjust
Date & Time
Do not select
Time Zone
.......................
.......................
Enable Network Time Protocol
........................
Server
OK
D Set the date and time first, then click on the Time Zone tab to select the appropriate time zone for
your system. When this is done, click on the OK button.
165
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
12 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
The next message pops up, to allow you restoring the site configuration (if applicable)
Do you want to restore the configuration from a cdrom ? (y/n)
D CASE1: If available, insert the AW Site Configuration cdrom and type : y [Enter]
The following Warning message may be displayed as you are installing a new station:
WARNING: The licenseId of this station and the one where the backup was
created are not the same!
Do you really want to restore the configuration ? (y/n) ? y [Enter]
restoring password....
The Site configuration parameters will be extracted from the Configuration Cdrom, and copied into the
”Prefs” and ”UserPrefs”directories, before being automatically reinstalled.
D CASE 2: If the Site Configuration cdrom is not available, your should type:
Do you want to restore the configuration from a cdrom ?(y/n) n [Enter]
You will get the next set of questions
Application Install
...........................................................
Please enter the software Key for AW product : [00000000] xxxxxx [Enter]
where xxxxx is the Licence key for your AW system
–––> To activate the key, you will have to restart AW
Which language do you want for AW software ?
(e)nglish, (f)rench, (g)erman, (i)talian, (p)ortuguese, (s)panish :
[english] XX [Enter]
choose the language for the AW application (default is english)
Installing links for language and monitor dependent files...
–––> To activate this setting, you will have to logout and restart AW
How many monitors are plugged on the station ? (1 or 2) (= 1L1 or 2L1)
1 or 2 [Enter]
Installing links for language and monitor dependent files...
–––> To activate this setting, you will have to reboot the station
restoring data .....
Lots of messages are displayed during the software installation.
Do not mind messages like ” xxxx A BAD SERVICE” which are ”normal error” messages.
License registered
Please press <Enter>
D Press on the [Enter] key to accept.
The system reboots.
The CDROM is ejected. Remove it from the drive. The installation is now complete.
Note:
You can review the installation logfiles later by typing the command:
more /export/home/install.log [Enter]
166
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
5-2
PART 2: Start the CSD tool.
Dicom MOD drive option:
If your site has the external Dicom MOD drive option, you must turn it on now, and reboot the
workstation prior to perform the next steps.
D Start AW application :
Login : sdc [Return]
Password: adw4.4 [Return]
D Launch the Common Service Desktop from the User Interface, Admin / Service Tools or from the
Root Menu / Service Tools.
OR
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Display Configuration
Save Configuration
Service Tools
AW Administration
Command Window
Recover Database
Install package
Service Tools
Restart AW
EA3 Configuration
Exit AW
Note:
Refer to Job Card IST002 for more details on the configuration steps.
The Common Service Desktop displays within the Mozilla navigator web page
5-2-1 Start the Configuration menu
D Click on the Configuration button.
The Configuration menu displays
Click on Perform full configuration, in order to check that all the configuration parameters necessary
to complete your system installation have been properly reinstalled.
As this is your first entry into the Configuration menu, you will be prompted to type in the Root
password. The following window pops–up:
D Click into the password field to select, and type in the root password
operator [Return]
The Configure Site Parameters menu pops–up allowing you to check/configure the following
parameters:
– AW software license key
– User Interface language
167
INSTALLATION
13 of 16
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
14 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
– Monitors configuration (1 or 2 monitors)
– Monitors type (LCD or CRT monitors)
– Serial number of the workstation
– GE System ID of the workstation
– GE System Order number
– Hospital name
– Support phone number
– Sales phone number
– Remote Node control
– Autodelete activity and parameters
– Autolock activity and parameters
– Screen Saver activity and parameters
– Direct Connect selection
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Host Parameters Menu pops–up
D Check that the Remote Hosts parameters have been properly restored.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Routers declaration main Menu pops–up
D The central window of the menu, displays the routing tables (result of the ”netstat –r” command).
Check that the necessary routers for your site have been properly restored.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Dicom Printer Management Menu pops–up
D Check that the Dicom Printers parameters have been properly restored.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
168
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
47
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Postscript Printer Management Menu pops–up
D Check that the Postscript Printers parameters have been properly restored.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Dicom MOD Installation Menu pops–up
D Check that the Dicom MOD parameters have been properly restored.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Software options installation Menu pops–up
File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help
http://...............................................
O Search
Installing Applications
To install Applications, you have to sit at the console of the AW workstation.
. Use the Easyinstall program. Start it from the Patient List.
. Install all Applications.
For detailed information on each step, refer to the Service Manual.
When all the settings are done, click on Next Step (Perform Full Configuration
mode), or quit the Common Service Desktop if done with the configuration.
Next Step
Note:
The Applications license keys have been restored, but you must reinstall all Applications that
the customer has purchased from their respective Cdroms.
D Install the Advanced applications from their respective Cdroms. Refer to Chapter 1, IST005.
D When done with the Software options installation, click on Next Step to continue.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The HTTP support configuration Menu pops–up
169
INSTALLATION
15 of 16
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
16 of 16
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
D Check that the HTTP support parameters have been properly restored.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The InSite Installation and Configuration menu window displays.
There is no specific CSD based tool at this time, to help you configure Insite. This window is only an
informational window, to let you know what steps should be done.
For more information on the InSite installation/configuration, refer to Chapter 1, Job Card IST008.
D When done with Insite configuration, close the Command window to return to the CSD
configuration menu and click on Next Step to continue.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Add User management menu window displays.
D Check that the Users parameters have been properly restored.
D When you have checked all the desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next
configuration menu.
Note:
DO NOT Restart AW or reboot the workstation at this time.
You should only do this when instructed, at the end of the whole AW configuration.
The Change passwords for sdc, sdc_admin and root menu window displays.
D Check that the sdc and/or sdc_admin passwords have been properly restored.
Note:
The root password is intentionnaly reset to the default ”operator” value.
If necessary, you have to set it again to the desired value.
D When you have checked all desired parameters, click on Next Step button to enter the next menu.
The Installation done information window displays.
5-2-2 Start the Utilities menu
D Click on the Utilities button. The Utilities menu displays.
Check that all utilities configurations have been properly restored. Refer to IST003.
– Check Firewall configuration
– Check Software Download configuration
– Check CCOW option configuration (if applicable)
– Check SoftSwitch option configuration (if applicable)
170
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Now it is time to Restart AW, or to shutdown/reboot the workstation
(if you have installed the Dicom MOD).
D Quit the CSD and select Restart AW from the Root Menu. or reboot the workstation.
Advantage Workstation basic software and Applications software are now reinstalled.
Proceed now with the next step: Job Card IST009: Turnover to customer.
171
INSTALLATION
17 of 16
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
INSTALLATION
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Blank page.
48
172
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Time: 0 h 30 min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 2
SUPPLIES
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION Dicom images on Demo Exams media set (CD–rom / DVD–rom).
2
TOOLS REQUIRED
None.
3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None.
4
PREREQUISITES
1. Advantage Workstation software is loaded and operational.
2. Enough free disk space is available to install the demo exams. Verify this by:
– Logging in as sdc:
<hostname> console login: sdc [Return]
Password: adw4.4 [Return]
– Opening a command window from the Admin menu and typing in:
df –k /export/home1 [Return]
which should display a line like this:
Filesystem
kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on
/dev/md/dsk... xxxx
xxx
xxx
xx%
/export/home1
The value under the column ”avail” must be larger than 650000 if you want to install all the
exams contained in one Cdrom. If it is not, check with your customer, to see what images can
be removed, from the Patient list, until the free disk space is larger than 650000.
5
INSTALLATION OF DICOM DEMO EXAMS FROM THE DEMO EXAMS
MEDIAS SET
Since the Demo exams medias (CD–rom or DVD–rom) are Dicom medias, you can use AW
Application to extract the images and install them into the database.
Therefore they can be installed as any other Dicom Cdrom media.
D Login as sdc to start AW Application if not done yet.
D Insert the desired Demo exams DICOM media into the DVD/CD drive.
173
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 012 – Advantage Workstation Demo Exams Reinstallation
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
INSTALLATION
JOB CARD IST 012 – Advantage Workstation Demo Exams Reinstallation
2 of 2
D Wait for a few seconds then click on the DVD/CD icon, in the Hosts window of the Patient List
(Browser).
The DVD/CD Browser pops up displaying the list of demo exams stored on the Demo Exams media.
D Select (highlight) the exam(s) or image(s) you wish to import to the AW database, then drag & drop
with the left button of the mouse into the brown icon labelled with the workstation’s hostname.
The exam(s) start loading from the Demo Exams media and get declared into the database.
Once the exam(s) is(are) installed, you can select more exams to import to your AW, or click on the
Close button to exit from the Archive Cdrom Browser.
D To eject the Demo Exams media, click on the bottom arrow of the DVD/CD icon and select Detach.
49
174
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
CHAPTER 2 – UPGRADES
1
OVERVIEW
Note:
It is NO LONGER possible to restore User Preferences and setup from AW3.1 or AW4.0
upgrades, as the parameters are now too different to be usable.
1-1
For 2nd monitor upgrade, refer to Chapter 8 section 2.
1-2
For additional memory upgrade, refer to Chapter 8 section 3.
2
TOOLS REQUIRED
If your customer requests that you transfer patient data from old to the new workstation, you will need
the following, or equivalent tool:
2212538 : RJ45 network cross–over cable (red cable) : Length = 4.5 meters
(also called DGW / AW cable)
3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
UPGRADES MUST BE DONE BY PROPERLY TRAINED SERVICE ENGINEERS.
4
PREREQUISITES
WARNING
OLD SYSTEMS WHICH ARE DESTINED FOR RECYCLING SHOULD NO LONGER
BE USED AS ADVANTAGE WINDOWS SYSTEMS, AND SINCE PATIENTS DATA IS
CONFIDENTIAL, YOU ARE REQUESTED TO ERASE THESE FILES FROM YOUR
OLD SYSTEM BEFORE RETURNING IT TO THE RECYCLING CENTER. PLEASE
FOLLOW CAREFULLY THE GIVEN INSTRUCTIONS.
Before you start, make sure that the following information is available, to install your new system.
Refer to your old hardware Service Manual if you do not know how to get this information.
D Hostname of the workstation.
D Internet Protocol address of the workstation.
D Netmask to be given to the workstation if applicable. Consult your Network Administrator.
D Time Zone.
D Hospital name.
D Hosts file (other hosts connected on the network).
D Routing tables to access other networks.
175
UPGRADE
This chapter describes the various upgrade procedures from AW1.2, AW2.0, AW3.1, AW4.0,
AW4.1(P), AW4.2(P) and AW4.3 to AW4.4 release
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Also warn the customer to store on MOD or any other archive system, the images they do not want to
loose, as well as files they could have loaded on the workstation.
5
PATIENT IMAGE RESTORE PROCEDURE
The following only concerns hardware upgrades (workstation swap)
UPGRADE
Prior to proceed with the workstation swap, you should make sure with your customer that they
have already saved all patient data, and that you can erase all patient images from the hard disks
of the old workstation, before uninstalling it.
If this has not been done and that your customer requires that you transfer the patient data from the
old to the new workstation, make sure with them that you can delete as much useless patient data
as possible, before proceeding with the image transfer
Note:
If you have a small amount of images to save (e.g., 100 images), you can save them on a
CD–R if available or push them to another workstation on the network (e.g., a PACS unit).
The time to restore Patient images depends on the number of images you want to push from the old
station to the new AW station, and also the network configuration you will use.
The network transfer speed can be increased by 4 between a peer to peer connection and the
hospital network connection.
The figures given in example below will help you to determine the images transfer time
based on a peer to peer connection as well as the number of images. If you plan to use the hospital
network, it will multiply the images transfer time by four.
Configuration used : AW4.0 Ultra 60 (2x 450Mhz ; 2 x 19Gb)
The Peer To Peer transfer speed that we have measured in the lab for this configuration is about
364 000 Kb/mn.
5-1
Network images transfer time calculation for a Peer To Peer Connection
On your old workstation:
D Check the used disk space on images database filesystem (see example for an AW4.0)
df –k [Return]
Filesystem
/proc
/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s0
fd
/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s1
swap
/dev/md/dsk/d0
/dev/md/dsk/d1
kbytes
0
819032
0
601592
1423048
29231949
1590073
used
avail
capacity
Mounted on
0
0
0%
/proc
530184
231516
70%
/
0
0
0%
/dev/fd
458502
82931
85%
/export/home
52872
1370176
4%
/tmp
25235228
3412083
89%
/export/home1
12689
1545583
1%
/export/cdr
Time Transfer Calculation for images at 364 000 Kb transfer speed:
Take the ”used” value of /export/home1 and divide by the transfer speed:
Example:
25235228 / 364000 = 69 minutes 30 seconds
Note:
To this time which only represents the network transfer time, you must add the Database
declaration time which depends on the type of image (the smaller the images are, the more
you can have on your disks, and the longer database declaration time will take).
176
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
5-2
sm 5178823-100
Images transfer procedure
EXAMPLE : Add ”1” to the last digit of the old station’s IP address:
The IP address of old workstation was 3.45.12.135 (class A network), use addres 3.45.12.136 for the
old workstation.
The IP address of old workstation was 90.135.22.24 (class B network), use addres 90.135.22.25 for
the old workstation.
The IP address of old workstation was 192.9.100.241 (class C network), use addres 192.9.100.241 for
the old workstation.
OLD WORKSTATION
You have used old workstation’s
address and hostname
for new workstation
NEW AW4.4
WORKSTATION
IP = 192.9.100.241
Netmask =255.255.255.0
Hostname = AW01
IP = 192.9.100.241
Netmask =255.255.255.0
Hostname = AW01
OLD WORKSTATION
run: /usr/sbin/sys–unconfig (SunOs)
run: /export/home/sdc/scripts/sys–reconfig (Linux)
IP = 192.9.100.242
Add ”1” to IP address last digit
Netmask =255.255.255.0
Add ”old” to the hostname
Hostname = AW01–old
On the old workstation side:
Your old workstation MUST be disconnected from the Hospital network and reconfigured.
1. Run the sys–unconfig script to change Hostname and IP address:
su – root [Return]
Enter root password: operator [Return]
/usr/sbin/sys–unconfig [Return] (Unix SunOs workstations)
/export/home/sdc/scripts/sys–reconfig [Return] (linux workstation)
The workstation shutdowns
2. Reboot workstation
3. Change IP address to ”+1 address” and hostname to ”hostname–old”
4. Use the same netmask and the same Timezone as before.
177
OR
UPGRADE
As this is an upgrade case, you have probably been asked to use the IP address and Hostname of
your old workstation for the new one.
Therefore, you must determine a similar address and another hostname for the old workstation, in
order to do the image transfer.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
On the new workstation side:
5. If you had connected your new AW to the Hospital network, disconnect it now.
It is not necessary to shutdown the workstation.
6. Connect both workstations together through the cross–over (red) cable.
NEW AW4.4
WORKSTATION
UPGRADE
IP = 192.9.100.242
Netmask =255.255.255.0
Hostname = AW01–old
XW8200 REAR VIEW
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
OLD WORKSTATION
Ethernet port
eth1
DO NOT USE
eth0
RJ45 cross–over cable
IP = 192.9.100.241
Netmask =255.255.255.0
Hostname = AW01
2212538 : RJ45 network cross–over cable (red cable) : Length = 4.5 meters
2215029–5: RJ45 network cross–over cable (red cable) : Length = 50 meters
On the old workstation side:
7. Start AW application
8. Enter the Network Manager and declare your new AW4.4 as a Dicom3.0 host. Save and quit.
9. Select the list of Patients you want to push to your new AW station, then drag selected Patients list
and drop it to the icon representing the new AW4.4.
10. Make sure the transfer starts correctly, before proceeding with the next configuration steps on your
new AW station.
178
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
6
sm 5178823-100
UPGRADE GUIDELINES
AW2.0 upgrade
consists on a complete swap of the workstation and its external 2.1 GB hard disk for images and
additional 2.1 GB hard disk option (if applicable).
– The Pioneer MOD option is not supported on AW4.4.
– The DASM Filming Interface is not supported on AW4.4.
AW3.1 upgrade
consists on a complete swap of the workstation.
– Dicom MOD option (Maxoptix) can be reinstalled if T5 2600 * series, Firmware 4.5.
– The Pioneer MOD option is not supported on AW4.4.
– The DASM Filming Interface is not supported on AW4.4.
– Do not reinstall the CD–R and/or the Multipack storage disks option.
AW4.0 upgrade
consists on a hardware and software upgrade.
– Dicom MOD option (Maxoptix) can be reinstalled if T5 2600 * series, Firmware 4.5.
– The Pioneer MOD option is not supported on AW4.4.
– The DASM Filming Interface is not supported on AW4.4.
– Do not reinstall the CD–R and/or the Multipack Storage disks option (from AW3.1 Ultra60).
Note:
Preferences and setups can NO LONGER be reinstalled from the AW3.1 and AW4.0 to the
new AW4.4, as parameters are now much too different.
AW4.1 / AW4.1 P/ AW4.2 upgrade
HP X4000 and HP XW8000 are not 64 bits compatible.
Upgrade cosnists on a hardware and software upgrade.
AW4.2P /AW4.3 upgrade
AW4.2P or AW4.3 run on HP XW8200 platform which is 64 bits compatible:
Upgrade consists on a complete software upgrade (Load From Cold).
User Preferences and setups, Site parameters (remote hosts, etc ...) can be reinstalled.
Summarized guidelines:
D Save Site parameters as instructed by the older AW type Service manual.
For AW4.1s, AW4.2s and AW4.3 save configuration parameters on Cdrom, before
de–installing your old system.
D Save images on MOD or CD–R if applicable or push them to another workstation on the network.
If necessary, refer to procedure described in Section 5 for image transfer to new workstation.
D Proceed to Patient’s Image Data files deletion (see Section 7).
D Unpack the new hardware, check that you do not miss anything and read the installation
instructions described in this manual, Chapter 1 Job Card IST 001.
179
UPGRADE
AW1.2 upgrade
consists on a complete swap of the workstation and its additional 1.05 GB hard disk option.
– The Pioneer MOD option is not supported on AW4.4.
– The DASM Filming Interface is not supported AW4.4.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
D Shutdown the old workstation and turn it off. Turn off the hardware peripheral(s).
D Disconnect optional peripheral(s) (i.e. MOD) that you will have to reinstall and set them aside.
D Disconnect Mouse, Keyboard, Monitor, CPU box, 1.05 GB or 2.1 GB external hard disks and store
them with their cables in the new hardware shipping boxes.
D Install the new hardware and load the software as defined in Chapter 1 of this manual.
D Install the site parameters, Advanced Applications software packages, and Insite connectivity (if
applicable). Refer to Chapter 1 of this manual.
UPGRADE
D Install and/or preload all or part of the Applications DVD collector set. Refer to chapter 1, IST005.
D Check installation before turnover to customer (Chapter 1 IST 009).
D Proceed with old hardware removal and shipping (see Section 8).
7
OLD SYSTEM, IMAGE FILES DELETION
CAUTION
Before proceeding with file deletion of your old hardware, make sure that you
have saved all necessary files to install the new hardware.
Also make sure that the customers have saved their own files.
This should be done only for swapped workstations, as you must return them to the Recycling Center
of your area.
1. Login as root
<machine_name console login : root [Return]
password : operator [Return]
2. Delete AW and Image data files
/bin/rm –r /export/home1/* [Return]
/bin/rm –r /export/home2/* [Return]
This will erase both image files /export/home1, /export/home2 (if applicable) image files.
The procedure can take up to 30 minutes depending on the number of images stored on the disks
and the optionnal external image disk(s).
3. When this is done, return to Section 6 to continue the upgrade procedure.
8
OLD HARDWARE RETURN PROCESS
Use the shipping boxes of your new hardware to pack the parts you are returning.
Hardware parts to return are:
D Workstation CPU box + power cord.
D Color monitor + video cable + power cord.
D Keyboard + cable and Mouse + pad.
D AW4.0 External CD–R drive + disk, Multipack Storage option (if applicable).
D AW3.1 External CD–R drive + disk, Multipack Storage option (if applicable).
D AW1.2 External 1.05 GB Hard disk option (if applicable)
180
OR
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
D AW2.0 external 2.1 GB standard Hard disk (and external 2.1 GB HD option if applicable).
WARNING
8-1
THE RETURNED EQUIPMENT IS DESTINED FOR RECYCLING! DO NOT RETAIN
ANY PART OF IT! ALL MISSING PARTS WILL BE CHARGED!
Return Procedure for Americas
Note:
Prior to returning the equipment, contact the GE Healthcare Recycling Center to notify them
of your equipment shipment. Tel : 1 414 563 1000.
Note:
Be sure to write the SO number on the outside of the equipment box so that the Recycling
Center can track the returns.
Return old material and Old System Configuration Form located at the beginning of this manual to:
GE Healthcare RR
ATTN: HIPAA Drive area
7624 South 10th Street
Oak Creek , WI 53154
USA
Tel. 1 414 563 1000
8-2
Return Procedure for ASIA
Use the shipping boxes of new equipment to return old material.
Return old material and Old System Configuration Form located at the beginning of this manual to:
1. Return procedure for Korea
Samsung GE Medical Ssystems
Mr Jae Young Cho (K0125)
65–1 Sangdaewong–dong, Chungwong–ku
Sungnam–si, Kyunggi–do
KOREA 462–120
2. Return procedure for Australia / New Zealand
GE Medical Systems,
Attn: Max Cardew
Unit 6, 13 Lord Street,
Bontany, NSW 2019
Sydney, AUSTRALIA
3. Return procedure for GEYMS
Please contact your Regional Service Head Quarters, to get instructions for returning Old
Systems
4. Return procedure for East Asia countries
GE Pacific PTE Ltd
Attn: Bryan Heaney
298 Tiong Bahru Road, 15–01/06
Central Plaza, SINGAPORE 168730
181
UPGRADE
Use the shipping boxes of new equipment to return old material.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
5. Return procedure for other GEMS–A countries.
Please contact your Regional Service Head Quarters, to get instructions for returning Old Systems
8-3
Return Procedure for Europe
UPGRADE
Use the shipping boxes of new equipment to return old material.
Return old material and Old System Configuration Form located at the beginning of this manual to:
LOGIC LINE OPERATIONS
CENTRE DE RECYCLAGE
ZA La Remise
Route de Corbeil, BP 111
91004 Evry–Lisses, FRANCE
If you are sending from the Region France, ship by the usual Spare Parts return process:
(Sernam – Megastore Evry)
If you are sending from other Regions, use the shuttles to return the Spare Parts. Regional
Distribution point or Local depots:
Antwerpen – Frankfurt – London – Madrid – Milano
Athina – Kobenhavn – Istanbul – Kriens – Lisboa – Mockba – Napoli – Stockholm – Wien
Transport costs will be charged by the ”Recycling Center”. Send the invoice to:
BUC, Compta fournisseur, Ref: Recyclage
9
RESTORE CAPABILITY PROCEDURE FOR AW3.1/AW4.0
Note:
Preferences and setups can NO LONGER be reinstalled from the AW3.1 and AW4.0 to the
new AW4.3, as parameters are now much too different.
10
RESTORE CAPABILITY PROCEDURE FOR AW4.1’S / AW4.2’S / AW4.3
All Customer presets, shared protocols, Site parameters can be restored.
Insert the AW4.1 / 4.1P / AW4.2 / AW4.2P Site Configuration Cdrom
The only limitation is for the hardware dependant parameters, such as License keys. As they depend
on the LicenseId of your machine, they will have to be manually changed when upgrading an X4000
or XW8000 to an XW8200 or XW8400 (hardware swap).
Software only upgrades from AW4.1 / AW4.2 /AW4.3 can restore all parameters, except for the
InSite/iLinq configuration.
Note:
If you had changed the root password from the default operator password, it will not be
restored for safety reasons, and the default root password is reloaded.
So you will have to change it again after the upgrade.
Note:
Also mind that, if the configuration has been restored from an AW4.1 or 4.2 system, the
”adw4.4” password will be overwritten by the current password given to the workstation.
So you will first have to login with this password, then change it back, either to ”adw4.4” or to
any other suitable password for your site.
182
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
CHAPTER 3 – COMMON PROCEDURES
1
OVERVIEW
In this chapter, procedures are described that are commonly used with Advantage Workstation.
In the text, characters to be entered on the keyboard are shown, following the appropriate system
prompt, in bold type: e.g.: logout.
Enter the characters exactly as shown; [Return] indicates confirmation by pressing the “ENTER” or
“RETURN” key.
As used in the following sections,
”local” means ”physically in front of” the AW workstation console, while
”remote” means electronically connected through the network to the workstation.
2
COMMON PROCEDURES
2-1
Basic LINUX Procedures
2-1-1 Boot Advantage Workstation
Note:
Make sure all peripheral devices are powered on!
D Boot station and check presence of all internal and external powered–on peripherals:
D Press on the Reset button, and enter the BIOS setup menu by pressing on the <F10> key.
D Make sure the Main tab is selected and change the Reset configuration Data from its default
value [No], to [Yes], following the instructions given in the setup menu.
This should be done mainly in case of hardware peripheral change, memory upgrade and/or if the
boot sequence did not complete for any reason, in order to force the system to reset.
Note that the consecutive boot up will take longer, time for the system to scan for new hardware
devices.
D Press on the <Esc> key to quit, and confirm by pressing [Enter],to exit the BIOS setting menu.
The system now resets and start to boot up again.
2-1-2 Login as sdc on Advantage Workstation (windowing system not running)
D If ”<hostname> console login:”
is not displayed, log out (see 2-1-7).
D Login as sdc:
– <hostname> console login: sdc [Return]
Password: <sdc password>[Return]
(default is adw4.4)
D Advantage Workstation will start up. To shutdown, see 2-3-2.
183
COMMON
PROCEDURES
Expressions (such as prompts, passwords and names) between “<” and “>” characters are those
associated with each specific configuration.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2-1-3 Find out what ‘true’ user you currently are
echo $USER [Return]
The machine will return the user name it is operating under (e.g. root, sdc, insite).
Note:
The user ’insite’ has root privilege. Users may not directly login as either root or insite when
remote. A remote user must first login remotely as ’sdc’, then change it, if necessary.
2-1-4 Become sdc user after successful login as another user
D Make sure you are logged in on ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION.
D Become sdc:
COMMON
PROCEDURES
– su – sdc [Return]
”su [space] dash [space] sdc”
Password: <sdc password> [Return] (default is adw4.4)
2-1-5 Become root user after successful login as another user (locally or remote)
D Make sure you are logged in on ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION.
D Become root:
– su – root [Return] ”su [space] dash [space] root”
Password: <root password>[Return] (default is operator)
2-1-6 Shutdown System –– from Login Prompt
D Login as root
– login: root [Return]
Password: <root password>[Return]
(default is operator)
D From the Root environment windows system, open a Term window
D In the Term window, type in:
– init 0 [Return]
D
Optional –– Wait for shutdown completion and turn power OFF to the workstation, monitor(s), and
peripherals.
2-1-7 Logout Procedure
D Click on the Logout button, or select Exit AW from the Root menu, Service Tools.
2-1-8 Login as root on Advantage Workstation (windowing system not running)
D If the Login window is not accessible, you must log out first (see 2-1-7).
D Login as root:
– Login: root [Return]
Password: <root password> [Return] (default is operator)
184
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2-1-9 Remote Login to Advantage Workstation from a Remote Station (General Case)
D You must know the ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION’s Internet address. If you don’t, get it from the
AW itself (see 2-1-12).
D Telnet to the ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION from a remote station:
– <remote–prompt> telnet <AW Internet address> [Return]
i.e : telnet 3.45.12.135 [Return]
2-1-10 Remote Login as root on Advantage Workstation (from a Remote Station)
Direct remote login as root is not allowed. You must first remote log as sdc, then switch user to root.
D Telnet to ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION from a remote station (see 2-1-9).
D At telnet login prompt, you must firstly login as sdc:
login: sdc [Return]
Password: adw4.4 [Return]
(sdc default password)
D Then become super (root) user (see 2-1-5)
2-1-11 Remote Login as sdc on Advantage Workstation (from a Remote Station)
D Telnet to ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION from a remote station (see 2-1-9).
D At telnet login prompt, login as sdc:
login: sdc [Return]
Password: adw4.4 [Return]
(sdc default password)
2-1-12 Find the Internet, Ethernet, and Broadcast Address, Netmask Value and Hostname
D Open a Command Window and switch User to root (see 2–1–5)
D To get the hostname, at the prompt type in:
– hostname [Return]
D To get more informations, at the prompt type in:
– About all Ethernet controllers: ifconfig –a [Return]
– About the main Ethernet controller (eth0): ifconfig eth0 [Return]
(see example hereafter)
185
COMMON
PROCEDURES
D If telnet succeeds, the following lines display, and you get the “telnet login prompt”:
Trying <AW Internet address> ...
Connected to <AW Internet address>.
Escape character is ’^]’.
<...other system messages...>
login: <username> [Return]
Password: <password> [Return]
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
eth0
Where
Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:E0:81:00:54:F8
inet addr:3.249.12.149 Bcast:3.255.255.255 Mask:255.0.0.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:90056 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:36555 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:54610697 (52.0 Mb) TX bytes:7398817 (7.0 Mb)
Interrupt:21 Base address:0xf000
inet is the Internet Protocol (IP) address
Mask is the host’s netmask value (in hex)
HWaddr is the Ethernet Address
Bcast is the Broadcast Address
COMMON
PROCEDURES
2-1-13 Shutdown and Reboot Advantage Workstation Locally or Remotely from the
Command Line
D Make sure you are logged in as root on ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION.
D Shutdown and Reboot:
– init 6 [Return]
Note:
If remote login as root on ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION failed, remote reset is impossible.
Reset is then only possible locally.
2-1-14 Shutdown and Reboot Advantage Workstation Locally (i.e. no input from keyboard)
D Reset the workstation
– Press on the Reset button, or cycle power off and on to workstation.
USE ONLY IN CASE OF SYSTEM HANG.
CAN CAUSE LOSS OF DATA.
Database recovery process must be necessary if used while the Database was active.
(See 2–6 for Recover Database)
2-1-15 Shutdown and Reboot Advantage Workstation Locally –– Workstation “Hard
Blocked”
D Turn monitor and computer off.
D Wait about 30 seconds.
D Make sure other peripherals are powered on. Turn monitor and computer on.
D The system will bootup.
2-1-16 Changing the ”USER” Password
CAUTION
DO NOT CHANGE THE ”insite”, ”sdc”, OR ”root” PASSWORD WITHOUT
NOTIFYING YOUR SUPPORT CENTER (OLC [ON–LINE CENTER], OLC–E
[EUROPEAN SUPPORT CENTER], OLC–A [ASIAN SUPPORT CENTER]).
186
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
D Properly login as sdc, then switch user to root
– su – root [Return]
”su [space] dash [space] root”
Password: <root password> [Return] (default is operator)
D Run the install.passwords script
– cd /export/home/sdc/install [Return]
./install.passwords [Return]
Enter the name of the user whose password must be changed
– root
– sdc_admin (administrator)
sdc
or type q to quit
Select the user root, sdc or sdc_admin:
Changing password for user ”user” (where ”user” = root , sdc, or sdc_adminstrator)
New password : xxxxxxxx [Return]
Retype new password : xxxxxxxx [Return]
passwd : all authentification tokens updated successfully
Note:
MAKE SURE THAT THE CAPS–LOCK KEY IS NOT ENGAGED BEFORE
ENTERING THE PASSWORD.
If you get a message like ...
BAD PASSWORD : it (is based on) (is too short) (does not contain) ..
.... it is just a WARNING message to let you know that your choice for the new password is
not as secure as it should be. However, your password will be taken into account after typing
it a second time.
D Write the new password on the AW CONFIGURATION FORM (front of this manual).
2-1-17 Line Commands for Controlling Printer (Filming) Queues
D See Chapter 7, Filming, section 3-2.
2-1-18 Changing the Host Name
D Unconfigure the Advantage Workstation (See 2-1-23).
2-1-19 Host Identification (license ID)
CAUTION
The hostid command, formerly used for UNIX workstations must no longer be
used to calculate the keys !!!! The hostid command only shows the numeric
identifier of the hardware platform which is the same for all workstations.
i.e : HP XW8200 workstation : hostid = 7f0100
The license ID number is a unique number that is hard coded in your workstation.
The A.W software protection key is factory determined from this number.
To know the License ID of your workstation, type in:
– /export/home/sdc/bin/licenseId [Return]
(capital I)
2-1-20 Using the ”man” Command
On–line information about Linux commands and their usage may be obtained by using the man
command. For example, to find out more about using vi, type:
187
COMMON
PROCEDURES
WARNING
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
– Switch user to root
su – root [Return]
Enter root password
– /usr/bin/man vi [Return]
(type q to exit when done)
To find out more about using the man pages, type in:
– /usr/bin/man man [Return]
(type q to exit when done)
2-1-21 Routing Tables
D To view the routing tables and usage
netstat –r [Return]
COMMON
PROCEDURES
i. e :
Kernel IP routing table
Destination Gateway
Genmask
3.0.0.0
*
255.0.0.0
U
127.0.0.0
*
255.0.0.0
U
Flags MSS Window irtt Iface
40 0
0 eth0
40 0
0 lo
D Editing the Routing table (see Chapter 9 for more information).
– Login as root
– Change to the /etc/rc5.d directory, create a S93route script with the vi editor,
(see Networking chapter for examples) and add the following line:
route add
–net
X.X.X.X
gw
Destination
network or host
Y.Y.Y.Y
1st gateway to
pass through
dev
eth0
ethernet
interface
metric
Z
Number of
gateways also
called “metric hop
i.e : route add –net 3.45.0.0 netmask 255.255.0.0 dev eth0[Return]
i.e : route add –host 3.45.10.234 gw 3.249.13.245 metric 2[Return]
– Reboot the workstation (see 2-1-1).
D to delete a route
route del –net
192.9.10.0
Network to delete
i.e : route del –net 3.45.0.0 [Return]
i.e : route del –host 3.45.10.234 [Return]
– Reboot the workstation (see 2-1-1).
2-1-22 Netmasks
Note:
No manual edit for changing the Netmask.
Use the ”sys–reconfig” utility (2–1–23) to change hostname, IP address and netmask, or
Refer to the Networking chapter for specific examples.
No longer use the sys–unconfig utility from UNIX systems !!!!!
188
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
D Reboot the workstation (see 2-1-1).
2-1-23 Reconfiguring the Advantage Workstation (Removing all Current Hostname,
Timezone, Network, and Addressing Information)
D Login as root or switch User to root.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE the /usr/sbin/sys–unconfig utility, which may lead to the LINUX
reconfiguration process. !!! USE the sys–reconfig script INSTEAD !!!
D Run the sys–reconfig script:
WARNING : THIS SCRIPT WILL SHUTDOWN THE STATION AND LET YOU MODIFY
THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS DURING THE NEXT REBOOT:
– hostname
– IP address
– subnet mask
– timezone
– date and time
Do you want to continue (y/n) ? y [Return]
Done.
Do you want to shutdown the station now? (y/n) y [Return]
D The system automatically performs a shutdown.
When the system displays the message Power down , you can press on the Reset button to
reboot.
D Go to Job Card IST 001, Base System Hardware Installation and Configuration.
Note:
You may also use the ”dateconfig” command, if you simply need to change date/time
parameters:
dateconfig [Return]
The Date/Time Properties window pops–up allowing to modify and save the date/time.
2-1-24 Changing the Internet Address
Note:
Unconfigure the AW as shown above, if not familiar with the vi editor!
D Switch User to root, to obtain write access before editing the ”ifcg–eth0” file.
D Using the vi editor, change the internet address in: /etc/sysconfig/network–scripts/ifcg–eth0
Do not change the host name !!!!
D Shutdown and reboot the workstation (see 2-1-6).
2-1-25 File Systems Checks –– Windowing System not Running
D Login as root.
D Run the ”fsck” command manually
fsck /dev/sda1 [Return]
to check Slice 1 corresponding to ”/boot” file system for example.
189
COMMON
PROCEDURES
– /export/home/sdc/scripts/sys–reconfig [Return]
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
Note:
sm 5178823-100
You may first use the df –k command to check for the name of the partitions.
2-1-26 Check for SCSI Devices Recognized by the Workstation during Boot
D Switch User to root.
COMMON
PROCEDURES
D Display the SCSI perpherials recognized by the workstation:
(the example below is for the XW8200 station)
/bin/dmesg | grep SCSI [Return]
SCSI subsystem initialized
Fusion MPT SCSI Host driver 3.01.09
Type:
Optical Device
ANSI SCSI revision:
SCSI device sda: 1163337 512–byte hdwr sectors (596 MB)
SCSI device sda: drive cache: write through
Type:
Direct–Access
ANSI SCSI revision:
SCSI device sdb: 71132960 512–byte hdwr sectors (36420 MB)
SCSI device sdb: drive cache: write back
Type:
Direct–Access
ANSI SCSI revision:
SCSI device sdc: 143374738 512–byte hdwr sectors (73408 MB)
SCSI device sdc: drive cache: write back
Type:
Direct–Access
ANSI SCSI revision:
SCSI device sdd: 143374738 512–byte hdwr sectors (73408 MB)
SCSI device sdd: drive cache: write back
02
03
03
03
Note:
If the peripherals are present (connected and powered ON), and you do not see these
messages, check connections, power, and restart workstation (see 2-1-1)
2-2
Restart Advantage Workstation Application from the Console
2-2-1 Advantage Workstation OK, no one logged in
D Login as sdc (see 2-1-3).
D If Application is not up within 1 minute, see Troubleshooting chapter.
2-2-2 Advantage Workstation OK, sdc logged in BUT application is not running
D Select Restart AW from the Exit Menu.
D If Application is not up within 5 minutes, see Troubleshooting chapter.
2-2-3 Advantage Workstation OK, someone else logged in
D Logout (see 2-1-7).
D Login as sdc (see 2-1-3).
D If Application is not up within 1 minute, see Troubleshooting chapter.
2-3
Shutdown Advantage Workstation
2-3-1 Windowing system not running –– login prompt displayed
D See 2-1-6.
190
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2-3-2 Advantage Workstation running –– Normal Shutdown (including computer shutdown)
D Place cursor of the mouse over the SYSTEM icon on the Browser.
D Select Shutdown button on the Browser, and click left mouse button.
D Place cursor over Yes push button in pop–up messsage, and click left mouse button.
D Wait until shutdown has completed.
D Optional – turn monitor, computer, and external SCSI devices off.
2-3-3 Advantage Workstation running –– Stop application only
D Place cursor over LOGOUT icon on the Browser, and click left mouse button.
2-3-4 Advantage Workstation not running and Windowing system running
D Exit the program you are using, shutdown from login prompt (see 2-1-6).
D If that fails, or unknown, kill windowing system (see 2-3-6).
–OR–
–OR–
D Move the mouse outside of all the windows (into the background).
D Press a mouse button to get the Root menu, scroll to Service Tools, then to Logout.
D Release the mouse button. The windowing system stops, a login prompt will display.
2-3-5 AW not running and windowing system running ––– Kill Application locally
D Open Console window (double click on CONSOLE icon), place the cursor inside the new window.
D Run the following script:
– /export/home/sdc/scripts/sdcapp.csh –k [Return]
D If this failed (Advantage Workstation still running), kill windowing system (see 2-3-6).
2-3-6 AW application up, down or blocked and Windowing system blocked ––– Kill
Windowing System remotely
D From a remote station, login as sdc on ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION.
If this is impossible, reboot ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION locally.
D If AW application is up, run the sdcapp.csh –k script (see 2-3-5).
D If AW application is down, become user root (see 2-1-5).
Shutdown and reboot the workstation :
init 6 [Return]
Wait for boot completion before login again.
D If remote reboot is impossible, reset the ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION locally (see 2-1-13).
191
COMMON
PROCEDURES
D Release the mouse button. Advantage Workstation will stop, a login prompt will display.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
2-4
sm 5178823-100
Advantage Workstation and Site Configuration
2-4-1 Displaying or saving Advantage Workstation Site Configuration Information
COMMON
PROCEDURES
The site configuration information can be displayed and/or saved by selecting the Display
Configuration and/or Save Configuration option from the Admin menu.
A pop up window displays information such as O.S version, processor type, internet address, installed
Applications licence keys, etc... relative to your configuration. When running the Save Configuration
process, always accept to format the diskette so it is properly DOS formatted.
2-4-2 Copy text files in DOS format onto a diskette
Copying text files into a DOS formatted diskette can be useful in order to read these files on a PC.
D Open a Command window and switch User to root:
su – root [Return]
”su [space] dash [space] root”
Password: <root password> [Return] (default is operator)
D Insert a blank floppy in write enable mode into the drive and format it
fdformat /dev/fd0 [Return]
Double–sided, 80 tracks, 18 sec/track, Total capacity 1440 kB
Formatting ...done
Verifying ... done
D Build a DOS filesystem on the diskette
mkdosfs /dev/fd0 [Return]
mkdosfs 2.8 (Date)
D Mount the filesystem
mount /mnt/floppy [Return]
D Copy the text file into the Floppy filesystem
i.e : copy the dcslog logfile
cp /export/home/sdc/logfiles/dcslog /mnt/floppy [Return]
D When this is done, unmount the Floppy filesystem
cd [Return]
umount /mnt/floppy
D Manually eject the diskette. You can now read it with your PC
2-4-3 Changing Advantage Workstation Site Configuration Settings
Refer to Job Card IST 002, Site Configuration.
192
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2-4-4 Creating a KICKSTART diskette
This is no longer necessary for AW4.4 platform. Refer to Chapter 4, Job Card TSG008 for details.
2-4-5 Reading Configuration Diskette or USB key Settings
Floppy diskette or USB key are managed the same way for License keys.
If both an USB key with licenses and a Floppy diskette are inserted, USB key will have priority upon
the floppy diskette, so it means that any license on the floppy diskette would not be read in this case.
From an operational Advantage Workstation:
D Insert the Configuration diskette into the drive or the USB key in any of the USB ports.
Allow a few seconds (check LED is no longer blinking) when inserting an USB key, before
attempting to access it.
D Type in:
mount /mnt/floppy [Return]
more /mnt/floppy/config.txt [Return]
<–– read and write down on a sheet of paper, the license key numbers
D Umount the diskette or USB key
umount /mnt/floppy [Return]
D Eject the diskette by pressing on the ejection lever or extract the USB key.
From an operational PC:
D Insert the Configuration diskette into the drive or USB key into USB port.
D Click on MY COMPUTER, then click on 3 1/2 Floppy (A:) or on Removable Disk (X:)
D Double–click on the config.txt file
<–– read and write down on a sheet of paper, the license key numbers
D Eject the diskette by pressing on the ejection lever, or right click on the USB device, to eject it
safely, before extracting the USB key.
2-5
ADOBE ACROBAT Reader Tool
To start the Acrobat Reader tool, open a Command Window from the ROOT Menu and type in
geacroread [Return]
2-6
ADVANTAGE WOKSTATION Database Recovery
Recover the database if the application crashes when opening a series, or when the browser lists do
not match the actual set of images on the disk.
This operation resets the relational database, reads the images from the hard disks, and recreates the
database from scratch.
193
COMMON
PROCEDURES
D Open a Command window and switch User to root:
su – root [Return]
”su [space] dash [space] root”
Password: <root password> [Return] (default is operator)
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
CAUTION
THE DATABASE RECOVERY PROCESS CAN TAKE UP TO 60 MINUTES,
DEPENDING ON THE NUMBER OF IMAGES ON THE DISK(S) OR LONGER IF
EXTERNAL STORAGE DISKS PACK OPTION INSTALLED.
MAKE SURE THAT NOBODY IS USING THE WORKSTATION BEFORE STARTING
”RECOVER DATABASE” REMOTELY.
2-6-1 Recover Database from the Root Menu
Advantage Workstation must be up and running.
If exams have no series, series have no images, or images cannot be displayed or removed, there
probably is some database corruption which has occurred. This problem can occur if the system was
powered off during images receive and database update.
The database can be recovered by selecting the Recover database option from the Services Tools
menu under the Root menu.
To access the Root menu, press <Alt> <F3>
COMMON
PROCEDURES
Note:
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Display Configuration
Command Window
Save Configuration
Recover Database
Service Tools
AW Administration
Install package
Service Tools
Enter the root password when
prompted, and type rebuild
[Return] to start.
Restart AW
EA3 configuration
Exit AW
CAUTION
THE DATABASE RECOVERY PROCESS CAN TAKE UP TO SEVERAL HOURS,
DEPENDING ON THE NUMBER OF IMAGES ON THE DISKS.
MAKE SURE THAT NOBODY IS USING THE WORKSTATION BEFORE STARTING
”RECOVER DATABASE” REMOTELY.
The following message displays :
Do you want to rebuild the database from the images ?
This operation can take a long time.
Please type ’rebuild’ to confirm, or just press <Enter> to quit :
rebuild [Return]
The rolling ball screen saver turns on. There is no possibility to use the system during this time.
If you click on right mouse button, The following message appears:
PLEASE WAIT .......
DATA BASE IS BEING RECONSTRUCTED
194
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
When this is done, restart Browser from the Root Menu.
WARNING
2-7
DURING A RECOVER DATABASE, IMAGES WHICH HAVE FAILED TO BE
REINSTALLED ARE STORED IN THE FAILED_TO_REINSTALL DIRECTORY. YOU
SHOULD AT LEAST CLEAN UP THIS DIRECTORY BUT FIRST, IT IS
RECOMMENDED TO CONTACT YOUR ON LINE CENTER AW SUPPORT WHICH
WILL ASK YOU TO SEND FAILED IMAGES FOR INVESTIGATION.
Using the SMPTE Pattern
This section describes how to display the SMPTE pattern to properly calibrate the monitor.
2-7-1 Displaying the SMPTE pattern.
D Start AW application if it is not currently running.
D The SMPTE pattern is loaded into the browser as an exam with the name of SMPTE Pattern.
D Open the Browser (Patient list), then select SMPTE pattern to display.
Illustration 2 –
SMPTE Test Pattern
195
COMMON
PROCEDURES
D Install the SMPTE pattern (and other test patterns) by selecting Install SMPTE from the Admin
button.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2-7-2 Console Monitor Adjustment Procedure
The console monitor must be properly adjusted for the filmed image to accurately represent the
console monitor displayed image. The following procedure is the recommended setup of the Console
Monitors to achieve a filmed image which accurately represents the monitor displayed images. The
SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) test pattern is used to provide a standard
image.
COMMON
PROCEDURES
There are factors pertaining to console monitor adjustments which will affect the ability of the film to
accurately represent the console monitor displayed images. These factors, the console monitor
contrast and brightness, are adjusted so all the shades of grey are discernible without excessive
brightness under normal viewing ambient lighting. The SMPTE test pattern also enables an easy
check of focus and linearity / geometry of the display.
The final result should make the film image and the console monitor displayed image similar in
appearance. The console monitor window and level may be adjusted for viewing preference, however
the console monitor brightness and contrast should not be changed since the display is optimized for
the video signal input.
D Display SMPTE test pattern on monitor. See Illustration 2 for sample test pattern.
D Window Width control value = 100.
D Window Level control value = 1024.
Note:
To achieve the best results, it is important that this setup procedure be done under the normal
ambient lighting conditions for the console area.
D Locate the contrast and brightness control knobs on the bottom front of the monitor.
D Adjust contrast control of display monitor to extreme minimum contrast (furthermost counter
clockwise position on). No contrast results in a flat density image.
D Adjust brightness control until scanning raster is just perceptible.
D Adjust contrast control such that the brightest part of the image is at a comfortable viewing level.
All shades or grey should be discernible. The two additional areas of the grey scale, which contain
sub–patches with 5% density differences, should also be visible. See Illustration 3, circled
number 6. (i.e. Adjust until viewing of brightest area is comfortable, then adjust to ensure all
shades of grey can be seen).
D Other aspects of display to check (See circled numbers in image on Illustration 3):
– High and low contrast resolution patterns, in both horizontal and vertical directions, must be
discernible. (Numbers 3 and 4).
– In the regions of white and black windows, there should be no smearing or streaking of the
interior rectangle into the surrounding, contrasting region. Windows must appear sharply
defined. (Numbers 1, 2, 5–8)
– Focus may be checked by observing the characters embedded in the image and readjusted if
necessary using the control knob (19’ monitor) or remote control (20’ monitor).
– The size of the 512 pixels square image on the display should measure 7.25” x 7.25”
(18.45 cm x 18.45 cm). The entire display image, including grey scale and patient data, should
be centered in the window frame. (Number 9).
196
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
Schematic Drawing of SMPTE Test Pattern
COMMON
PROCEDURES
Illustration 3 –
sm 5178823-100
2-7-3 Create and Display a Coloured SMPTE Pattern
This can be usefull to check the color rendering of a color printer. In order to create a ”colored’”
SMPTE pattern, proceed with the following steps:
D Install the SMPTE pattern if not done yet (see 2-7-1).
D Start the VIEWER to display the SMPTE pattern.
D Click on the Display Tools button. The Display Tools window pops–up.
D Click on the WW/WL button. The Drag & drop a tool window pops–up.
D Click on the Palette button, then click on the Rainbow button.
D Press the middle button on the mouse and modify the color palette.
When this is done, you can save the coloured SMPTE pattern if you wish to use it again later:
D Select Edit from the Display Tools menu (see above).
D Click on the Save Image button.
197
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
3
ON–LINE DOCUMENTATION
3-1
Access to the Operator’s documentation
COMMON
PROCEDURES
Click on ?. The Operator’s documentation
page displays (on right screen if applicable)
3-2
Access to Service documentation
Click on Admin, Service Docs.
The Service documentation page
displays (on right screen if applicable)
198
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
CHAPTER 4 – TROUBLESHOOTING
1
FOREWORD
The troubleshooting procedures are described in a series of job cards about the different steps,
problems encountered with their corrective actions and useful procedures, when installing and using
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION.
CAUTION
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE HP XW8400 AND XW8200
NOTICE
On–line access to HP Service Manuals and other additional information can be
obtained from the HP documentation Web site at :
http://www.hp.com
type : XW8200 or XW8400 in the ”Search” window
PURPOSE
HP XW8200
SERVICE MANUAL
5124262–100
CHAPTER–PAGE NR
HP XW8400
SERVICE MANUAL
5180567–100
CHAPTER–PAGE NR
SOLVING HARDWARE PROBLEMS
4–86
5–117
POWER LED IS FLASHING
5-111
5–98 / 5–104
POWER–ON SELF–TEST (POST)
UNDERSTANDING THE DIAGNOSTIC LEDS
5-133
5-123
TROUBLESHOOTING WITH THE E–BUZZER
5–112
5–104
HARD DISKS AND CD–RW PROBLEMS
5–118 / 5-130
5-111 / 5-120
CLEARING THE ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD
APPDX G–167
APPDX H-176
POWER SUPPLY TEST
5-115
5–107
SOLVING DISKETTE PROBLEMS
5-117
5–109
SOLVING DISPLAY PROBLEMS
5-120
5–112
SOLVING KEYBOARD AND MOUSE PROBLEMS
–
5–115
SOLVING NETWORK PROBLEMS
–
5–118
SOLVING MEMORY PROBLEMS
–
5–119
199
TROUBLESHOOTING
2
Corrective action should be made by authorized and qualified personnel only.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
TROUBLESHOOTING
3
sm 5178823-100
TROUBLESHOOTING JOB CARDS
JOB CARD NO
PURPOSE
TSG 001
INITIALIZATION PHASE
TSG 002
APPLICATION IS RUNNING
TSG 003
FILES–SYSTEM CHECKS
TSG 004
REFORMATTING AND / OR PARTITIONING DISKS
TSG 005
USING HP ”INSIGHT” DIAGNOSTICS TOOL CDROM
TSG 006
TROUBLESHOOTING PHYSICAL NETWORK PROBLEMS
TSG 007
USING AN USB KEY FOR SERVICE
TSG 008
(OBSOLETE) CREATE A KICKSTART DISKETTE *
TSG 009
LOGFILES INFORMATION
TSG 010
INFORMATION ABOUT RUNNING PROCESSES
TSG 011
COMMON SERVICE DESKTOP
TSG 012
CREATE A FLASH DISKETTE FOR BIOS AND FIRMWARE
* Note:
From the AW4.2_04.10_EXT release, Kickstart diskettes are no longer necessary with the GEHC Linux OS.
AW4.4 runs on the latest GEHC Linux OS and does not require any Kickstart diskette.
200
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD TSG 001 – Initialization Phase
Time: x h xx min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 4
FOREWORD
The troubleshooting procedures describe the various steps the ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION goes
through, before using the application.
PROBLEMS AT POWER ON
SYMPTOMS
ACTIONS
SUSPECT MODULE
Screen remains blank
(Monitor LED is yellow)
– Check electrical and video monitor connections.
– Exchange with another monitor.
– Check color of all LEDs on the CPU box.
Refer to HP Service Manual
Monitor
Video card
CPU
The screen blanks at the
end of the boot
sequence (XW8000)
The boot sequence messages are displayed on the
screen, but at the end of the boot sequence, the
screen blanks. Refer to TSG012 , section 3.
BIOS setup
Blurred video
Poor color
– Adjust the monitor.
– Disconnect for test, the video converter (if
applicable)
– Exchange with another monitor.
– Replace the video cable.
Monitor
Video converter
Frame Buffer Board
Cable
Different color tints on
dual LCD monitors
configuration.
Calibration needs to be done. Order Tool 0216
(Europe) from the Pool of Tools.
LCD Color monitor
Display is reduced to a
small part in the center
of the screen
Pre–requisite: The workstation is turned on and the
monitor is connected. Turn off the screen.
Turn on the screen while keeping the Select 1/2
button depressed.
Push > key to go to Tab7, and press Select1/2.
Push > key to go to Magnifying Glass symbol .
With + or – keys, choose Full , then press Select 1/2
Press Exit twice to save and quit
NEC 1880SX and
1980SXi Color LCD
monitor setup
Screen display is
“twisted”
Re–orient the monitor.
Place the monitor farther away from the MR
scanner, or power transformers.
Adjust the rotation via
monitor controls
Boot sequence hangs
while scanning the SCSI
bus (X4000).
Check the Symbios to make sure the scanning of the
unused SCSI addresses is disabled.
refer to chapter 4, Job card TSG013
Symbios
201
TROUBLESHOOTING
2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 4
JOB CARD TSG 001 – Initialization Phase
3
PROBLEM ENCOUNTERED WHEN BOOTING
SYMPTOMS
ACTIONS
SUSPECT MODULE
– Check that any external peripherals are switched on.
– Check that there is a SCSI terminator on the free
connector of the last peripheral.
– Check SCSI cables.
– Check that you can hear disk drives starting.
– Check the power supply.
– Check devices addressing.
SCSI cables
disk(s)
CPU
Power Supply unit
During boot operation,
Check the Ethernet connection.
message: eth0 no carrier XW8000/8200: Make sure you are connected to the
PCI Ethernet board (and not the Mother board )
Replace the PCI ethernet board
PCI ethernet board
(XW8000/8200)
Problems during the fsck See TSG 003. Check that external MOD drive option
(files system check)
is properly connected and powered up.
disk
O.S
External disk option
Boot does not start and It is possible to force the insertion of the Y video cable
the workstation beeps.
upside down in the Graphics Card connector.
Correctly insert the Y cable into the Graphics card.
XW8200/XW8400
refer to workstation’s
Service Manual.
TROUBLESHOOTING
– SCSI bus is hung
There may be other issues that make the workstation
beep. Refer to the HP Service Manual.
The HP Service Manual is part of the documentation
on the AW software Cdrom.
202
RJ45 (TP) cable
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
3 of 4
JOB CARD TSG 001 – Initialization Phase
4
PROBLEMS ENCOUNTERED DURING THE SESSION (BEFORE LOGIN
AS SDC)
4-1
Run HP Diagnostics Utility for Reliability Diagnosis
Refer to Job Card TSG 005.
4-2
For Disk Problems
See Job Card TSG 004.
4-3
For Problems Encountered Before Booting
Check the BIOS settings. Reinstall default settings if necessary and reboot.
See Chapter 1, IST011 Section 5.1 for entering and setting the BIOS procedure
STEPS AND PROBLEMS ENCOUNTERED AFTER LOGIN AS SDC
SYMPTOMS
ACTIONS
SUSPECT MODULE
“Invalid Software Key for Check the software license key corresponding to the Incorrect or missing
Advantage Workstation.” licenseId number for your workstation. Reenter key software license key.
as shown in Job Card IST 002.
“Initialization of sdc failed. Check the software license key for your workstation. Incorrect or missing
Please retry.”
Reenter key as shown in Job Card IST 002.
software license key.
Check with command:
tail –30 ~sdc/logfiles/
netslog displays a line
like “Soft. Protection
Violation”.
No window opens.
Shutdown workstation.Cycle power to workstation.
Re–load AW software.
See Job Card IST 010
or preferrably reload OS first before reloading AW.
See Job Card IST 011.
X terminal not found.
password refused:
< > login: sdc
Password: <Ret>
Sorry !
Login as root
<prompt> passwd sdc [return]
<prompt> new passwd ? XXXXX [return]
where XXXXX is the right password
/etc/passwd
/etc/shadow
changed.
password refused after
software upgrade:
< > login: sdc
message : Login incorrect
Original sdc password has been restored from the /etc/passwd
Configuration CD after upgrading from previous AW /etc/shadow
product (i.e: AW4.1, AW4.2).
changed.
You must login with old password first, then refer to
chap1, IST002 (password management menu) to
change password.
No ”Starting Advantage
Windows...” message
displayed, system hangs
up.
Shutdown workstation.Cycle power to workstation.
Re–load AW software.
See Job Card IST 010 or preferrably reload OS.
See Job Card IST 011.
203
file
or
was
file
or
was
sdc environment is
corrupted.
TROUBLESHOOTING
5
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
4 of 4
JOB CARD TSG 001 – Initialization Phase
SYMPTOMS
ACTIONS
Screen returns to white,
when the system should
start
the Windows
Manager.
Shutdown workstation.Cycle power to workstation.
Re–load AW software.
See Job Card IST 010 or preferrably reload OS.
See Job Card IST 011.
Network
initialization Login as root,
window remains 2 to 3 run ~sdc/scripts/sdcapp.csh –k [Return]
minutes
until
this then logout from root window menu and log in as sdc.
message
appears
”Initialization of sdc failed.
Please retry”.
Same as above
TROUBLESHOOTING
5-1
SUSPECT MODULE
Window manager
corrupted
is
NETserver
process
remains if
tail
–
30
~sdc/logfiles/netslog
displays a line like “bind:
address already in use”.
Login as root,
DBSserver
process
run ~sdc/scripts/sdcapp.csh –k [Return]
remains if tail
–30
then logout from root window menu and log in as sdc. ~sdc/logfiles/db*log
displays a line like “bind:
address already in use”.
Miscellaneous Problems
SYMPTOMS
ACTIONS
SUSPECT MODULE
Loss of root password:
Proceed with a full software load (OS + AW)
Refer to Job Card IST 011
O.S.
Loss of system files
Proceed with a full software load (OS + AW)
Refer to Job Card IST 011
O.S.
50
204
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD TSG 002 – Application is Running
Time: x h xx min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 8
FOREWORD
The following procedures describe the problems that may occur while ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION
is running.
PROBLEM DESCRIPTIONS AND SUSPECT MODULE
SYMPTOMS
Mouse:
ACTIONS
Reboot workstation then restart Application
Cursor is ”late” with
respect to actual mouse
movements.
Slow
response to clicks on
Check if images are being sent to the workstation.
mouse buttons.
Wait until all images have arrived.
Spread images transfer in time.
SUSPECT MODULE
OS Xserver.
All Clients and all
Servers
processes
within
Advantage
Workstation .
Network overloaded
OS.
Run the E–Diagtools diagnostics from the Cdrom Hardware failure
(refer to TSG005).
Replace CPU box.
System Board.
Mouse:
Clean the mouse. Change mouse pad.
Cursor does not follow Replace the Mouse.
smoothly
mouse
movements.
Mouse and mouse pad.
Mouse:
OS ; Xserver
All Clients and all
Servers
processes
within
Advantage
Workstation.
Reboot workstation.
Cursor stuck, does not Check mouse connection to workstation.
move any more.
if, OK –> change mouse
Check keyboard connection to computer.
if OK –> change keyboard
If keyboard has been disconnected, it is necessary to Mouse, keyboard.
reboot workstation.
Mouse:
See “Cursor stuck” above.
No response from system
when clicking on one (any Reboot workstation.
one, or two, or all) mouse
button(s).
Change mouse.
Mouse, keyboard.
Display:
The monitors but be set with the parameter NEC monitor setup
Display is out of the auto–adjust = OFF
screen limits with
See Chapter 1, IST002 , Section 5
NEC monitor(s)
205
TROUBLESHOOTING
2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 002 – Application is Running
SYMPTOMS
ACTIONS
SUSPECT MODULE
Display:
Strike any key on keyboard.
Screensave.
Screen is black.
Check for power connection to the monitor.
Monitor. Monitor cable.
Check that Monitor is turned on.
Check that video cable is connected.
(XW8000 and XW8200 : connect to Y cable plug 1)
Check that no pin is bent on the video cable.
Check monitor power LED. If yellow >>> No video. Input select switch.
Check that the Input select switch position
corresponds to the connector, the video cable is
plugged in.
Make sure the Power supply for the Flat Panel monitor Flat panel power supply.
is operational.
Disconnect the Video Converter option (if applicable) Video Converter option.
for test.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Display: XW8000
Screen is black.
NEC monitor(s)
Reboot workstation.
OS.
Replace Monitor or Graphic Board (see Chapter 5).
Monitor, FB Board.
Make sure you used the VGA/VGA cables and NOT XW8000 : NEC monitor
the DVI/VGA or DVI/DVI cables delivered with the NEC cables
monitor(s)
Display: NEC monitor
1880SX / 1980SXi
Enter the OSD menu to reset the calibration
parameters:
– Click Exit button
Monitor adjustments from – Click 5 times on > button to move to 2nd toolbox tab.
last calibration have been – Click Select 1/2 button to enter 2nd toolbox.
modified by customer.
– Click 8 times on > button to move to Factory Presets.
– Click Select 1/2 button to select
– Click Reset button to accept
– Click twice on Exit button to close the OSD menu
NEC Monitor calibration
Database:
Network.
Resend corrupted images.
Spread images transfer over time.
Recover saved settings
from last calibration (or
Factory settings)
Some (all) images are
corrupted.
Is image from Image source OK?
Image source.
Does image source send Dicom3 compatible images? DCServer (dicom).
Database:
Select Refresh Lists in Application menu.
IMServer, DBServer.
Some (all) images cannot Reboot workstation and restart apllication.
be displayed.
Run ”Recover database” from the Service Tools IMServer, DBServer.
submenu within the Root menu when logged in as sdc DCServer.
Check disks. Run fsck (see TSG 003).
Repair or replace disk(s). See Job Card TSG 004.
206
disk(s).
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
3 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 002 – Application is Running
SYMPTOMS
ACTIONS
SUSPECT MODULE
Database:
Check
for
the
following
message
in DBMS
~sdc/logfiles/db*log: “stored procedure fails –XXX
Some (all) images cannot execute failed for procedure verify image”.
be displayed.
If this message appears, it means that the database
structure has been damaged. The database must be
rebuilt, and some images may be lost.
Use the Recover Database button or open a console
window:
type
sdcapp.csh –k [Return]
wait for all processes to die
cd /export/home/sdc/scripts [Return]
./reinstall.images.call [Return]
Confirm and enter root password when requested.
This can take up to several hours depending on the
number of images stored on the disks.
Quit the AW. application, then login again as sdc.
Check for available image disk space.
Remove some images from AW.
Images were sent fine but
never seemed to have Click on Messages button.
arrived.
This will open the Message Window
Have images arrived?
–> Browser had not been updated
Restart Browser and check again.
Resend image and check again
Reboot workstation and restart application.
File system.
Browser refresh list.
Network.
DBMS
Are you sending Dicom 3 compatible images?
Image source.
Run RECOVER DATABASE.
Any change after recover database and re–sending DBMS.
images?
yes: everything OK
IMServer,
–> DB was corrupted
DBServer.
no: Reinstall software
NEC LCD monitor :
Dual
LCD
monitor
configuration:
Cannot match the colors
of the 2 monitors
For color calibration of the LCD monitor(s),,
please order tool 0216 ”LCD color analyzer”
from the ”pool of tools” and refer to Service note
SNAW2002–009 instructions delivered with the
Tool or available from the AW–IB web site
@ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com
207
TROUBLESHOOTING
Database:
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
4 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 002 – Application is Running
SYMPTOMS
Networking :
Impossible
to
send
images to Advantage
Workstation from Image
source.
Images do not seem to
arrive and/or are not
declared
into
the
database.
ACTIONS
SUSPECT MODULE
Check that the workstation is up, and that Application Workstation.
is running correctly and ready to receive images.
Network.
Run /bin/ping –c 1 Advantage workstation from /etc/hosts file.
source, then ping source from Advantage Workstation. SdCRHosts file.
Check Ethernet cables on both sides (image source Connectivity.
and AW), check network modules on Image source.
For XW8000/8200, make sure that the ethernet XW8000/8200 only
cable is connected to the additional Ethernet card
(in the PCI slot). This is eth0 by default. The Ethernet
connection on the Mother board will default to eth1,
and is reserved for future use.
Check that Advantage workstation has not been Network,
given an IP address already used by another host. Image source,
Workstation.
Check that Advantage workstation is properly declared
on image source; check network status (not
“suspended”) after you have pushed the images.
Check internet addresses on both sources and SdCRHosts file.
destination.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Check that Protocol is set to Dicom3 and that Port
numbers are set to the right value (e.g.: AW=4006;
Workstation.
etc ...).
Image source.
Check for error messages in the logfiles
Workstation.
Check from Image source that images were sent fine.
Note : images are transferred to the Database, and
appear briefly in the following directory :
/export/home1/sdc_image_pool/import/reserved/Pro See Image source.
cess_name/
Dicom Conformance
Statement
If then images do not show up into the patient list, they
are probably not Dicom3 compatible images.
A pop up message will mention that they are rejected.
Networking :
Network performances
degraded.
Does not seem to have
auto–negociated
the
optimum performance for
network
Network controller cards used on the HP XW8400 and Workstation.
XW8200 workstations, are designed and set to fully support Auto–negociation
the Auto–negociation mode.
Any Network communication (mode, speed) issues, are
most probably due to problems in the configuration or
performance of the Site’s network.
Nethertheless, in case of Network communication issue (10
MBps or half Duplex mode selecting through
auto–negociation), it is possible to force these
communication parameters to the desired values.
See emergency procedure , Chapter 9, section 3–3
208
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
5 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 002 – Application is Running
SYMPTOMS
ACTIONS
SUSPECT MODULE
Networking :
The PNF firewall is probably set to deny access of any PNF Firewall
Remote hosts cannot Remote Hosts else than the ”Trusted Hosts.
connect to your AW
Check PNF permissions. (See chapter 1, IST002)
Edit the .dicomrc file and modify the Dicom_list_size
value to match your purpose :
the cd /export/home/sdc [Return]
vi .dicomrc [Return]
.................
................
setenv DICOM_LIST_SIZE 500
Change default value
............
500 to desired value
Save and quit :
<Esc>
:wq! [Return]
Want to modify
Dicom_list_size.
Filtered Query/retrieve:
Older type PACS system
may not properly support
CFIND_CANCEL.
For these systems, you
may disable the option
C_FIND_CANCEL, and
let the query sequence to
time–out.
Advanced
Application
(Volume Viewer, CTC,
AVA , Dentascan, ALA
etc...) do not start.
Edit the .dicomrc file and uncomment the line :
NO_CFIND_CANCEL to match your purpose :
cd /export/home/sdc [Return]
vi .dicomrc [Return]
.................
................
setenv DICOM_LIST_SIZE 500
setenv NO_CFIND_CANCEL
............
Save and quit :
<Esc>
:wq! [Return]
Uncomment the line, by
removing the #character
Check if application is properly declared. Open the Advanced application.
Configuration window from the Root Menu and check
if application is mentionned.
Run the uninstall.<appli_name> script, then redeclare
option. Logout and login again and check.
Call OLC with
validity of key.
licenseId number to check for Software protection key.
Reinstall AW application (Load From Warm), then AW software.
reinstall Advanced application.
Advanced
Application
Volume Viewer : MIP of
large datasets appear
mottled
regardless
resolution. Poor IQ for
MIP.
When using the DVI digital mode between the Graphic NEC1880SX /1980SXi
card and the NEC LCD monitor, the image quality is LCD monitor.
degraded.
Workaround : NEVER USE the DVI digital mode.
Refer to chapter 1 for connecting the monitor(s) using
the exclusively the VGA video mode.
209
TROUBLESHOOTING
Filtered Query/retrieve:
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
6 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 002 – Application is Running
SYMPTOMS
Patient list :
Browser is restarted after
typing of the SdC
password to unlock the
screen.
ACTIONS
SUSPECT MODULE
User’s passwords have not been saved on the Automatic
Configuration Cdrom, and therefore, they were not re–installation
re–installed after a Load From Cold or Load From procedure limitations.
Warm procedure.
Note : AW Users are created as standard UNIX users.
Therefore, they appear in the /etc/password and
/etc/shadow directories
Viewer:
Check if ”/” or ”/export/home” filesystems are not full. File system.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Viewer starts loading of Type : df –k [Return].
images displaying XX% If any of these 2 filesystems displays 100% or more,
then stops.
proceed to ”core file” and/or ”log files” cleanning.
Printing :
You may wish to set the Dicom print priority to medium Dicom Print
Too long time to get the or to high for your AW.
films printed in a busy
radiology department.
Edit the xx.dev file corresponding to your concerned
printer and set the priority to MED or HIGH:
cd /export/home/sdc/Prefs [Return]
AW default Dicom Print ls –l *.dev [Return]
priority is set to low.
Check the exact ”xx.dev” name of the dicom printer
vi xx.dev [Return]
(where xx is the name
corresponding to your printer)
.................
................
set printPriority ” ” <<< enter priority here between
quotes ”MED” or ”HIGH”
set printPriority ”MED”
............
Save and quit :
<Esc>
:wq! [Return]
Printing :
Check that Laser Camera is ready.
Laser Camera.
Impossible
to
send See Laser Camera Service Manual.
images to laser camera.
Check Dicom or Postscript printer responds to ping Network
command
Check Dicom or Postscript Printer declaration (Job Installation
Card IST006)
Reload Application software.
(Load From Warm: see job card IST 010).
Application.
Reload Os and Application.
(Load From Cold: see job card IST 011).
OS.
Application.
(see Chapter 7 for more information on Filming
option).
210
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
7 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 002 – Application is Running
SYMPTOMS
DataExport :
PNF firewall on:
AW is not reachable from
other hosts with http.
ACTIONS
SUSPECT MODULE
install.http script opens port 8080 for DataExport. PNF / install.http script
However, this setting can be accidentally removed in
the PNF configuration User Interface. This makes
DataExport unreachable from other stations.
In this case, run again the install.http script to reopen
port 8080.
Shutdown :
Open the computer box and check if the fan is CPU Fan.
Computer Fan
Unexpected shutdowns operational.
and automatic turn OFF If the main fan does not start, replace it.
of the workstation.
3
PNF FIREWALL SETTINGS REMOTE CHECKS
D Switch User to root :
su – root [Enter]
Enter the root password
D check the firewall status:
/export/home/sdc/install/configure.firewall status [Enter]
D check AW trusted network rules
cat /usr/share/pnf/modality.filters [Enter]
D check PNF internal rules (”Apply” needed to see/activate the changes)
cat /usr/share/pnf/dynamic.filters [Enter]
D check active firewall settings
iptables –L [Enter]
D If anything goes wrong remotely and you still have access to telnet:
turn PNF off
/export/home/sdc/install/configure.firewall off [Enter]
D turn PNF on remotely
/export/home/sdc/install/configure.firewall on [Enter]
D For customers who want to tune the Firewall parameters host by host and port by port, remove
(rename) the modality.sh default file
mv /usr/share/pnf/modality.sh /usr/share/pnf/modality.sh.old [Enter]
211
TROUBLESHOOTING
Provided that you can reach the AW remotely, the following are the commands you can use to check
or configure the Firewall.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Blank page.
TROUBLESHOOTING
51
212
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD TSG 003 – Files System Checks
Time: x h xx min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 6
RUNNING FSCK UTILITY
The fsck utility is useless on Linux filesystems, and shall not be used on AW4.4.
2
FILESYSTEM FULL ERROR
The sizes given hereafter are those of a standard AW4.4 workstation hard disks. The ”used” sizes of
your machine may differ from those shown below as they are subject to grow depending on:
– /export/home1: number of images stored on the disks
– /export/cdr ; /export/dvdr: number of images candidate for copy to the CD/DVD
– /tmp: usage of the swap partition
– /export/home: Images waiting in the printer queue and option softwares installed
– /export/home/sdc: Optional Application softwares installed.
/ and /boot: Used for system files.
2-1
Procedure
D Login as root
<station_name> console login : root [Enter]
password : operator [Enter]
D Open a Command window and click into it and type in:
df –k [Enter]
The example below is for a standard AW4.4 workstation on XW8400 (1 x 73GB system + 2 x 146GB
images hard disks). The values may differ from the one you can read on your system depending on
the number of files and images stored.
Filesystem
/dev/sda3
/dev/sda1
/dev/shm
/dev/sda6
/dev/sda7
/dev/sda8
/dev/md0
1K–blocks
5315296
101086
2013708
7998112
782336
49311464
286740480
Used Available Use% Mounted on
3731220
1584076 71% /
7447
88420
8% /boot
0
2013708
0% /dev/shm
22740
7975372
1% /export/dbsroot
144
782192
1% /export/cdr
712336 48599128
2% /export/home
5072264 281668216
2% /export/home1
The example below is for a standard AW4.4 workstation on XW8200 (1 x 36GB system + 2 x 73GB
images hard disks). The values may differ from the one you can read on your system depending on
the number of files and images stored.
213
TROUBLESHOOTING
The ”/proc” Filesystem, not accessible to the user, reflects the table of processes managed by the
system.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 003 – Files System Checks
Filesystem
/dev/sda2
/dev/sda1
none
/dev/sda7
/dev/sda8
/dev/sda9
/dev/sda10
/dev/md0
1K–blocks
4182720
101086
2073912
7998112
782336
4881504
13387904
143363584
Used Available Use% Mounted on
2784976
1397744 67% /
4341
91526
5% /boot
0
2073912
0% /dev/shm
14708
7983404
1% /export/dbsroot
144
782192
1% /export/cdr
144
4881360
1% /export/dvdr
859560 12528344
7% /export/home
383772 142979812
1% /export/home1
D Search File or Directory size: Indicates size in kiloBytes
du –ks [Enter]
du –ks <file_name> [Enter]
i.e.: du –ks /etc/hosts [Enter]
i.e: du –ks /export/home/sdc/logfiles [Enter]
2-2
Other useful commands
TROUBLESHOOTING
D Search file(s) by name
find /<dir_name> –name <file_name> –print [Enter]
i.e.: find / –name kcore –print [Enter]
(find core file(s))
Note:
Do not remove core directory located under /export/home/sdc directory.
D Search file(s) by size
find /<dir_name> –size +<value> –print [Enter]
i.e.: find /export/home/sdc –size +1500 –print [Enter]
(find files bigger than 1500KB)
2-3
Log files
D The different logfiles used by the AW software are located under the /export/home/sdc/logfiles
directory. Among them, some useful files for FEs are:
– browserlog ; browser_nuilog : (AW application)
– importimagelog : (incoming images)
– filmerlog : (Filming)
– prslog : Printer Server
– imslog : Image server
– reinstall_database.log (database recover)
– netslog : Network
– dcslog : DICOM server log)
– reviewStationlog : VIEWER log
– dbrlog , dbwlog : Read and write into image Database
– cdcomposerlog , cdpreparatorlog, cdrecordlog : CD–RW
Refer to Job Card TSG 009 for more details.
214
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
3 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 003 – Files System Checks
D Software installation logfiles are under the /export/home directory.
i.e : installaw.log (AW software loading)
Read the Log files
more XXlog [Enter]
tail XXlog [Enter]
tail – NN XXlog | more [Enter]
OR
to read the 10 last lines of the ”XXlog” file
to read the NN last lines of the ”XXlog” file.
Read compressed Log files
zcat
XXlog.X.gz [Enter]
where X is the compression date or number.
Write the logfiles on a diskette
D Open a Command window and switch User to root:
su – root [Enter]
password : operator [Enter]
D Insert a blank diskette into the drive, and format it :
fdformat /dev/fd0 [Enter]
D Save the desired logfile(s0 onto the diskette
cp XXXlog YYYlog ZZZlog /mnt/floppy [Enter]
i.e : cp dbrlog dbrlog.* dbwlog dbwlog.* imslog /mnt/floppy [Enter]
(save the dbrlog and dbrlog compressed files, dbwlog and compressed , imslog)
D When this is done, umount the diskette
umount /mnt/floppy [Enter]
D Manually eject the diskette from the drive.
To read the logfiles on a PC, rename them with a .txt extention.
Write the logfiles on an USB key
D Open a Command window and switch User to root:
su – root [Enter]
password : operator [Enter]
D Change to /export/home/root
cd /export/home/root [Enter]
D Mount the USB key
USBMount [Enter]
D Change to the USB key mounting directory
cd /mnt/usbdisk [Enter]
D Now you can copy any logfileson the key.
i.e: cp /export/home/sdc/logfiles/dbrlog /mnt/usbdisk [Enter]
D when done, to unmount the USB key before removing it, type:
cd /export/home/root [Enter]
USBUmount [Enter]
215
TROUBLESHOOTING
D Create the DOS filesystem and mount the diskette :
mkfs.msdos /dev/fd0 [Enter]
mount /mnt/floppy [Enter]
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
4 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 003 – Files System Checks
D You can now, safely remove your USB key and insert it in one of the USB ports of your Laptop.
3
INTERNAL SYSTEM/IMAGE DISKS ORGANIZATION
/boot: Linux Operating System files (not a serviceable part)
/export/dbsroot: This is used by the PostgreSQL database (not a serviceable part)
/export/ghost: Directory to store the ghost installation logfiles
/export/root: Directory used to manage Direct Connect and USB key files.
/export/home1/sdc_image_pool:
– ./archive: not used.
– ./cdr: not used.
– ./compress: not used.
– ./failed_to_reinstall: directory where the images that could not be properly declared to the
Database are stored.
– ./images: Logical paths to the images in the form of patient, exam, series, image
(i.e.: /p1/e2/s3/i5.1) and images.
TROUBLESHOOTING
– ./local_cdrom: not used.
– ./models: directory where 3D models are stored.
– ./network: not used.
– ./new: not used.
– ./reserved: directory managed by the system to reserve space for the processes to run.
/export/home/sdc:
– ./afm: directory which contains the AW fonts.
– ./apache: directory which contains the httpd.conf configuration file
– ./app–defaults: directory which contains the Application default configuration files
– ./bin: directory which contains the binaries used by Application.
– ./catalog_message: directory which contains Application messages.
– ./CD–Viewer: Is the CD–RW directory.
– ./core: Is a directory designed to prevent creating and storing a ”core” crash file in case of
system crash.
– ./denta, vxtl, nav, fctl etc...: These directories are created when installing Dentascan. 3D,
Navigator, FuncTool etc... Advanced Applications.
– ./doc: Is a directory where all AW and Apps documentation files are stored in PDF format.
– ./DataExport: directory which contains the DataExport application files.
216
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
52
5 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 003 – Files System Checks
/export/home/sdc: (continued)
– ./film: This directory is used by the Filming option.
– ./import: directory where any image is placed before , in order to be integrated into the images
directory.
– ./install: This directory contains all installation and de–installation scripts.
– ./lib: directory which contains the libraries used by Application.
– ./license: directory which contains the software licence keys.
– ./licenseServer: directory which contains the binaries to check the licence keys.
– ./logfiles: directory which contains the logfiles generated by Application.
– ./messages: directory which contains other Application messages.
– ./scripts: This directory contains all NON–installation scripts. Among them, you can find the
sdc_conf and sdc_crash scripts, the showdasm, showmod etc... test scripts, the start.sdc and
kill.sdc scripts.
– ./.options: Contains the installed Postscript printers.
– ./Prefs: Contains the basic Users preferences files or directories, and Site parameters.
It also contains files such as SdCRHosts file where is stored information about Hosts
accessible from AW, Applications preferences (FunctoolPrefs, etc ..), files named XXXX.dev ,
YYYYY.dev, ... for the Dicom Printers installed, etc ...
It also contains the .licenseInst file with all the Applications license keys stored on the
workstation.
– ./Users: Contains other Users directories and settings.
– ./UserPrefs: As Prefs for SDC user, it contains the other Users preferences settings.
217
TROUBLESHOOTING
– ./plugin: Contains .so system files .
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
6 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 003 – Files System Checks
4
MAIN DIRECTORIES AND FILES
dbsroot
AW files
.
/export
home
.
sdc
import
/boot
extra_tmp
/bin
root
/dev
Installation logfiles
/etc
.
/floppy
home1
/home
TROUBLESHOOTING
/lost+found
/GEHC_cdrom_rev X
sdc_image_pool
/initrd
archive
/lib
cdr
/root
compress
/mnt
failed_to_reinstall
/sbin
images
/var
local_cdrom
/usr
models
/opt
network
/tmp
/proc
/tftpboot
new
(process table,
managed by UNIX).
Size is not significant.
reserved
cdr
dvdr
insite
53
218
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD TSG 004 – Reformatting and/or Repartitioning Disks
Time: x h xx min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
FOREWORD
NOTICE
2
1 of 4
New disks from the manufacturer are formatted and contain a list of the media
defects. The following SHOULD ONLY BE DONE in case of troubles and/or doubt
on an already installed disk.
REPARTITIONING THE DISKS
There is no need to re–partition the disks.
Repartitioning the disks would corrupt all data present on the disks. In this case, you would have
to proceed with the steps described in Chapter 1, Job Card IST0 11: Complete Load From Cold
D Open a Command Window and switch User to root :
su – root [Return]
Enter root password
D Check filesystem
df –k [Return]
Filesystem
/dev/sda2
/dev/sda1
none
/dev/sda7
/dev/sda8
/dev/sda9
/dev/sda10
/dev/md0
/dev/hdc
1K–blocks
4182720
101086
1037684
7998112
782336
4881504
13387904
143363584
288096
Used Available Use%
2735108
1447612 66%
4338
91529
5%
0
1037684
0%
39576
7958536
1%
144
782192
1%
144
4881360
1%
246388 13141516
2%
12918936 130444648 10%
288096
0 100%
Mounted on
/
/boot
/dev/shm
/export/dbsroot
/export/cdr
/export/dvdr
/export/home
/export/home1
/tmp/awcd
D Check partitioning of the 36GB system SCSI hard disk
fdisk /dev/sda [Return]
The number of cylinders for this disk is set to 4427.
There is nothing wrong with that, but this is larger than 1024,
and could in certain setups cause problems with:
1) software that runs at boot time (e.g., old versions of LILO)
2) booting and partitioning software from other OSs
(e.g., DOS FDISK, OS/2 FDISK)
219
TROUBLESHOOTING
However, you can check the partitioning of your hard disks, in order to make sure they are correctly
partitioned.
The following example is for the XW8200 workstation (1 x 36GB system + 2 x 73GB image disks).
Partitioning of the 1 x 73GB + 2 x 146GB hard disks for the XW8400 workstation is slightly different,
but the principle remains the same.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 4
JOB CARD TSG 004 – Reformatting and/or Repartitioning Disks
Command (m for help):
p [Return]
Disk /dev/sda: 36.4 GB, 36420075520 bytes
255 heads, 63 sectors/track, 4427 cylinders
Units = cylinders of 16065 * 512 = 8225280 bytes
Device Boot
/dev/sda1
*
/dev/sda2
/dev/sda3
/dev/sda4
/dev/sda5
/dev/sda6
/dev/sda7
/dev/sda8
/dev/sda9
/dev/sda10
Start
1
14
536
797
797
806
1056
2053
2151
2760
End
13
535
796
4427
805
1055
2052
2150
2759
4427
Blocks
104391
4192965
2096482+
29166007+
72261
2008093+
8008371
787153+
4891761
13398178+
Id
83
83
82
5
83
82
83
83
83
83
System
Linux
Linux
Linux swap
Extended
Linux
Linux swap
Linux
Linux
Linux
Linux
Command (m for help): q [Return]
TROUBLESHOOTING
D Check partioning of image SCSI hard disks (home1)
fdisk /dev/md0 [Return]
Device contains neither a valid DOS partition table, nor Sun, SGI or OSF
disklabel
Building a new DOS disklabel. Changes will remain in memory only,
until you decide to write them. After that, of course, the previous
content won’t be recoverable.
The number of cylinders for this disk is set to 35840896.
There is nothing wrong with that, but this is larger than 1024,
and could in certain setups cause problems with:
1) software that runs at boot time (e.g., old versions of LILO)
2) booting and partitioning software from other OSs
(e.g., DOS FDISK, OS/2 FDISK)
Warning: invalid flag 0x0000 of partition table 4 will be corrected by
w(rite)
Command (m for help): p [Return]
Disk /dev/md0: 146.8 GB, 146804310016 bytes
2 heads, 4 sectors/track, 35840896 cylinders
Units = cylinders of 8 * 512 = 4096 bytes
Device Boot
Start
End
Blocks
Id
System
Command (m for help): q [Return]
If disks partitioning is not as shown, the workstation may need to be fully reloaded.
Refer to instructions detailed Chapter 1, Job Card IST011.
Note that the partitioning is dependant of the AW release and may be different with another release.
220
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
54
JOB CARD TSG 004 – Reformatting and/or Repartitioning Disks
3
3 of 4
REFORMATTING THE SYSTEM DISK
NOTICE
WARNING
3-1
New disks from the manufacturer are formatted and contain a list of the media
defects, so formatting is not necessary.
REFORMATTING THE SYSTEM DISKS ERASES ALL DATA CONTAINED ON THE
DISKS. THEREFORE, BOTH OPERATING SYSTEM AND A.W. APPLICATION
SOFTWARE WILL HAVE TO BE RELOADED.
THIS CAN BE DONE USING THE REGULAR LOAD FROM COLD PROCEDURE AS
DESCRIBED IN CHAPTER 1, JOB CARD IST 011.
Procedure for XW8400 workstation
Formatting of the SAS hard disks is not currently supported with the XW8400 workstation.
3-2
Procedure for XW8200 workstation
However, you can enter the LSI SCSI utility menu, by rebooting your workstation, pressing first on any
key, then simultaneously on <Ctrl> and <C> keys when prompted.
This will display additional information about your SCSI controllers and hard disks.
221
TROUBLESHOOTING
Formatting of the SCSI hard disks is not currently supported with the XW8200 workstation.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Blank page.
TROUBLESHOOTING
55
222
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD TSG 005 – Using HP Diagnostics Tool Cdrom
Time: 0 h 30 min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 6
EQUIPMENT NEEDED
D HP Insight Diagnostics for XW8200/XW8400 : P/N : 2396486–4 or 2396486–5
D One DOS formatted floppy diskette
and/or.
D One USB key.
2
RUNNING HP INSIGHT DIAGNOSTICS (XW8200 AND XW8400)
D Shutdown the workstation
The HP Diagnostics program is booting from the Cdrom:
ISOLINUX X.XX ...............
Loading HP Insight Diagnostics CD. Please wait
boot: ....
Loading: ...
......................
Ready
Loading drivers ...done
Press the ”y” key to use safe mode ........
.................................
It takes about one minute before the HP Insight Diagnostics menu pops–up.
HP Insight
Diagnostics
hp
Select the language to use during the Insight Diagnostics process
..
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Chinese
Select the keyboard to use during the Insight Diagnostics process
if other than the following
Model
Generic 101–key PC
Layout
U.S. English
Continue
D Make sure that you select the proper language and keep the Generic 101–key PC keyboard
selected.
223
TROUBLESHOOTING
D Insert the HP Insight Diagnostic CD into the drive and switch on the workstation.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
56
2 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 005 – Using HP Diagnostics Tool Cdrom
D Click on Continue.
The End User License Agreement window displays.
The HP Insight diagnostics shall only be used on your AW workstation.
D Click on Agree to continue.
The Loading HP Insight Diagnostics message window pops up.
It takes about 20 seconds to load the program, while the software is scanning the System Hardware.
During this time, a bar graph shows you the percentage of time remaining.
Then the following window displays
Serial number of your
workstation displays here
HP Insight Diagnostics
hp
Survey
Test
Status
Log
hpdiags
System: CZCXXXXXXX
Help
System Survey
Reload About
Current Configuration
TROUBLESHOOTING
View level:
Categories:
Summary
Overview
System
...................................
...................................
Total Memory
...................................
...................................
...................................
Communication
...................................
...................................
Storage
...................................
...................................
Exit Diagnostics
Save
(3)
(1)
Drag the scroll bar to
display the PCI slots
The Survey window allows you to check all the the detected hardware components.
Drag the scroll bar to view the PCI slots.
If you have already inserted an USB key in one of the USB ports, it will be detected too.
224
(2)
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
57
3 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 005 – Using HP Diagnostics Tool Cdrom
D Click on (1) About. The name of the release displays in a pop–up window.
The current release version is V7.5.6.1907A (CDrom P/N : 2396486–4)
The new production version is v7.7.0.2126A (CDrom P/N : 2396486–5)
or
D Click on OK to close the Release window
You may already save the configuration (called survey) on a floppy diskette or on your USB key
D Click on the Save (2) button if you want to save the survey.
The Save window pops up.
Save
Save to the floppy
Save to USB key
Click on the Save to USB key check box,
click on the Save to the floppy check box.
Note:
Save
survey.html
Cancel
or
If the USB key entry does not show in the menu, click on the Cancel button and navigate
between Survey, Test, and back to Survey to refresh the screen, then select Save again.
D Keep the default ”survey.html’ name or type in the name you want to give to the test file (i.e:
xw8400survey.txt) in the File Name window.
Make sure that if you want to save on Floppy, your DOS formatted floppy diskette is properly
inserted in the drive.
D Click on Save to start saving on the floppy diskette .
The warning message window pops up when done.
!
File write complete
OK
D Click on OK to continue.
225
TROUBLESHOOTING
File Name
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
58
4 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 005 – Using HP Diagnostics Tool Cdrom
D Click on the Test (3) tab.
The Diagnostic Test window pops–up.
HP Insight Diagnostics
hp
Survey
Test
Status
Log
hpdiags
System: CZCXXXXXXX
Help
Diagnostic Test
Quick Test
Reload About
Complete Test
Custom Test
Select a device from the list and press ”Begin Testing”to run a quick test of the selected device.
Select ”All devices” to run a quick test of all devices.
Test mode
Interactive
Duration of Test
Unattended
Number of Loops 1
Total test Time (minutes)
0
Stop on First Error
Select a device to test:
All devices
TROUBLESHOOTING
Exit Diagnostics
Begin Testing
In the example, we have kept the Quick Test selected and the Unattended mode
You can choose to test all the workstation’s hardware devices, or only some of them, and the number
of times you want to run the test (number of loops).
Note:
The Floppy diskette drive test is only available in the ”Interactive” mode.
In this mode, you will also be prompted to press on any of the keys of the keyboard, and
there will be several passes of move and clicks test of the mouse.
D Select ”All devices” or choose the single device(s) you want to test.
D Select a number of loops (1 by default), or the number of times you want to run the test.
You may instead choose to run the test during a certain laps of time.
D You may choose to end the test on first error.
D Click on the Begin Testing .
The warning message window pops up.
!
Please make sure all required media is installed for testing
OK
D Make sure that a formatted floppy diskette is inserted into the drive, in order to avoid the Floppy
Disk Drive test to fail, and click on OK to start the test.
226
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
59
5 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 005 – Using HP Diagnostics Tool Cdrom
The Test Status window pops–up.
In the example below, we chose to run the Quick Test selected in the Unattended mode
hp
HP Insight Diagnostics
Survey
Test
Status
Log
hpdiags
System: CZCXXXXXXX
Help
Test Status
Reload About
Quick Test
Test Time
Exit Diagnostics
Drag the scroll bar to
display the tested items
D Click on the Cancel Testing , if you want to modify some of the testing parameters.
When the test is over, the Cancel Testing button changes to Retest.
You may wish to restart the same test by clicking on the Retest button.
If you want to change the test parameters, get back to the Test window (click on Test tab) and modify
the parameters, then click on the Begin Testing button to restart.
Once the test are done, you can check what has been logged, by clicking on the Log tab.
All reported errors will be displayed in the Error Log .
227
TROUBLESHOOTING
View level: Summary
XX %
Cancel testing
Current Loop: X of X Test Time X.X.XX Refresh Rate: X seconds
Device, Test
Status
Test Progress
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
60
6 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 005 – Using HP Diagnostics Tool Cdrom
hp
HP Insight Diagnostics
Survey
Test
Status
Test Log
Error Log
Log
Reload About
Device, Test
TROUBLESHOOTING
hpdiags
System: CZCXXXXXXX
Help
Number of Times Tested
Failed Count
Clear Test Log
Exit Diagnostics
Test Time
Save
Navigate between Text Log window and Error Log window. Test Log shows the status of the test that
have been run, while Error Log gives additional details on test that have failed.
D Insert your USB key in any of the USB ports.
If you want to save the tests results on a Floppy diskette, insert a blank DOS formatted diskette into
the Floppy drive.
D Click on the Save button.
The Save window pops up.
Save
Save to the floppy
Save to USB key
File Name
Save
test log.html
D Click on the Save to USB key check box,
click on the Save to the floppy check box.
or
228
Cancel
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
61
7 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 005 – Using HP Diagnostics Tool Cdrom
D Keep the default ”Testlog.html’ name or type in the name you want to give to the test file (i.e:
xw8400test.txt) in the File Name window.
Make sure that if you want to save on Floppy, your DOS formatted floppy diskette is properly
inserted in the drive.
D Click on Save to start saving on the floppy diskette .
The warning message window pops up when done.
!
File write complete
OK
D Click on OK to continue.
D Click on Exit to quit the Diagnostics program.
The warning message window pops up.
You have decided to exit Insight Diagnostics. Click ”OK” to continue.
OK
Cancel
D Click on OK to exit the Insight Diagnostics Utility.
The workstation starts to shutdown and reboot.
D Extract the USB key
D Eject the Floppy diskette from the drive
D Eject the HP Insight Diagnostics CD from the DVD/CD drive, to avoid the workstation starting to
reboot from the Diagnostics Cdrom.
229
TROUBLESHOOTING
?
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Blank page.
TROUBLESHOOTING
62
230
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD TSG 006 – Troubleshooting Physical Network Problems
Time: x h xx min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1 of 2
1
MONITORING COMMAND
Note:
Login as root or switch user to root (su - root) to use the following commands.
Note:
Internet numbers in text are used for example ONLY. Use internet numbers for your specific
network.
PING 3.45.13.110 (3.45.13.110) from 3.249.12.127 : 56(84) bytes of data.
64 bytes from 3.45.13.110: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=761 usec
64 bytes from 3.45.13.110: icmp_seq=1 ttl=255 time=417 usec
64 bytes from 3.45.13.110: icmp_seq=2 ttl=255 time=401 usec
64 bytes from 3.45.13.110: icmp_seq=3 ttl=255 time=1.286 msec
64 bytes from 3.45.13.110: icmp_seq=4 ttl=255 time=412 usec
64 bytes from 3.45.13.110: icmp_seq=5 ttl=255 time=400 usec
64 bytes from 3.45.13.110: icmp_seq=6 ttl=255 time=5.416 msec
.............................................................
Interrup by pressing <Ctrl> <C> when desired
––– 3.45.13.110 ping statistics –––
X packets transmitted, X packets received, 0% packet loss
round–trip min/avg/max/mdev = 0.394/0.823/5.416/0.980 ms
D Telnet: open a session on remote machine
(e.g.: get the date from OC console through the network – Job id = 13)
telnet 192.9.200.1 13 [Enter]
Trying 192.9.200.1
Connected to mr01–oc0
Escape character is ’^]’.
Date –––––––––––––
Connection closed by foreign host.
Note:
A large percentage of dropped packages is not significant of network problems. It can be due
to a heavy activity of the network or the workstation that you ”spray”.
Note:
Hosts are not updated in the /etc/inet/hosts file but can be found in the
/export/home/sdc/Prefs/SdCRHosts file. For this reason, it is not possible to use “ping”,
“telnet”, and similar commands using the hostname. The internet address must be used
instead. For example, to ping the MR operator’s console from the Advantage workstation, do
not use ping MR01_OC0. Instead, use: /usr/bin/ping 192.9.200.1 [Enter].
231
TROUBLESHOOTING
D Ping: connection test
ping X.X.X.X [Enter]
(internet address)
i.e : ping 3.45.13.110 [Enter]
(internet address)
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 2
JOB CARD TSG 006 – Troubleshooting Physical Network Problems
Note:
In case of images transfert problem during query / retreive from AW to a remote host when
selecting ”patient transfer”, (the transfert failed with error message related to the host
declaration) and successfull transfer when selecting ”series transfer”, check the provider type
screen, in Network Manager.
(refer to IST 002).
D Rup: connected machines “up time“ and load average:
rup [Enter]
192.9.100.4 up 1 day, 21:00 load average 0.00 0.00 0.02
192.9.100.2 up 1 day, 2:50 load average 0.21 0.00 0.03
...........
<CTRL–C> to exit
D Rusers: name of users logged in on remote machines:
rusers [Enter]
Sending broadcast for rusersd protocol version X...
3.7.24.115.128.6 root root
3.7.24.114.128.1 sdc sdc sdc
...........
<CTRL–C> to exit.
TROUBLESHOOTING
D Arp: current internet–to–ethernet address translation of connected machines:
arp –a [Enter]
Address
3.45.13.110
3.249.15.254
. HWtype
ether
ether
HWaddress
08:00:20:C6:FC:7E
00:00:5E:00:01:03
Flags Mask
C
C
Iface
eth0
eth0
D Ifconfig: get internet (inet) address, netmask value, broadcast:
ifconfig eth0 [Enter]
eth0
D
2
Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:E0:81:00:4A:2B
inet addr:3.249.12.127 Bcast:3.249.15.255 Mask:255.255.252.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:51095 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:191 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:7766887 (7.4 Mb) TX bytes:15189 (14.8 Kb)
Interrupt:21 Base address:0xa000
ifconfig –a [Enter] will get you information on other ethernet controllers if applicable:
For XW8200 and XW8400, the additional ethernet board defaults to eth0, and the Ethernet
controller on the Mother board is eth1.
Eth1 is reserved for ”Direct Connect” through additional network.
USING HP DIAGNOSTICS TOOL
(see Job Card TSG 005)
63
232
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD TSG 007 – Using an USB key for Service
Time: 0 h 15 min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 2
EQUIPMENT NEEDED
D An USB key
D GE Field Laptop.
2
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
D Connect your USB key on one of the free USB port of the workstation.
You do not need to turn off the workstation.
XW8200 FRONT VIEW
USB PORTS
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
D Open a Command Window and switch user to root:
su – root [Enter]
Enter the root password
D Change to /export/home/root
cd /export/home/root [Enter]
D Mount the USB key
USBMount [Enter]
D Change to the USB key mounting directory
cd /mnt/usbdisk [Enter]
D Now you can work on your USB key like with any mounted filesytem, and use Linux commands like
cp, ls, rm, mkdir , cd etc ..., to copy image files, logfiles, anything you may want to export onto
your Laptop.
i.e: cp /export/home/sdc/logfiles/* /mnt/usbdisk [Enter]
233
TROUBLESHOOTING
XW8200 REAR VIEW
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 2
JOB CARD TSG 007 – Using an USB key for Service
D when done, to unmount the USB key before removing it, type:
cd /export/home/root [Enter]
USBUmount [Enter]
D You can now, safely remove your USB key and insert it in one of the USB ports of your Laptop.
TROUBLESHOOTING
64
234
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD TSG 008 – Create a Kickstart Diskette
Time: x h xx min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
WARNING
1 of 2
FROM THE AW4.2_04 RELEASE, THE GEMS LINUX OPERATING SYSTEM IS
USED AND THE KICKSTART DISKETTE IS NO LONGER NECESSARY.
AW4.4 uses the GEHC Linux Operating System.
The Kickstart files are included in the DVD.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Therefore NO kickstart diskette is necessary.
235
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Blank page.
TROUBLESHOOTING
65
236
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD TSG 009 – Logfiles Information
Time: x h xx min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 6
LOGFILES
Installation Logfiles can be found under /export/home directory.
D Change to the logfiles directory and list contents:
cd /export/home [Enter]
ls –la [Enter]
– preinstall.log:
This logfile gives information prior to the launch of install.aw, from the GEHC_Linux OS
post–installation script.
– install.log:
This logfile gives information after the launch of install.aw
D Change to the /export/home/ghost directory to read installation logfiles, using the Fast Load DVD:
– prepare_ghost_new_system.log :
prepare_ghost_system.log
These logfiles gives the logfiles about actions prior to a new LFC.
– ghost_install.log:
This logfile gives the installation logfiles, using the Fast Load DVD
1-1
Logfiles List
Note:
Starting from the AW4.2_04 release, the logfiles mechanism is slightly modified.
i.e:
– Prior to AW4.2_04 : dbrlog.date.Z where date = FriSep615:15:04 for example
where 1<n<10
– From AW4.2_04 : dbrlog.n.gz
AW4.4 uses the second mechanism which will be detailed later in this chapter
Logfiles can be found under /export/home/sdc/logfiles directory, or accessed directly through the
Maintenance menu. The size of each logfiles may be different from those of your workstation.
D Change to the logfiles directory and list contents:
cd /export/home/sdc/logfiles [Enter]
ls –la [Enter]
Note:
The following list is not exhaustive and lists the main processes log files
AimGatewaylog:
anonymousmakerlog:
Dedicated to log space reservations made by the Print Manager to AIM.
(For AW Engineering use only).
Dedicated to log actions to save exams under no_name patient.
(this is mostly used for demos where the patient’s name should not appear).
237
TROUBLESHOOTING
cd /export/home/ghost [Enter]
ls –la [Enter]
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
2 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 009 – Logfiles Information
TROUBLESHOOTING
appmanagementlog:
awalog:
awccowlog:
awauditslog:
browser_nuilog:
browserlog:
cdcomposerlog:
cdpreparatorlog:
cdrecordlog:
daslog:
dbrlog:
dbwlog:
dclimg:
dcslog:
dcspush.log:
dentacamera.logs:
dicomPrintlog:
directConnectLog:
dmslog:
filmComposerProxylog:
hostmanagementlog:
importimagelog:
imslog:
inst_startlog:
installog:
install.insite.log
lcbuildlog:
logoutlog:
lpNetlog:
lpschedlog:
miniviewerlog:
mosaicDisplaylog:
netlog:
printManagerlog:
prslog:
queueManagementlog:
requestslog:
reinstall_database.log:
reviewStationlog:
sbooklog:
sdcapplog:
softswitchlog:
swdlog:
userlog:
Dedicated to log declarations of applications.
Dedicated to log actions on the Control panel of the Viewer.
Logfiles of the CCOW context enabler (AW side)
Dedicated to the ’audit’ log files.
Dedicated to log actions on the Control panel of the Browser.
Dedicated to log actions on the Viewer.
Dedicated to log actions on the CD composer.
Dedicated to log actions on the CD burning process preparator
Dedicated to log actions on the CD burning process.
Logfiles for the Dicom MOD (Sony or Maxoptix).
Database Read logfiles.
Database Write logfiles.
Mini Viewer log
Dedicated to log data transfers in Dicom protocol.
Dicom push logfiles.
Dentascan print logfiles.
Dicom print logfiles.
Direct Connect option logfile
Logfiles for the Dicom CD–R.
Dedicated to log the requests made by older Advanced Applications which
previously used the Film Composer, to the Scrapbook.
Dedicated to log the process of new Hosts declaration.
Dedicated to log the process to import the images into the Database.
Dedicated to log the process to declare the images into the Database.
Installation logfiles.
Installation logfiles.
Insite Installation logfiles.
Logfiles for Printing through Advanced Applications (Batch Filming for V.A.).
Dedicated to log the logouts actions.
Unix Logfiles for Postscript printing.
Logfiles of the Unix Line printer demon for Postscript printing.
Logfiles of the Mini Viewer.
Logfiles of the Mosaic display.
Network server log. All internal processes transit through the Netserver.
Dedicated to log printers configurations and film generation.
Actual Print server logfiles.
Dedicated to log the Netwok and Media queues.
Database reinstallation logfiles.
Logfiles of the Viewer.
Scrapbook logfiles.
Dedicated to log start and stop of application.
Logfiles of the Softswitch feature (AW and RIS synchronization)
Logfiles of the Software Download (SWD) feature
Users login in logfile
238
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
66
3 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 009 – Logfiles Information
EA3 logfiles are under /var/log directory:
ea3_audit.log:
ea3_syslog.log:
EA3 authentication server logfile
EA3 authentication server logfile
PNF logfiles are under /var/log directory into messages.x files:
To read current PNF logs:
cat messages | grep PNF [Enter]
or
cat messages | grep PNF:NET [Enter]
(to simply view dropped connections)
PNF logs are very verbose. To read other currentlogs (other than PNF) in messages :
cat messages | grep –v PNF [Enter]
To read compressed PNF logs:
zcat messages.x.gz | grep PNF [Enter]
cat messages.x.gz | grep PNF:NET [Enter]
Installation Logfiles
D Use either the more command if you want to read page by page the whole contents of the file, or
the tail command, (or tail –n , n being the number of lines you want to read), to see the most recent
messages logged. See example below:
more netslog [Enter]
or
tail dbrlog [Enter]
(last 10 lines) or
tail –n browserlog [Enter] (last n lines)
Note:
Logfiles are periodically ”cleaned”. It means that as soon as they grow up over a certain size,
they are compressed.
So you will also see compressed files of the form:
where 1<n<10
– : dbrlog.n.gz
These compressed files are erased after 10 occurences
To read a file, uncompress it first then read using more or tail commands as shown before:
gunzip XXlog.n.gz [Enter]
e.g.: gunzip dbrlog.6.gz [Enter]
more XXlog.n [Enter]
e.g.: more dbrlog.6 [Enter]
1-3
Mostly used Logfiles and brief explanation
The first lines with the ## signs describe the system which the logfile is extracted from and the date
and time of process start.
See the following example:
239
TROUBLESHOOTING
1-2
or
(where x = compression date)
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
67
4 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 009 – Logfiles Information
## process: arslog
## date of creation: Fri Sep 16 08:32:39 2005
## hospital name: BUC_ENG
## hostname: SdC
## operating system: Linux
## operating system release: 2.6.7–2.2smp
## operating system version: #1 SMP <Date>
## machine hardware: i686
################################################################################
## date of process start: <Date>
################################################################################
D browserlog:
This logfile gives information about requests made to the browser such as selecting a patient
and opening the viewer, or receiving images and also returns of requests to servers.
D cdcomposerlog:
This logfile gives information about the Composer User Interface of the CD/DVD.
D cdpreparatorlog:
TROUBLESHOOTING
This logfile gives information about the preparation steps prior to burn the CD/DVD.
D cdrecordlog:
This logfile gives information about the Composer User Interface of the CD/DVD.
D cdromMountlog:
cdromUmountlog:
cdromEjectlog:
These logfiles give information about the mounts, unmounts or ejects of the CD/DVD.
D daslog:
This logfile gives information about the Dicom Archive (SONY Dicom MOD) Server.
D dbrlog: Database Read server
This logfile gives information about DATABASE in read mode.
D dbwlog: Database Write server
This logfile gives information about DATABASE in write mode.
D dcslog: Dicom Server Log
This logfile gives information about the DICOM Server.
D dcsstorequeryretrievelog:
This logfile gives information about the DICOM query/retrieve provider Server.
D dmslog: Dicom Media Server Log
This logfile gives information about the DVD/CD drive Server.
240
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
68
5 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 009 – Logfiles Information
D easyInstallLog:
This logfile gives information about the Easy Install utility.
D filmComposerProxylog:
This logfile gives information related to Filming with the Applications (Volume Viewer, Functool,
etc ...) using Film Composer compatibility files.
D filmerlog:
This logfile gives information related to Filming with the Viewer.
D imslog: Image Server Log
This logfile gives information related to the IMAGE Server (image file management on disks).
D mosaicDisplaylog:
This logfile gives information related to the Mosaic Display Viewer.
D netslog: Network activity Log
This logfile gives information related to the Network server.
This logfile gives information related to the Print Manager and Print Slave.
D prslog: Print Server Log
This logfile gives information related to the Print Server.
D S98sdcapp.log:
This logfile gives information related to starting AW application.
D sdcapplog:
This logfile gives information related to starting and stopping AW application.
D userlog:
This logfile gives information about the User login in.
D xautolocklog:
This logfile gives information about the application autolock.
2
USING SDC_CRASH UTILITY
D There is an utility under /export/home/sdc/scripts called sdc_crash. This script is an automated
process to collect all System logfiles, and dump them into a compressed file that can be
transferred through INSITE to the Support Center, or copied to a floppy diskette, or uncompressed
to be locally analysed.
241
TROUBLESHOOTING
D printManagerlog:
printManagerSlavelog:
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
6 of 6
JOB CARD TSG 009 – Logfiles Information
D Switch User to root
su – root [Enter]
Enter root password
D Build the crashlog file
/export/home/sdc/scripts/sdc_crash [Enter]
i.e.: sdc_crash
Saving logfiles and Prefs...
Saving system information...
Saving database content...
Saving sdc configuration...
Compressing output file...
The file /tmp/AW_4_4_<Version>_<hostname>_<Date>.crash.tar.gz is ready
If you just wish to send this crash file to Engineering or to your Support Center, do the following:
D Insert a blank diskette into the drive, and format it :
fdformat /dev/fd0 [Enter]
TROUBLESHOOTING
D Create the DOS filesystem and mount the diskette :
mkfs.msdos /dev/fd0 [Enter]
mount /mnt/floppy [Enter]
D Change dir to /tmp and copy the compressed file on a floppy diskette
cd /tmp [Enter]
cp AW_4_4_<Version>_<hostname>_<Date>.crash.tar.gz /mnt/floppy [Enter]
D When this is done, umount the diskette
umount /mnt/floppy [Enter]
D Manually eject the diskette from the drive.
If you wish to analyze yourself this crash file, do the following:
D Uncompress and untar the xxx.crash.tar.gz file and proceed to default analyze...
gunzip AW_4_4_<Version>_<hostname>_<Date>.crash.tar.gz [Enter]
tar xvf AW_4_4_<Version>_<hostname>_<Date>.crash.tar [Enter]
i.e :
x ./browserlog.SunMay715:15:02.Z, 1547 bytes, 4 tape blocks
..................................................
x ./dcslog.FriMay520:15:03.Z, 1120 bytes, 3 tape blocks
....................................................................
D List the contents of the available logfiles:
ls [Enter]
.....................
dbrlog.SatMay615:15:03.Z
......................
D Read the logfile(s):
i.e.: more dbrlog [Enter]
or zcat dbrlog.date.Z (if file si compressed)
69
242
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD TSG 010 – Information about Running Processes
Time: x h xx min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 4
LIST OF THE RUNNING PROCESSES AND BRIEF EXPLANATION
First processes belong to Root and are started when booting–up.
There is not much you can do with them. They must be up and running before the AW application can
be started successfully.
If this is not the case, shutdown the workstation and boot it again.
D Run the following command :
ps –ef | more [Return]
The following is an example, and may differ from what you get on the screen.
UID
PID PPID C STIME TTY
TIME CMD
root
1 0 0 05:27 ?
00:00:01 init [5]
root
2 1 0 05:27 ?
00:00:00 [migration/0]
root
3 1 0 05:27 ?
00:00:00 [ksoftirqd/0]
root
4 1 0 05:27 ?
00:00:00 [migration/1]
root
5 1 0 05:27 ?
00:00:00 [ksoftirqd/1]
root
6 1 0 05:27 ?
00:00:00 [events/0]
root
7 1 0 05:27 ?
00:00:00 [events/1]
root
8 6 0 05:27 ?
00:00:00 [khelper]
root
9 6 0 05:27 ?
00:00:00 [kacpid]
root
42 6 0 05:27 ?
00:00:00 [kblockd/0]
root
43 6 0 05:27 ?
00:00:00 [kblockd/1]
..........................................................
rpc
2220 1 0 05:28 ?
00:00:00 portmap
rpcuser 2240 1 0 05:28 ?
00:00:00 rpc.statd
root
2332 1 0 05:28 ?
00:00:00 /usr/sbin/acpid
root
2406 1 0 05:28 ?
00:00:00 cupsd
..........................................................
root
2636 1 0 05:28 ?
00:00:00 [rpciod]
root
2640 1 0 05:28 ?
00:00:00 rpc.mountd
root
2660 1 0 05:28 ?
00:00:00 rpc.idmapd
root
2676 1 0 05:28 ?
00:00:00 /usr/sbin/vsftpd /etc/vsftpd/vsftpd.conf
Then Insite and EA3 servers are started
root
2726 1 0 05:28 ?
00:00:00 /export/home1/insite/server/bin/iip–httpd –f
/export/home1/insite/server/conf/httpd.conf
nobody 2759 2726 0 05:28 ?
00:00:00 /export/home1/insite/server/bin/iip–httpd –f
/export/home1/insite/server/conf/httpd.conf
............................................
tomcat 2792 1 0 05:28 ?
00:00:05 /usr/sbin/tomcat
–Dcom.redhat.tomcat.sysconf=/etc/sysconfig/tomcat –home /usr/share/tom
cat –logfile /usr/share/tomcat/logs/tomcat.out –pidfile /var/run/tomcat/tomcat.pid –user tomcat
root
2821 1 0 05:28 ?
00:00:00 ./ea3_srv –server
243
TROUBLESHOOTING
Note:
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
70
2 of 4
JOB CARD TSG 010 – Information about Running Processes
........................................
postgres 2999 2993 0 05:28 ?
00:00:00 postgres: stats buffer process
postgres 3000 2999 0 05:28 ?
00:00:00 postgres: stats collector process
root
3294 1 0 05:28 ?
00:00:00 /usr/sbin/mlocker 1826
root
3626 1 0 05:28 tty1 00:00:00 /sbin/mingetty tty1
....................................
TROUBLESHOOTING
When Application is started, you can see that most of the next processes belong to sdc.
sdc
3827 3792 0 05:29 ?
00:00:00 –/bin/csh –c /usr/bin/ssh–agent
/export/home/sdc/.xsession
sdc
3879 3827 0 05:29 ?
00:00:00 /bin/sh /export/home/sdc/.xsession
sdc
3880 3879 0 05:29 ?
00:00:00 /usr/bin/ssh–agent /export/home/sdc/.xsession
sdc
3889 3879 0 05:29 ?
00:00:00 colorReaper
sdc
3920 1 0 05:29 ?
00:00:00 xterm –fb helvetica –fn 7x13bold –title CONSOLE –C –j
–sb –sl 900 –n CONSOLE –name cxte
rm –fg #ffc000 –bg Grey20 –bd #ffc000 –cr #ffc000 –b 4 –iconic
sdc
3987 3879 0 05:29 ?
00:00:00 mwm
sdc
3996 3920 0 05:29 pts/0 00:00:00 –sh
sdc
6143 1 0 09:56 ?
00:00:00 /bin/csh /export/home/sdc/scripts/xtermSdC –cr #ffc000 –T
Terminal –geometry 80x30
sdc
6169 6143 0 09:56 ?
00:00:00 xterm –ie –sb –fb helvetica –fn 7x13bold –title Terminal
–cr #ffc000 –geometry 80x30
sdc
6171 6169 0 09:56 pts/1 00:00:00 –sh
Then the AW servers are started
sdc
6798 1 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 netserver (network server)
sdc
6800 1 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 dbrserver (database read server)
(database write server)
sdc
6802 1 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 dbwserver
sdc
6804 1 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 imserver
(image management server)
(Dicom server)
sdc
6806 1 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 dcserver
sdc
6808 1 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 prserver
(Print server)
root
6810 1 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 dmserver
(Dicom Media server)
................................
sdc
6859 1 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 printManager
sdc
6861 1 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 browser_nui
sdc
6863 1 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 CdComposer
sdc
6865 1 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 CdPreparator
sdc
6867 1 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 xautolock –time 5 –locker xlockSdC.csh
postgres 6998 2993 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 postgres: postgres ctmr_sdc_db [local] idle
sdc
7001 6859 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 /export/home/sdc/bin/printManagerSlave
sdc
7004 6808 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 prserver
postgres 7009 2993 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 postgres: postgres ctmr_sdc_db [local] idle
244
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
3 of 4
JOB CARD TSG 010 – Information about Running Processes
sdc
7012 6800 0 10:03 ?
postgres 7013 2993 0 10:03 ?
sdc
7014 6804 0 10:03 ?
sdc
7015 6802 0 10:03 ?
postgres 7016 2993 0 10:03 ?
sdc
7018 6818 0 10:03 ?
sdc
7023 6818 0 10:03 ?
sdc
7126 7018 0 10:03 ?
00:00:00 dbrserver
00:00:00 postgres: postgres ctmr_sdc_db [local] idle
00:00:00 imserver
00:00:00 dbwserver
00:00:00 postgres: postgres ctmr_sdc_db [local] idle
00:00:00 /export/home/sdc/bin/filmer_nui
00:00:00 mosaicDisplay –iconic –parent 16777937
00:00:00 /export/home/sdc/bin/filmComposerProxy
Processes consequent to a remote login on the workstation can be running also, as shown below.
root
root
sdc
25609 712 0 16:27 ?
00:00:00 in.telnetd: 3.45.13.110
25610 25609 0 16:27 ?
00:00:00 login –– sdc
25611 25610 0 16:27 pts/2 00:00:00 –csh
Result of the ps –ef | more command starts the following processes :
25643 25611 0 16:28 pts/2
25644 25611 0 16:28 pts/2
00:00:00 ps –ef
00:00:00 more
2
RESTARTABLE PROCESSES
2-1
Restarting the BROWSER
You can either restart BROWSER from the ROOT MENU or by opening a Command Window and
typing in:
D cd /export/home/sdc/scripts [Return]
D sdcapp.csh –k [Return]
D restart_sdc.csh [Return]
2-2
Application Hung
D Remote log from another workstation or a Unix / Linux image source:
telnet <IP address of the hung workstation> [Return]
User : sdc [Return]
Password : adw4.4 [Return]
D cd
/scripts [Return]
D sdcapp.csh –k [Return]
D restart_sdc.csh [Return]
If the processes cannot be restarted, shutdown and reboot the workstation :
D init 6 [Return]
D Restart application by login in as sdc on the workstation.
245
TROUBLESHOOTING
sdc
sdc
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
4 of 4
JOB CARD TSG 010 – Information about Running Processes
3
ROOT MENU SCRIPTS
The following Root Menu utilities can be run from a Command Window. This can be usefull to run
these utilities remotely.
To access the Root menu, press simultaneously the <Alt> and <F3> keys.
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Display Configuration
Command Window
Save Configuration
Recover Database
Service Tools
Install package
AW Administration
Service Tools
Restart AW
EA3 Configuration
TROUBLESHOOTING
Exit AW
”Restart AW”
”Exit AW”
/export/home/sdc/scripts/restart_sdc.csh [Return]
/export/home/sdc/scripts/sdcapp.csh –k [Return]
”Recover database”
/export/home/sdc/scripts/reinstall.images.call [Return]
”Install SMPTE”
/export/home/sdc/scripts/start_SMPTE [Return]
”AW Configuration Screen”
/export/home/sdc/scripts/conf [Return]
”Service menu”
The script is obsolete. Access to the Service Tools should be
done locally or remotely through the CSD.
”Administration menu”
/export/home/sdc/scripts/admin_menu [Return]
71
246
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD TSG 011 – Common Service Desktop
Time: x h xx min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1
1 of 8
ACCESSING THE COMMON SERVICE DESKTOP
The Service Tools, part of the Common Service Desktop, which allow you to perform the basic
maintance tasks locally or remotely, are accessible through various means:
1-1
Locally on the workstation
1-1-1 Access through the User Interface
TROUBLESHOOTING
(1)
(2)
1-1-2 Access through the Root menu
Note:
You can also get to the Service Tools
menu through the Root menu, by:
– pressing simultaneously the <Alt> and
<F3> keys to iconify the windows in use
– pressing on the left mouse buttons and
select the Service Tools from the Root
menu / Service Tools
(1)
(2)
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Display Configuration
Command Window
Save Configuration
Recover Database
Service Tools
Install package
AW Administration
Service Tools
Restart AW
EA3 Configuration
Exit AW
247
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
72
2 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 011 – Common Service Desktop
TROUBLESHOOTING
The Common Service Desktop displays within the Mozilla navigator web page
1-2
Remote access from another AW (or another host) on the network
D Start the Mozilla Web Navigator application (i.e: from an AW4.2 local host)
1
2
Click on More
to view the available applications
Click on Mozilla to open
a Web Navigator.
note: You can, if you
wish, drag&drop the
Mozilla application in
the main Applications
window, before starting
it, so it will be available
directly
The Mozilla Web Navigator starts
248
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
73
3 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 011 – Common Service Desktop
D Enter the remote AW address into the Web address field :
http://<remote_AW_IP_address>/modality–csd/serviceDesktop/index.htm [Return]
1-3
Remote access from VOLC
D Connect to the AW remotely, and launch the Telnet Tool (Connect tool)
D Click on the CSD access button ot the Telnet Tool .
The Common Service Desktop utility starts
249
TROUBLESHOOTING
The Common Service Desktop utility starts
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
74
4 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 011 – Common Service Desktop
2
USING THE SERVICE TOOLS
D Select the Service Tool you want to use. The available selections at this time are the following 3:
CONFIGURATION TOOL
ERROR LOG VIEWER
TROUBLESHOOTING
DIAGNOSTICS (SERVICE TOOLS)
2-1
UTILITIES
ERROR LOG VIEWER MENU
D Click on the Error Logs button.
The ”Welcome to the Advantage Workstation Logviewer Application” screen displays.
1. Select now the Terra Log Viewer. The Error Logs Viewer window displays.
1
250
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
75
5 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 011 – Common Service Desktop
2. Select the appropriate date and time for the review (start and end)
3. Select the logfile to review
4. Click on the Show Log button.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The logfile displays in the Log Data window
3
Note:
2
4
To filter the listed log entries, use the Filter log tool. Select one or more columns, enter the
filter cryteria (the text the colums shall contain)for these colums, and click on the Show
Results button.
D Click on another Logfile to review, or quit the Service Tools menu when done.
251
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
6 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 011 – Common Service Desktop
2-2
DIAGNOSTICS MENU
TROUBLESHOOTING
D Click on the Diagnostics icon. The Service Tools window displays.
1 Click to select/open the folder of the desired Service Tools
2 Click to select the desired Service Tools
You will be prompted to enter the root password once, prior to get access to the tools.
To access service tools, please enter the root password:
Ok
Type in the root password in the password field, and click on Ok when done.
The available Service Tools entries are as follows:
2-2-1 Database Management Menu
List patients in alphabetical order
List exams given the patient name
List exams given the patient internal number (pXX)
252
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
76
7 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 011 – Common Service Desktop
List series given the exams internal number (eXX)
List images given the series internal number (sXX)
Dump header of image
Create a compressed tarfile with images of series
Recover Database
View database recovery progress
2-2-2 Network Menu
List Hosts
Send DICOM echo
2-2-3 Postscript Printer Menu
View printer status
View Print queue
2-2-4 Dicom Print Menu
2-2-5 Dicom MOD Menu
Note:
Insert an initialized Maxoptix MOD media into the drive for successful completion of the test.
View DICOM MOD media status
2-2-6 CDR Media Menu
Note:
Insert an initialized Dicom CD media into the drive for successful completion of this test.
View CDR media status
2-2-7 Process Management Menu
Restart AW
List of running processes
Kill a process
Restart a process
View process size in KB
2-2-8 System Menu
Check partitioning
Create compressed crash logfile
View AW configuration
253
TROUBLESHOOTING
View printer status
View Print queue
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
8 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 011 – Common Service Desktop
2-3
CONFIGURATION MENU
This menu is detailed at Chapter 1, Job Card IST002
2-4
UTILITIES MENU
This menu is used for the following items configurations:
D Product Network Filters (PNF) management.
It allows you to enable or disable the network services locked by the AW internal Firewall.
D Insite 2.0 configuration for the Software Download (SWD) feature.
Note that Insite 1.0 is still used for InSite/iLinq/RCOC connectivity. Refer to Chapter 1, IST008.
D CCOW configuration
D SoftSwitch configuration
TROUBLESHOOTING
These items are detailed at Chapter 1, Job Card IST002
2-5
IMAGE QUALITY / CALIBRATION / REPLACEMENT / PM _DESCRIPTION
MENUS
Note:
Access to the Image Quality, Calibration, Replacement and PM Description features, is
not implemented in the present release.
77
254
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
JOB CARD TSG 012 – Create a Flash diskette for BIOS and Firmware
Time: 0 h 15 min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
1 of 8
The AW application has been fully validated for:
D HP XW8200 with the BIOS version 2.10
D HP XW8400 with the BIOS version 1.17
Any other further versions may work fine, but have not been verified. Therefore, after the replacement
of the Mother board (workstation swap), you should check and may need to flash the BIOS and
Firmware, to remain in a validated configuration.
1
CHECK THE BIOS AND FIRMWARE
D Power on the computer and press on <F10>to enter the BIOS setup.
D Check that the BIOS version is v2.10 (XW8200)
D Check that the BIOS version is 1.17 (XW8400)
Even though the current BIOS and Firmware versions of your workstation would be higher
than the above mentioned versions, we recommand that you downgrade to the validated
BIOS and Firmware versions.
D Shutdown and turn off the workstation.
2
CREATE A XW8200 FLASH DISKETTE
This step should be done only if you do not have a Flash diskette available. In order to do this, you
need to download from the AW–IB intranet web site onto your PC, or your AW workstation, the
appropriate ”iso file” (xw8200–bios210.dd or xw8200–bios210.zip) and create the Flash diskette.
Connect to the AW–IB Web site @ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com (AW Service Manuals page/
AW4.4 Service Manual)
2-1
From an XW8200 workstation
D Download the xw8200–bios210.dd (XW8200) file into the /tmp directory, (you may download it
first from the Web site to your laptop then ftp it to the AW workstation).
D Open a Command window and switch User to root
su – root [Return]
Enter root password
D Change to the /tmp directory
cd /tmp [Return]
D Insert a blank diskette (write enable) into the drive
Note:
Formatting the diskette is not necessary.
255
TROUBLESHOOTING
Note:
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
78
2 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 012 – Create a Flash diskette for BIOS and Firmware
D Copy the bios image file onto the floppy diskette
XW8200: dd if=xw8200–bios210.dd of=/dev/fd0 [Return]
D Extract the diskette when done, write protect it and label it.
It is ready for use with your AW workstation to flash the workstation’s BIOS and Firmware.
2-2
From a PC Personal Computer
Note:
In order to avoid your computer automatically deleting the ”.exe” and ”.bat” files when
unzipping the BIOS file package, some files extensions have been renamed.
You need to rename them with the right extension.
D Download the xw8200–bios210.zip file to your PC laptop.
D Unzip the xw8200–bios210.zip file (make folder).
D Rename COPYDISK.kaj to COPYDISK.EXE
D Rename ROMPAQ.kaj to ROMPAQ.BAT
D Execute (double click) the ROMPAQ.BAT
D Follow the prompts displayed on the screen to create your BIOS diskette
TROUBLESHOOTING
D Extract the diskette when done, write protect it and label it.
It is ready for use with your AW workstation to flash the workstation’s BIOS and Firmware.
3
FLASH THE BIOS AND FIRMWARE (XW8200 CASE)
D Insert the XW8200 BIOS flask diskette into the floppy drive
D Turn on the workstation. The system starts booting from the diskette.
Note:
DO NOT TURN OFF WORKSTATION while the BIOS is being flashed.
The boot screen displays for a while then displays text lines:
Starting MS–DOS
......................................
Then the Welcome window displays
Welcome to ROMPAQ
ROMPAQ Firmware upgrade utility, version X.XX
.......................................................
This utility reprograms the firmware or read–only memory (ROM) ....
OK = Enter
256
D Press the <Enter>
key to continue
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
3 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 012 – Create a Flash diskette for BIOS and Firmware
Then the Select a device window displays
Select a device
The following is a list of upgradable devices in your computer.
To select a device to upgrade, .....
Programmable devices:
HP System BIOS
Exit = Esc
OK = Enter
D Press the <Enter>
key to continue
or press the <Esc>
key to quit
Then the Select an image window displays
Select an image
The following is a list of available firmware images for the device ......
Device to reprogram: HP System BIOS
Current image: Version .....
Firmware images:
Version 2.08
D Press the <Enter>
key to continue
or press the <Esc>
key to abort
Note:
If BIOS 2.08 is already installed, you will get the following window displayed .
At this point, if your BIOS is already at the right level, you may abort the process.
Note !
!
The image you have selected is not newer than the current image.
Device to reprogram: HP System BIOS
Current image: Ver 2.08
Selected image: Ver 2.08
Do you still want to reprogram your firmware with this image ?
Yes = Enter
No = Esc
D Press the <Enter>
key to overwrite the
current BIOS ...
or
press the <Esc>
key to abort
An informational window displays:
Note !
i
A backup image of your current system ROM has been created.
Exit = Esc
OK = Enter
257
D Press the <Enter>
key to continue
TROUBLESHOOTING
Exit = Esc
OK = Enter
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
4 of 8
JOB CARD TSG 012 – Create a Flash diskette for BIOS and Firmware
The message ”Please Wait” displays for a moment, followed by a ”caution” window.
Caution !
!
If you continue, your firmware will be reprogrammed. Once the reprogramming
of the firware has begun, it cannot be interrupted ....
Device to reprogram : .....
Exit = Esc
OK = Enter
D Press the <Enter>
key to start ”flashing”
BIOS
or press the <Esc>
key to abort
BIOS reprogramming begins. !!! CAUTION: Do not turn off or reboot your workstation !!!
Reprogramming firmware
Do not...reboot or power cycle your machine !
When BIOS has been reprogrammed, the following informational window displays.
Note !
TROUBLESHOOTING
i
The system ROM has been successfully reprogrammed.
Exit = Esc
OK = Enter
D Press the <Enter>
key to continue
The following informational window displays next.
Note !
D Press the <Esc>
key to exit
?
Do you want to reprogram another device ?
Press Enter to .......
Exit = Esc
OK = Enter
The following window displays:
0
1
Please remove the ROMPAQ diskette and cycle power on your system now.
D Eject the Flash diskette and cycle power on your workstation to reboot. Your BIOS is ready.
258
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
79
JOB CARD TSG 012 – Create a Flash diskette for BIOS and Firmware
4
5 of 8
CREATE A XW8400 FLASH CDROM
XW8400 BIOS is now on Cdrom.
This step should be done only if you do not have a Flash Cdrom available. In order to do this, you
need to download from the AW–IB intranet web site onto your PC, or your AW workstation, the
appropriate ”iso file” (xw8400–bios117.dd ) and create the Flash Cdrom.
Connect to the AW–IB Web site @ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com (AW Service Manuals page/
AW4.4 Service Manual)
4-1
From an XW8400 workstation
4-2
From a PC Personal Computer
The instructions are depending on the CD/DVD recorder utility you have on your PC.
You shall record the CD as an ISO CD.
5
FLASH THE BIOS AND FIRMWARE (XW8400 CASE)
Note:
The BIOS Flash Cdrom is not a bootable Cdrom.
You will have to execute the following commands to flash your BIOS:
D
D
D
D
D
D
Turn on the workstation.
At startup, press <F10> to enter setup
Select language for BIOS instructions (i.e: English)
Insert the XW8400 BIOS flash Cdrom into the DVD drive
In menu File, select Flash System ROM, then Optical drive
Press <F10> for entering the upgrade process.
ROM Flash system
Select a file :
7D5_0117.BIN
F10= Accept , ESC = Cancel
259
TROUBLESHOOTING
D Download the xw8400–bios117.iso (XW8200) file into the /tmp directory, (you may download it
first from the Web site to your laptop then ”ftp” it to the AW workstation).
D Insert a blank Cdrom into the drive
D Open a Command window and switch User to root
su – root [Return]
Enter root password
D Change to the /tmp directory
cd /tmp [Return]
D Create the BIOS Flash Cdrom.
cdrecord dev=ATA:1,0,0 xw8400–bios117.iso [Return]
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
80
JOB CARD TSG 012 – Create a Flash diskette for BIOS and Firmware
D Press <F10> for accepting the upgrade process, after having selected the appropriate file
(7D5 0117.BIN in our example for BIOS 1.17).
ROM Flash system
Are you sure you want to
Flash System ROM ?
786D5_v1.xx –> v1.17
F10= Accept , ESC = Cancel
D Press <F10> for accepting the upgrade process.
Note:
DO NOT TURN OFF WORKSTATION while the BIOS is being flashed.
D Once the flash process has completed, the following message displays
Success
TROUBLESHOOTING
System ROM Flash was successful.
Press any key to continue
D Press any key to exit from the Flash System ROM menu.
D In menu File, select Save Changes and Exit
Save Changes and Exit
Are you sure you want to
Save Changes and Exit ?
F10= Yes , ESC = No
D Press <F10> to save changes and exit from BIOS menu.
The workstation reboots.
You can eject the ROM Flash Cdrom from the drive.
Check that the BIOS v1.17 displays now in the bottom left of the screen.
260
6 of 8
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
CHAPTER 5 – DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY PROCEDURES
1
OVERVIEW
This document contains directions to be followed when replacing the computer box, or one of the
following sub–assemblies located inside the computer box.
CAUTION
2
All defective parts must be returned with no delay.
Parts which are not returned will be charged to the Region !!!
TOOLS REQUIRED
D 5 mm Phillips screwdriver.
D 5 mm flat–head screwdriver.
D Grounding wristband.
3
PREREQUISITES
If the workstation is switched on, exit the application. Select ”Logout” from the sdc root menu.
D See Chapter 3 for various other methods of shutting the system down.
D Wait for the ”Power down” message ( 30 sec) or automatic computer switch off.
D Switch off the monitor using the switch on the front.
D Switch off the computer. Switch off the SCSI device(s).
D Disconnect the cables:
– Keyboard – CPU box ; Mouse – CPU box
– Mains power supply – CPU box
DISASS. / REAS.
PROCEDURES
– Ethernet network – CPU box
– Monitor – CPU box
– SCSI – CPU box
4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The boards and hard disk drives contain electronic components that are extremely sensitive to static
electricity. Do not touch the components themselves or any metal part.
Wear a grounding wrist strap when handling the drive assemblies, boards or cards.
5
PROCEDURES
NOTICE
On–line access to HP Service Manuals and other additional information can be
obtained from the AW–IB intranet site @ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com
261
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
DISASS. / REAS.
PROCEDURES
5-1
5-2
sm 5178823-100
HP Service Manual disassembly/reassembly procedures
ITEM
HP XW8200 SERVICE MANUAL
5124262–100
HP XW8400 SERVICE MANUAL
5180567–100
POWER ON/OFF AND
INTERNAL ACCESS
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 66
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 53
POWER SWITCH ASSY
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 74
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 61
SETTING SCSI ID ON HDD
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 92
N/A
HARD DISK DRIVES
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 91
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 82
DVD / CD–R DRIVE
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 87
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 77
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 89
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 80
POWER SUPPLY
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 74
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 63
SYSTEM FAN
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 75
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 74
GRAHICS & PCI CARDS
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 78
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 69
MEMORY MODULES
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 76
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 65
SYSTEM BATTERY
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 86
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 76
SYSTEM BOARD
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 101
CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 92
Parts replacement procedures
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
KEYBOARD
REPLACEMENT
The defective keyboard does not need to be returned.
CAUTION: The FRU keyboard is delivered with a set of safety labels in different languages. DO NOT remove the existing English safety sticker. Use the
sticker in the appropriate language, and just stick upon the English sticker.
This step is mandatory for the Chinese market to be CCC compliant.
DVD / CD–R DRIVE REPLACEMENT
Refer to HP Service manual, chapter 4, page 87 for disassembly/reassembly
instructions and precautions.
Ship the defective unit to the return address mentioned within the package,
with no delay, using the ”Supplier Warranty Program process”.
Refer to Section 5–4 for details
262
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
MOUSE REPLACEMENT
The defective mouse does not need to be returned.
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
REPLACEMENT
The defective Floppy disk drive does not need to be returned.
HARD DISK DRIVE REPLACEMENT
Make sure to properly set the
jumpers on the new disk or CD–R drive, as set on the defective drive.
Refer to HP Service manual for more details.
Note : New hard disks may need to be formatted. Refer to Chapter 4,
TSG004 for details.
Ship the defective unit to the return address mentioned within the package,
with no delay, using the ”Supplier Warranty Program process”.
Refer to Section 5–4 for details
Note: When replacing a defective CPU box, you may want to keep the hard
disk drive(s) if operational, in order to avoid having to reload the software and
loose the exams stored on the disks.
Refer to the HP Service Manual, chapter 4, page 91 for disassembly/reassembly instructions and precautions.
5-3
Computer box replacement procedures
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER BOX
REPLACEMENT
When replacing a defective CPU box, you may want to keep the hard disk
drive(s) if operational, in order to avoid having to reload the software and
loose the exams stored on the disks.
Refer to the HP Service Manual, for disassembly/reassembly instructions and
precautions.
HARD DISK DRIVES CASE
WARNING : Disks cage guides may have sharp edges.
Take care removing and/or inserting disks, to avoid injuring
hands, and/or wear protection gloves !!!
COMPUTER BOX
REPLACEMENT
When replacing a defective CPU box, you may want to keep the additional
Ethernet card if operational, in order to avoid having to request your OLC for a
recalculation of all the license keys.
ETHERNET CARD CASE
Refer to the HP Service Manual, for disassembly/reassembly instructions and
precautions.
263
DISASS. / REAS.
PROCEDURES
COMPUTER BOX REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER BOX
REPLACEMENT
PROCEDURE
FOREWORD
1: Unpack the CPU box carefully, in order not to damage the packaging,
which will have to be used to return the defective unit.
2: Your AW CPU box should at any time be labelled with a rating plate to
mention the CE marking and other Model and Serial numbers.
The FRU computer box is delivered with 3 blank rating plates, instructions and
1 blank ICD card to be filled up. Store these parts cautiously in a safe place.
They are necessary for the new Computer Box.
CPU BOX REPLACEMENT
Note: Your Computer Box FRU unit may also be delivered with an extra
Keyboard and a box of accessories.
1 : DO NOT LEAVE on–site the Cdroms and other unnecessary items that
may be contained in the workstation’s FRU package. Some of these
Cdroms, if improperly used by the customer, might lead to software corruption
(see 5–1).
2 : Make sure to write on the spare Rating Plate of the swapped CPU box
the proper information for your site (see 5–5) .
Stick the rating plate on the new CPU box.
3 : Fill up the ICD card with the necessary information and send it asap to
the GIB administration, so that the serial number and other appropriate info of
the new CPU box is properly entered in the
Global Installed Base database.
4: If you return the hard disks with the defective unit, you should whenever
possible erase all patient data stored on the disks.
DISASS. / REAS.
PROCEDURES
5: Make sure you return the locker key together with the defective workstation. Stick it with tape on the CPU back, key holder.
6: Make sure to remove the extra memory option modules before returning the defective workstation.
7: Carefully pack up the defective CPU box, making sure that NO parts is
missing. In the other case, your region will be charged for the missing parts.
Note : If an extra keyboard is delivered within the workstation FRU, it can be
kept on–site, and does not need to be returned.
8 : Ship the defective unit to the return address mentioned within the package, with no delay, using the ”Supplier Warranty Program process”.
264
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER BOX
REPLACEMENT
PROCEDURE
NEW CPU BOX CHECKS
(continued)
The AW FRU CPU box you have received, may not have the correct BIOS
and proper BIOS settings.
The following items should be checked on the new CPU box:
1: Check Firmware and BIOS. Refer to Chapter 4, TSG012 : Section 2 and
flash Firmware and BIOS if necessary
2: Memory Add–on option : Check that you have reinstalled the additional
memory modules from the old CPU box, if applicable.
3: Your new CPU box is delivered with a basic Linux Red Hat loaded from
the HP factory.
If you choose not to reinstall the hard disk drives from the defective unit into
the new unit, you will need to proceed with a complete software reload L.F.C.
(OS and AW software).
Refer to chapter 1, Job Card IST011.
5-4
CPU box swap. Do not leave on site the following items
D Case 1 : The FRU CPU box is a new workstation:
It may be delivered with an extra keyboard and a box of accessories.
It is also delivered with new CE rating plates, an ICD card, and a service instructions document.
– Keep the extra keyboard (if applicable) for spare.
– Dispose of all other unnecessary items . DO NOT LEAVE these items ON SITE !!!!
5-5
CPU box swap. Fill up the new CE rating plate
************************ WARNING ****************************
Medical Equipment must be acurately labelled in order to comply with international
and local regulations. Make sure to carefully follow the instructions below, in order
to properly label your replacement FRU workstation.
The CE rating plate must be sticked to the workstation’s casing. It has to be carefully filled up in order
to be consistent with the Model number, Serial number, and licenseId number and AW software key.
Use a permanent ink pen, and write the corresponding numbers on the rating plate, before sticking it
up on the CPU box casing.
265
DISASS. / REAS.
PROCEDURES
D Case 2 : The FRU CPU box is already a repaired workstation.
Therefore, it is not delivered with a keyboard and a box of accessories.
It is just delivered with new CE rating plates, and an ICD card, and service instructions.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Write Device name here: AW VolumeShare 2
XXXXX
Write Model number here
Model number: xxxxxx
Serial number: xxxxxx
License ID number: xxxxxxx
CE 0459
Write LicenseID
number here
GE Medical Systems
<ADDRESS
See Serial number at the rear
of CPU box
FIELD (BUC or MKE)>
Only if Serial
number
greater or equal
to 532
D 1 : Model number : This number is 5117866–3 (non–ROHS) or 5117866–43 (ROHS) for the
production XW8200 and 5183547-32 for XW8400.
Note : Do not use model number 5117866-16 which is dedicated to the XW8200 FRU station
(no AW software loaded) and 5183547-25 dedicated to the XW8400 FRU.
D 2 : Serial number : This number can be found at the rear and on top of the CPU box.
D 3 : LicenseId number. Open a Command window and type in : licenseId [Return]
OR
Click Admin / Service Tools / Display Config
The AW License key number, as well as the license keys for the optional applications corresponding to the
LicenseId number of your new workstation, can be delivered to you by your OLC.
Call your OLC with SO (FDO) and site’s SystemID number to get the new license keys.
DISASS. / REAS.
PROCEDURES
However, you may decide to reinstall in the new CPU box, the additional Ethernet board of your old CPU
box, in order to keep the same license keys.
You may also decide to reinstall in the new CPU box, the Hard disk drive(s) of your old CPU box, in order to
save existing images and/or avoid reinstalling the software.
Refer to Computer Box Replacement procedures section 5–3
You can get information on your workstation’s license keys by connecting to the E–LICENSE site at:
http://egems.gehealthcare.com/elicense/idex.jsp
5-6
Fill up the new ICD card
You have just swapped your computer box. You must fill up the ICD card and send it back to the GIB
organization, in order to have your new CPU box registered in GIB database, as well as the
defective one uninstalled.
Carefully write down all necessary installation and uninstallation information, such as Serial Numbers,
System IDs etc .. of the new and old CPU boxes, and send back the ICD sheets.
The information about the uninstalled CPU box, can be written at the rear of the installation card, if no
uninstallation sheet is available on the ICD card.
5-7
Send back the defective unit
Send back the defective CPU box, Hard Disk drive or DVD/CD–R drive as follows
266
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
WARNING : Make sure that NO PART is missing inside the defective CPU box, before sending it
back to the address mentioned on the delivery package.
Any missing part will be charged to the region !!!!
The defective unit (or disk drive) must be sent back through the ”SWAP (Supplier Warranty Program)
process”.
Fill the red label identifying the defective unit with the following information:
D GEMS part number
D Job number
D Failure description :
i.e : e–DiagTools summary if appropriate.
D Workstation Serial number ( even for disk drives returned separately)
D FE contact name and ID number
DISASS. / REAS.
PROCEDURES
D SWAP/FOI/FOA : Cross Swap Box.
267
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
DISASS. / REAS.
PROCEDURES
Blank page.
268
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
RENEWAL PARTS
CHAPTER 6 – RENEWAL PARTS
269
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
RENEWAL PARTS
Blank page.
270
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
ABBREVIATIONS
ITEM
NO.
–
–6
FRU
Not illustrated.
Item No. 6 not illustrated.
Field Replaceable Unit.
Y
Critical.
N
Not available.
REP
Y
Repairable.
QTY
PL
AR
APP
Previously listed as an assembly or subassembly.
As required.
Applies to.
Viewing direction.
Renewal Parts
ROHS
WARNING
Removal Of Hazardous Substances (see page 266)
REMINDER: ALL DEFECTIVE PARTS (EVEN NON–REPARABLE PARTS) MUST
BE RETURNED THROUGH THE USUAL DEFECTIVE PARTS PROCESS.
IN THE OTHER CASE, EXTRA COSTS WILL BE CHARGED TO THE REGIONS.
271
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION FRU LIST
ITEM
NO.
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
FRU REP
QTY
1 2 3 4 5
–
HP XW8400 WORKSTATION
–
1
5183547-25
Y
S XW8400 FRU STATION (W/O KEYBOARD & W/O MOUSE)
1
–
2
5183547-35
Y
S XW8400 FRU STATION LOW TIER FOR SENO ADVANTAGE
1
–
3
5183547-4
Y
S STANDARD BLACK/SILVER US ENGLISH USB KEYBOARD
1
–
4
5183547-14
Y
S BLACK 3 BUTTONS EMC ENHANCED MOUSE USB
1
–
5
5183547-15
Y
S 73GB SAS 15K RPM DISK DRIVE
1
–
6
5183547-16
Y
S DUAL VGA Y–CABLE ADAPTER FOR NVIDIA NVS285
1
–
7
5183547-17
Y
S DUAL DVI Y–CABLE ADAPTER FOR NVIDIA NVS285
1
–
8
5183547-18
Y
S 800 WATT POWER SUPPLY
1
–
9
5183547-19
Y
S REAR CHASSIS/MEMORY FAN ASSEMBLY
1
– 10
5183547-20
Y
S SINGLE 1GB FBD DDR2–667 DIMM MEMORY MODULE
1
– 11
5183547-36
Y
S SINGLE 2GB FBD DDR2–667 DIMM MEMORY MODULE
1
– 12
5183547-21
Y
S 3.5” 1.44MB FLOPPY DISKETTE DRIVE
1
– 13
5183547-22
Y
S 5.25” DVD+/–R/RW/ROM CD–R/RW/ROM DRIVE
1
– 14
5183547-23
Y
S NVIDIA NVS285 PCI–E 128MB GRAPHICS CARD
1
– 15
5183547-34
Y
S NVIDIA NVS285 PCI–E 128MB (NEW REVISION) GRAPHICS CARD
1
– 16
5183547-24
Y
S SINGLE PORT GIGABIT PCI ETHERNET CARD
1
– 17
5183547-26
Y
S 146GB SAS 15K RPM DISK DRIVE
2
– 18
5117866–21
Y
S S HP XW8200 / XW8400 LSI 20320 ULTRA 320 SCSI CARD
1
–
1
HP XW8200 WORKSTATION
– 19
5117866–16
Y
S HP XW8200 CPU BOX (W/O KEYBOARD & W/O MOUSE)
1
– 20
5117866–10
Y
S S HP XW8200 3 1/2 FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
1
– 21
5117866–5
Y
S S HP XW8200 73GB SCSI U320 15K RPM (IMAGES) HARD DISK
2
– 22
5117866–6
Y
S S HP XW8200 36GB SCSI U320 15K RPM (SYSTEM) HARD DISK
1
– 23
5117866–11
Y
S S HP XW8200 DVD+/–R/RW CD–RW IDE MULTI DRIVE
1
– 24
5148992
Y
S S DVD–RAM DRIVE FOR HP XW8200
1
– 25
5117866–9
Y
S S HP XW8200 1.0GB DIMM DDR2–400 MODULE
2
– 26
5117866–7
Y
S S HP XW8200 600W POWERSUPPLY ASSY
1
– 27
5117866–8
Y
S S HP XW8200 REAR CHASSIS SYSTEM FAN
1
– 28
5117866–14
Y
S S HP XW8200 NVIDIA 280NVS PCI–E 64MB GRAPHICS CARD
1
272
A
P
P
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION FRU LIST (CONTINUED)
ITEM
NO.
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
FRU REP
QTY
1 2 3 4 5
– 29
5117866–42
Y
S S HP XW8200 (* ROHS) NVIDIA 285NVS PCI–E GRAPHICS CARD
1
– 30
5117866–15
Y
S S HP XW8200 SINGLE PORT GIGABIT PCI ETHERNET CARD
1
– 31
5117866–41
Y
S S HP XW8200 (* ROHS) SINGLE PORT GIGABIT PCI ETHERNET CARD
1
– 32
5117866–18
Y
S
1
– 33
5117866–19
Y
S HP XW8200 DUAL DVI Y–CABLE ADAPTER FOR NVIDIA NVS280/NVS285
1
– 34
5117866–12
Y
S HP XW8200 3 BUTTONS MOUSE USB (BLACK)
1
– 35
5117866–13
Y
S HP XW8200 US ENGLISH KEYBOARD USB (BLACK)
1
HP XW8200 DUAL VGA Y–CABLE ADAPTER FOR NVIDIA NVS280/NVS285
–
1
MONITORS AND CABLES
– 36
5172850–3
Y
S 19” NEC1990SXI LCD FLAT PANEL COLOR MONITOR
1
– 37
5117545–2
Y
S 19” NEC1980SXI LCD FLAT PANEL COLOR MONITOR
1
– 38
5177284
Y
S DVI–D TO DVI–D VIDEO CABLE FOR NEC MONITOR
1
– 39
2304737–2
Y
S DVI TO HD15M–VGA VIDEO CABLE FOR NEC MONITOR
1
–
1
SOFTWARE
– 40
5183629–3
Y
S AW4.4_04 FAST LOAD–FROM–COLD DVD–ROM FOR XW8400
1
– 41
5198547–3
Y
S AW4.4_04 FAST LOAD–FROM–COLD DVD–ROM FOR XW8200
1
– 42
5183943–2
Y
S GEHC OS FOR AW4.4_04 DVD–ROM
1
– 43
5183764–3
Y
S AW4.4_04 SOFTWARE + ON–LINE DOC CDROM
1
– 44
5183736
Y
S HP XW8400 FLASH UTILITY CDROM (BIOS 1.17)
1
– 45
5124247–4
Y
S HP XW8200 FLASH UTILITY FLOPPY (BIOS 2.10)
1
– 46
2396486-5
Y
S HP HARDWARE DIAGNOSTICS CDROM
1
– 47
5183748–3
Y
S SERVICE DOCUMENTATION CDROM
1
– 48
2396529
Y
S AW DICOM DEMO IMAGES CDROM #1
1
– 49
2396530
Y
S AW DICOM DEMO IMAGES CDROM #2
1
–
1
CCOW / SOFTSWITCH OPTION
– 50
5183658-2
Y
S CCOW / SOFTSWITCH ENABLER SW CDROM #1
1
– 51
5183922
Y
S CCOW CONTEXT MANAGER SW CDROM #2
1
* See ROHS explanation page 272
273
A
P
P
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION FRU LIST (CONTINUED)
ITEM
NO.
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
FRU REP
QTY
1 2 3 4 5
–
1
APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE
–
WARNING: APPLICATIONS HAVE BEEN UPDATED FOR THE AW4.4 RELEASE.
!!!! DO NOT USE CDROMS FROM PREVIOUS AW4.1 OR 4.2 RELEASES !!!!
THE FOLLOWING APPLICATIONS RELEASES ARE GIVEN FOR REFERENCE
ONLY, AND ARE THE MINIMUM RELEASES COMPATIBLE WITH THE PRESENT AW
RELEASE. !!! DO NOT USE PREVIOUS RELEASES !!!
ALWAYS USE THE LATEST COMPATIBLE RELEASES DELIVERED TO YOUR SITE.
–
APPLICATIONS SUPPORTED WITH THE AW4.4_04 RELEASE
1
– 52
5183652-2
Y
S VOLUME VIEWER 3 APPS SOFTWARE CDROM (VXTL_7.4)
1
– 53
5142880–5
Y
S REPORTING TOOLS 1.7 CDROM
1
– 54
5184668-2
Y
S CT APPS AND FUSION APPS DVD–ROM (SEE DETAILS PAGE 272)
1
– 55
5184574-2
Y
S MR APPLICATIONS DVD–ROM (SEE DETAILS PAGE 272)
1
– 56
5184810-2
Y
S XRAY APPLICATIONS DVD–ROM (SEE DETAILS PAGE 272)
1
– 57
5184916-2
Y
S PET APPLS AND NETWORKING APPS DVD–ROM (SEE DETAILS PAGE 272)
1
–
1
ETHERNET
– 58
5121195
Y
S CABLE RJ45 CAT5 (4 METERS)
–
1
1
ETHERNET CROSS–OVER CABLES
– 59
2228811
Y
S CROSS–OVER CABLE RJ45 CAT5 (1 METER) (3.3 FT)
1
– 60
2212538
Y
S CROSS–OVER CABLE RJ45 CAT5 (4.5 METER) (14.8 FT)
1
– 61
2215029–5
N
S CROSS–OVER CABLE RJ45 CAT5 (50 METER) (164 FT)
1
–
1
DICOM MAGNETO–OPTICAL DISK OPTION
– 62
2382663
Y
S SONY SMO–S551–SD MOD DRIVE PACKAGE
1
– 63
2142726
Y
S 1.3 GB MAXOPTIX MOD DISK
1
N
S 2.6 GB MAXOPTIX MOD DISK
– 64
–
1
SCSI CONNECTION CABLES
– 65
2160141
Y
S SCSI CABLE WIDE 68 PINS / 50 PINS CENTRO 6’
1
– 66
2160141–2
Y
S SCSI CABLE WIDE 68 PINS / 50 PINS CENTRO 3’
1
– 67
2160141–3
Y
S SCSI CABLE WIDE 68 PINS / 50 PINS CENTRO 10
1
274
A
P
P
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION FRU LIST (CONTINUED)
ITEM
NO.
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
FRU REP
QTY
1 2 3 4 5
–
1
AC POWER CORDS
– 68
E8812AE
S OPTIONAL US POWER STRIP
Y
–
1
1
INSITE OPTION
– 69
2371128
Y
– 70
2245794
Y
S
S RS232 CABLE DB9F/DB25M
1
GLOBAL MULTITECH MODEM (EUROPE/ASIA/AMERICAS)
1
275
A
P
P
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
ROHS : Removal Of Hazardous Substances
Manufacturers of computers are no longer authorized to deliver devices (boards, hard disks, etc ...)
which contain ”hazardous substances” such as lead.
ROHS compliance primarily affects the HP XW8200 station.
However, the non–ROHS devices spare parts (containing hazardous substances) that we currently
have in stock can still be delivered to maintain your equipments.
D The first devices without ”hazardous substances” that you receive (from October 2005) are the
hard disks drives.
These devices are fully compatible with the current AW4.4 software, so nothing should be done, and
moreover the part numbers for the disks will remain the same as the non–ROHS Hard disks.
D The next devices that you receive (from April 2006), both in new XW8200 system deliveries, or as
spare parts is the NVIDIA NVS285 graphics card and the Single Gigabit Ethernet card.
D Therefore, when ordering a replacement Graphic card or Ethernet card, you may either receive the
original card (non–ROHS) as long as there are some in stock, or receive the new ROHS card
once the stock of older board is used. When older cards are no longer available, and only new
ROHS board can be delivered to you.
Note that a comment in the Spare parts database may warn you to order at the same time the
AW4.2_07 release software distribution. This is of course only applicable to AW4.2P stations.
Applications DVDs : Contents details
5184668–2 : CT apps and Fusion apps DVDrom (including):
Smartscore 3.5_L_4014 – CT Perfusion 2.6.9 – Fusion Apps 1.3 – CardIQ Function 1.0.3
Advantage SIM 7.4 – Dentascan 3.0.58 theta – Advantage 4D 1.4_12/1.0.24 – BMD 7.06
5184574–2 : MR applications DVDrom (including):
Functool 4.5.1 – MASS 6.1 – CV Flow 4.1 – MR Pasting 1.1.6
Report Card 3.6.1 – Cadstream 4.1.4 – Brainwave 1.6
5184810–2 : XRAY applications DVDrom (including):
3D XR 2.0_12 – Advantage Paste 1.7 – Advantage Straight 1.06 – Advantage Paste 2.0.2
Cardiac XRay 1.2 – Innova 3D XR 1.0.2
5184916–2 : PET appls and networking apps DVDrom (including):
ECTb 2.6.1 – Remote Access 1.1
276
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
WARNING
1
DASM–LCAM AND DASM–VDB FILMING INTERFACE ARE NO LONGER
SUPPORTED WITH AW4.4
INTERCONNECTION
None. Supported devices are network printers only.
CAUTION
The Print Application Entity title (A.E.T) of AW to be declared to the Dicom
printers is PR_<hostname> and not the Hostname of AW as for Dicom hosts.
i.e.: For an AW whose hostname is adw6 :
Dicom AET = adw6
Dicom Print AET = PR_adw6
If necessary, the Print A.E. T of AW can be changed by editing the following file:
/export/home/sdc/app–defaults/dicom_print/dprint.cfg
See Section 3–4 for details.
2
TROUBLE SHOOTING
2-1
Laser Imager Error Code
(See LASER CAMERA vendor’s documentation).
2-2
Error and Status Messages
Errors occurring when clicking on the PRINT button:
D Empty film not printed.
D Disk is full.
Please wait that some queued jobs have been printed and retry later.
D Internal input/output error has occurred.
Please retry or clear page.
D Cannot spool job for printing.
Please retry or restart Filmer.
The following status messages will appear in a window while attempting to print. Correct the indicated
condition and the system will retry automatically.
D SUPPLY MAGAZINE EMPTY
D RECEIVE MAGAZINE FULL
D SUPPLY MAGAZINE MISSING
277
FILMING
CHAPTER 7 – FILMING
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
FILMING
D RECEIVE MAGAZINE MISSING
D SUPPLY MAGAZINE OPEN
D RECEIVE MAGAZINE OPEN
D TOP COVER OPEN
The following messages may appear while attempting to print:
D Laser camera has been reserved by another user, or busy.
– Please wait.
The following status messages will appear in a window while attempting to print. Correct the indicated
condition and the system will retry automatically.
D Printing paused.
– Laser camera has been reserved by another user.
– Please wait.
3
CHECKS AND UTILITIES
3-1
Communication Checks
Communication from the Advantage Workstation to the Printer can be checked by opening a
Command window and typing in :
ping <IP address of the printer> [Return]
i.e : ping 192.3.45.11 [Return]
3-2
Utility Commands
Click on the Filmer button
278
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
sm 5178823-100
The Clipboard
window
pops up
Information on
images to be printed
The formats available
depend on the Printer(s)
installed
Number of copies
selected
Printer Settings
& multi–copies
Printer Name
Filming queue
Save
Export Data
Print
Print current page
Before printing is done:
The image and associated icon are stored in a ”reserved space” under either:
/export/home1/sdc_image_pool/reserved
279
FILMING
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
FILMING
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
The ”reserved spaces” are of the form IMSxxxxxx.
In order to know which of them contains the image(s) to print, type in:
strings .IMS* | more [Return]
You should find a line like IMSsexzxxxx and filmer.xxxxx. To know what they contain, type in:
cd IMSsexxxxx [Return]
ls –al[Return]
You should find ”n” files called dicomImage1 to dicomImageN corresponding on the format selected
(format 4x1 gives 4 lines) and ”n” files called voilut1x to voilut Nx, corresponding to the associated
Lookup tables
If image save has been selected too, you should find ”n” files called saveImage0 to saveImageN.
Note that these last files are Dicom files and can be directly handled accordingly (moved, copied,
declared into the Database etc...).
Note:
The ”reserved spaces” are reset at each ”Restart Software” or each Reboot.
You can view the exact image(s) that will be on the film by using the command:
imadump dicomImageX [Return] where X is the number of the image
To quit, press simultaneously on <CTRL> and <C> keys.
For more information on the imadump utility, (non–square image formats etc...), type:
imadump –h [Return]
When printing is started:
The image is spooled in a ”reserved space” under either:
/export/home1/sdc_image_pool/reserved
The ”reserved spaces” are of the form IMSxxxxxx.
In order to know which of them contains the image(s) to print, type in:
strings .IMS* | more [Return]
Note:
If ”n” print jobs have been started and are queued (not printed yet), you will find ”n” reserved
spaces belonging to the PrintManager.
You should find line(s) with PrintManager.xxxxx. To know what they contain, type in:
ls [Return]
You should find ”n” files called imgXXXXXX. They will remain until they have been printed, even
though the ”Restart software” button is pressed or the workstation rebooted.
You should also find in each PrintManager reserved space a file called <printer_name>.dev in which
you can review the settings and characteristics of the printer(s) declared to your workstation.
To have a chance to see this short–lived information, you must pause printing by clicking on the
Filming Queue button, To review this file, type in:
more <printer_name>.dev [Return]
You can view the exact image(s) that will be on the film by using the following commands:
filmdump imgXXXXXX – display [Return]
where X is the number of the image
To quit, press simultaneously on <CTRL> and <C> keys.
280
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
sm 5178823-100
If you don’t want the print to occur, you can delete the dicomImageX files from /export/home/sdc/films
when done with reviewing.
cd /export/home/sdc/film [Return]
rm dicomImageX [Return]
Where X is the number of the image
For more information on the filmdump utility, (non–square image formats etc...), type:
filmdump –h [Return]
Note:
You can also find files called imgXXXXXX.ps if they have been created for a postscript printer.
In this case, to review them, use the gv (ghostview) command and you DO NOT need to run
the filmdump command before:
i.e.: gv imgXXXXX.ps [Return]
When printing is done:
The ”reserved spaces” that belong to the PrintManager are reset.
3-3
Accessing and using the log file
Note:
The Logfiles are periodically and automatically cleaned up by the system ”cron” to prevent
them from growing up, consuming disk space.
Change to the logfiles directory
cd /export/home/sdc/logfiles [Return]
To read the contents of the prslog, printserverlog, printManagerlog, dicomPrintlog,
FilmComposerProxylog, or lcbuildlog
i.e : more prslog [Return]
Note:
You can as well use the command display_logfile –f <logfile_name> which also takes in
account and packages for easier readind the older compressed logfiles
(i.e.: browserlog.WedSep1715:15:04.Z).
Note:
FilmComposerProxylog and lcbuildlog are used to ensure compatibility with the batch Filming
of the Advanced applications such as Volume Analysis, Navigator, etc ...
3-4
Changing the Print AET of your AW
If necessary, the default Print A.E. T of AW can be changed by editing the following file:
D vi /export/home/sdc/app–defaults/dicom_print/dprint.cfg [Return]
D Uncomment the following line and replace the syntax ”My application entity title” by the name you
want to give
#applicationEntityTitle=”My application entity title”
becomes
applicationEntityTitle=”AWPrintAET” for example
(do not forget the capital E, the capital T and the ” ”)
D Save and quit
<Esc> :wq! [Return]
281
FILMING
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
FILMING
3-5
sm 5178823-100
Older DICOM Printers
For former software releases of Sterling Dicom printers (if the result of the print is black & white
reversed) it may be necessary to add the MONOCHROME2 interpretation in order to correct this
issue.
In order to do this, follow the steps:
D Login as sdc if not already logged in, and switch user to root:
su – root [Return]
Password :operator [Return]
D Change to the Prefs directory by typing:
cd /export/home/sdc/Prefs [Return]
D Edit the SdCDicomPrintConfig file with the vi editor or any suitable editor
and add the following line at the end of the file:
(make sure to type a capital S, C, D, P and C for this file name)
vi SdCDicomPrintConfig [Return]
# # Dicom Print SOP Class Attributes Configuration File
## If you want to modify the Film Session, Film Box or Image Box SOP
Classes
# default attributes, you just have to remove the ’#’ character in front of
:
## For Film Session : set fs_
# For Film Box
: set fb_
# For Image Box
: set im_
.......................
# Border denisty (2010,0100)
# BLACK
# WHITE
#set fb_border_density ”BLACK”
# Empty image density (2010,0110)
# BLACK
..........................
# Photometric interpretation (0028,0004)
# RGB
# MONOCHROME1
# MONOCHROME2
#
#set im_photo_interpretation ”MONOCHROME1”
set im_photo_interpretation ”MONOCHROME2”
file.
<––– Add this line at the end of the
Make sure to type it right (NO # at the begining of the line, NO space between MONOCHROME
and 2).
D Update and quit.
282
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
CHAPTER 8 – OPTIONS
Note:
This chapter gives you additional information about all options supported on AW4.4.
There you can find information such as jumper settings and diagnostics for the hardware
options and uninstallation procedure for both hardware and software options.
All installation procedures are detailed in Chapter 1, Job cards.
SECTION 1:
DICOM MOD drive option (read–only)
Non SCSI Hardware options
SECTION 2:
Second monitor option
SECTION 3:
memory add–on option
SECTION 4:
DVD–RAM option
Applications (Software options)
SECTION 5:
Volume Viewer Applications package
SECTION 6:
Reporting Tool Application package
SECTION 7:
CT and Fusion Applications package
SECTION 8:
MR Applications package
SECTION 9:
X–Ray Applications package
SECTION 10:
PET and Networking Applications package
SECTION 11:
Other software options package
Other options
SECTION 12:
InSite option
SECTION 13:
Color Printer option (DIA)
SECTION 14:
Greyscale Printer option (DIA)
283
OPTIONS
SCSI Hardware options
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
1
sm 5178823-100
DICOM OPTICAL DISK DRIVE
The Dicom MOD drive is supported read–only with AW4.4
OPTIONS
D The Dicom MOD drives from older AW upgrades,.supported with AW4.4 are:
– Maxoptics T5 2600* (Star Series, Firmware 4.5 or up)
– Sony SMO S551–SD 5.2GB
Note:
The only 2 medias which can be used with AW are:
2.6 GB:
2.3GB – 512 Bytes/Sector formatted: DIA P/N: E80011NC
1.3 GB:
1.2GB – 512 Bytes/Sector formatted: DIA P/N: E80011NB
All other medias (1024 or 2048 Bytes/sector) are not compatible.
1-1
Physical Connection
CAUTION
The HP XW8400 workstation uses SAS hard disk drives, therefore it does not have a
built–in SCSI controller. If your site is upgrading from an older AW and requires that
you reinstall the Dicom MOD drive (read only), you need to use a SCSI adaption kit .
CAT NR = M80501SC. Refer to chapter 1, IST004 for details.
XW8200/XW8400 REAR VIEW
Use external
SCSI active
terminator
Ethernet port
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
Dicom MOD drive
ÀÀ
ÀÀ
Graphics Card
SCSI port
SCSI board
D The Maxoptics T5 2600* 2.6 GB or Sony SMO S551–SD MOD drives are SCSI devices.
D The Maxoptics 2.6 GB or Sony SMO S551–SD MOD drive must always stand last in line and be
terminated by means of the active terminator.
D LINE VOLTAGE IS AUTOMATICALLY SELECTED WHEN THE UNIT IS SWITCHED ON.
D It must be connected and powered up before booting up the workstation.
D The SCSI cable plug on the MOD drive is a Centronics 50 pins plug.
A Centronics 50p SCSI active terminator is also provided with the optical disk drive.
D The Dicom MOD Unit SCSI address is 3. This is selectable by means of the target address
switch located at the rear of the device.
CAUTION
Never connect a SCSI peripheral to the SCSI bus or change its SCSI address
when either the workstation or the peripheral is powered on.
284
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
Maxoptix MOD Drive Physical Connection
Illustration 4 –
Maxoptix Dicom MOD Drive, Rear View (External)
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SCSI
address
3
Illustration 5 –
ON
TMT5–2600* Series Type Drive Switch Setting
OFF
Verify off
off
Termination off
off
Not used
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
Write active
Power
INT
EXT
The Maxoptix Dicom MOD drive must always stand last in SCSI line. Therefore, terminator switches
must be set to OFF and an external Active Terminator must be connected.
1-3
Sony SMO–S551–SD MOD Drive Physical Connection
Illustration 6 –
Sony SMO–S551–SD Front View
Busy LED
Power On LED
Power Switch
Illustration 7 –
S2 DIP
switches
SCSI connectors
Eject Button
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Sony SMO–S551–SD Rear View
ËËËË
285
SCSI ID select switch : set
to ID = 3
OPTIONS
1-2
sm 5178823-100
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Illustration 8 –
Sony SMO–S551–SD S2 Dip Switch Setting
1
OPTIONS
O
1-4
A B C D E F G H
A = 0: SCSI parity check enabled
B = 0: Optical memory device
C = 1: Write caching disabled
D = 1: Fast SCSI compatible
E = 1: Verify write operations
F = 0: Internal terminator disabled
G = 0: Spindle motor spins when disk inserted
H = 0: Eject button enabled
Dicom MOD Software Declaration
Refer to Chapter 1, Job Card IST004
1-5
De–installation
D Login as sdc:
console login : sdc [Return]
Password : adw4.4 [Return]
D Open a command window from the root menu, service tools submenu.
D Switch user to root
su – root [Return]
enter password : operator [Return]
D Move to the install directory:
cd /export/home/sdc/install [Return]
D Run the “uninstall.dicmod” script
./uninstall.dicmod [Return]
License removed
# MOD Application removed
1-6
Running MOD Diagnostics
MOD diagnostics can be run either by root or sdc.
D Change to the scripts directory:
cd /export/home/sdc/scripts [Return]
D Insert a Maxoptics 2.6GB MOD media into the drive.
D Run the showdicmod diagnostics utility:
./showdicmod [Return]
Running MOD diagnostics
Verifying correct device driver installed
...okay!
Verifying access to the drive
(read only test)
...okay!
286
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
2
sm 5178823-100
ADD SECOND MONITOR OPTION
Supported monitor configurations
1FP1 / 2FP1
2-1
: 1 or 2 monitor Landscape 1K (NEC 19” LCD color monitor)
Add 2nd Flat Panel LCD Color Landscape (1L1 >>> 2L1)
D Connect the second monitor to the additional connector of the Graphic Frame Buffer board and
place it to the right of the first monitor.
D Reboot workstation
D Login as sdc, open a Command window and switch user to Root :
su – root [Return]
password : Enter the root password
D Run the monitor installation routine :
/export/home/sdc/install/install.site [Return]
Choose keyword mon >>>> Choice 2 for 2 monitors configuration
D Reboot workstation and login as sdc to start application.
Illustration 1 –
HPXW8200 with 1K NEC 1980SXi LCD Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration
Prior to April 2006, the AW workstations were delivered with the NEC 1980SXi monitor.
Use the DVI to VGA cable to connect. See Illustration 6 for NEC 1990SXi monitor.
(MASTER)
XW8200 REAR VIEW
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
RIGHT MONITOR
NEC 1980SXI FLAT PANEL
INPUT 1/ DVI
DVI / HD15
VGA cable
CAUTION : DO NOT USE THE DVI /
DVI CABLE ALSO DELIVERED WITH
THE NEC MONITOR.
USE THE DVI / VGA CABLE AND Y
ADAPTER CABLE WITH THE NEC
1980SXI MONITOR.
2
LEFT MONITOR
NEC 1980SXI FLAT PANEL
INPUT1 / DVI
1
DVI / HD15
VGA cable
DOUBLE VGA HD15
ADAPTER Y CABLE
Note:
XW8200 workstations are only delivered with
LCD monitors configuration.
287
OPTIONS
D Shutdown workstation.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Illustration 2 –
WARNING
HPXW8200 / XW8400 with 1K NEC 1990SXi LCD Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration
STARTING APRIL 2006, THE NEW NEC 1990SXI MONITOR IS DELIVERED WITH
THE AW FORWARD PRODUCTION.
DVI CONNECTION HAS BEEN FULLY VALIDATED WITH THE NEC1990SXI
MONITOR, AND SHALL BE USED TO CONNECT YOUR AW WORKSTATION.
OPTIONS
Starting April 2006, your new AW workstation is delivered with a double DVI Y adapter cable.
Therefore, you must use the DVI to DVI cables delivered with your NEC 1990SXi monitor.
(MASTER)
XW8200/XW8400 REAR VIEW
LEFT MONITOR
NEC 1990SXI FLAT PANEL
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
RIGHT MONITOR
NEC 1990SXI FLAT PANEL
INPUT 1/ DVI
INPUT1 / DVI
DVI / DVI cable
DVI / DVI cable
2
1
CAUTION : DO NOT USE THE DVI / VGA
CABLE ALSO DELIVERED WITH THE
NEC MONITOR.
USE THE DVI / DVI CABLE AND Y
ADAPTER CABLE FOR THE NEC
1990SXI MONITOR
DOUBLE DVI TO DVI
ADAPTER Y CABLE
Note: XW8200 / XW8400 workstations are only delivered with LCD monitors configuration.
2-2
Removing the 2nd Monitor from an Installed System
This can be used either to remove permanently the second monitor from a site or temporarily in case
of a monitor failure, if no spare part is available rapidly.
You can uninstall the 2nd monitor through the Configuration Menu of the Common Service Desktop
Service Interface (see Chapter 1, IST002), or type the following command:
D Login as Root and run the monitor installation routine:
/export/home/sdc/install/install.site [Return]
Choose keyword mon >>>> Choice 1 for 1 monitor configuration
D Shutdown workstation and turn it off.
Disconnect the monitor.
D Reboot the workstation, before login in again as sdc to start the application.
288
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Illustration 3 –
XW8400 FORWARD PRODUCTION IS DELIVERED WITH ONE DOUBLE DVI–D Y
ADAPTER CABLE. USE THE DVI–D TO DVI–D CABLE DELIVERED WITH THE
NEC1990SXI MONITOR TO CONNECT TO YOUR AW WORKSTATION.
(MASTER)
XW8400 REAR VIEW
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
RIGHT MONITOR
NEC 1990SXI FLAT PANEL
INPUT 1/ DVI
LEFT MONITOR
NEC 1990SXI FLAT PANEL
INPUT1 / DVI
DVI / DVI cable
DVI / DVI cable
2
1
CAUTION : DO NOT USE THE DVI / VGA
CABLE ALSO DELIVERED WITH THE
NEC MONITOR.
USE THE DVI / DVI CABLE AND Y
ADAPTER CABLE FOR THE NEC
1990SXI MONITOR
Note:
WARNING
3
DOUBLE DVI TO DVI
ADAPTER Y CABLE
XW8400 workstations are only delivered with
LCD monitors configuration.
CRT MONITORS ARE NO LONGER SUPPORTED WITH AW4.4
MEMORY ADD–ON OPTION
WARNING
OBSERVE VERY CAREFULLY THE ANTI–STATIC PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING
THE RIMM MEMORY MODULES.
D Shutdown the workstation and turn it off. Disconnect all cables and open the side cover.
D Use an antistatic wrist wrap and antistatic mat to handle the printed circuit boards.
3-1
XW8400 Workstation
Refer to the HP XW8400 Service Manual, chapter 4, page 66–68, for more detailed information.
289
OPTIONS
WARNING
HPXW8400 with 1K NEC 1990SXi LCD Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
WARNING
sm 5178823-100
DO NOT USE OUTSOURCED MEMORY MODULES THAT COULD LEAD TO
MALFUNCTION OF YOUR WORKSTATION.
Maximum memory configuration supported is 12 GBytes (4GB standard + 2 x 6GB add–on)
– Basic memory uses 4 x 1GB modules
– Add on uses 2GB modules (NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE PRESENT RELEASE).
OPTIONS
You must load memory modules in valid configurations:
D If loading only one DIMM (for test purposes), install it in slot 1.
Otherwise, DIMM memory modules must be installed in pairs.
Each pair must be composed of equivallent capacity modules (i.e : 2x 1GB).
D If loading two DIMMs, install them in slots 1 and 3 (standard 2GB configuration)
D If loading four DIMMs, install them in slots 1, 3, 5 and 7
D If loading six DIMMs, install them in slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7
D If loading eight DIMMs, install them in all slots.
Load the memory module pairs in order of size, from smallest to largest.
8
7
6
Standard configuration 4GB
Memory module pair:
(load this pair first Slots 1 & 3)
2 x 1 GB DIMM
+
Memory module pair:
(load this pair next Slots 5 & 7)
2 x 1 GB DIMM
5
4
3
2
1
Add–on option 4GB
Memory module pair:
(load this pair Slots 2 & 4)
2 x 2 GB DIMM
Side closest to the PCI slots
Add–on option 4GB
Memory module pair:
(load this pair Slots 6 & 8)
2 x 2 GB DIMM
The BIOS generates warnings/errors on invalid memory configurations.
Refer to HP XW8400 Service Manual for diagnostic codes and error beeps meanings.
290
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
3-2
sm 5178823-100
XW8200 Workstation
Refer to the HP XW8200 Service Manual, chapter 4, page 77–78, for more detailed information.
Maximum memory configuration supported is 8 GBytes (2GB standard + 3 x 2GB add–on).
The HP XW8200 workstation memory bank is composed of 8 slots for DDR SDRAM.
WARNING
DO NOT USE OUTSOURCED MEMORY MODULES THAT COULD LEAD TO
MALFUNCTION OF YOUR WORKSTATION.
Add–on +2GB
Memory module pair B:
(load this pair next Slots 3 & 4)
Standard configuration 2GB
Memory module pair A:
(load this pair first Slots 1 & 2)
2 x 1GB DIMM
2 x 1 GB DIMM
A
1
2
3
Empty
C
B
4
5
6
7
8
XW8200 System board
D Turn on the workstation and press on the <Esc> key when prompted.
Verify that the Summary Screen displays the new amount of memory.
The additional 2GB memory is operational.
291
D
Empty
OPTIONS
DIMM memory modules must be installed in pairs.
Each pair must be composed of equivallent capacity modules (i.e : 2x 1GB).
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
4
sm 5178823-100
DVD–RAM OPTION
DVD–RAM IS NO LONGER A VALID OPTION FOR VOLUME SHARE 2.
OPTIONS
WARNING
292
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
APPLICATIONS (SOFTWARE OPTIONS)
MOST APPLICATIONS HAVE BEEN RE–RELEASED SINCE AW4.2.
CHECK THE FRU LIST AT CHAPTER 6.
!!! MAKE SURE YOU CAN USE APPLICATIONS CDROMS FROM PREVIOUS
AW4.1 OR AW4.2 RELEASES !!!
For upgrades, Applications are going to be provided into a collector of DVDs, arranged by kinds or
modalities. i.e: CT and Fusion applications DVD, MR applications DVD, XRay applications DVD, ....
5
VOLUME VIEWER APPLICATIONS PACKAGE
To install the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option.
To uninstall the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option.
Applications supported within the Volume Viewer package are :
D Volume Viewer 3
D Advantage ALA
D AVA XPress and VesselIQ XPress
D Advantage CTC Plus and Advantage CTC Pro
D CardIQ XPress Plus and CardIQ XPress Pro
D CardIQ Fusion PET and CardIQ Fusion SPECT
D CardEP
D Autobone XPress
D InRoom 3D
D Colon VCAR and Lung VCAR
Above mentionned Applications are protected by a License key.
6
REPORTING TOOL PACKAGE
To install the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option.
To uninstall the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option.
Reporting Tool Application is protected by a License key.
7
CT AND FUSION APPLICATIONS PACKAGE
To install the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option.
To uninstall the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option.
293
OPTIONS
WARNING
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Applications supported within the CT and Fusion package are :
D Smartscore
D CT Perfusion
D Funion
D CardIQ Function
D Advantage SIM
OPTIONS
D Dentascan
D Advanatge 4D
D BMD
Above mentionned Applications are protected by a License key.
8
MR APPLICATIONS PACKAGE
To install the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option.
To uninstall the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option.
Applications supported within the MR package are :
D Functool
D MASS
D CV Flow
D MR Pasting
D Report Card
D Cadstream
D Brainwave
Above mentionned Applications are protected by a License key.
9
X–RAY APPLICATIONS PACKAGE
To install the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option.
To uninstall the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option.
Applications supported within the Xray package are :
D 3D XRay
D Advantage Paste v1
D Advantage Paste v2
D Advantage Straight
D Cardiac XRay
D Innova 3D XRay
294
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Above mentionned Applications are protected by a License key.
10
PET AND NETWORKING APPLICATIONS PACKAGE
To install the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option.
To uninstall the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option.
Applications supported within the PET and Networking package are :
OPTIONS
D ECTb (PET HeartFusion)
D Remote Access
D Floating License
Above mentionned Applications are protected by a License key.
11
OTHER SOFTWARE OPTIONS PACKAGE
To install the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option.
Note:
Check for Applications supported on the AW release at chapter 6, FRU list.
Applications are protected by a License key.
To uninstall the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option, or
follow the steps described below.
D Login as sdc if not already logged in as sdc:
Note:
DO NOT SWITCH USER TO ROOT.
D Change to the install directory by typing:
cd /export/home/sdc/install [Return]
D Run the option software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.”option–name” [Return]
295
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
OTHER OPTIONS
12
INSITE OPTION
OPTIONS
WARNING
REFER TO CHAPTER 1, JOB CARD IST008 FOR INSTALLATION AND SERVICE
INSTRUCTIONS.
13
COLOR PRINTER OPTION (CODONICS NP–1600 M OR MD)
13-1
Physical Connection
The color printer option is a network–connected printer. It can be located anywhere on the network,
assuming it can be reached from the Advantage Workstation.
To install the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST002.
Connect it as shown in the figure below. Remember that the length of your network must not
exceed 180 meters if using thin ethernet link.
terminator
Scanner
computer
cabinet
Network
Color
printer
CAUTION
terminator
The color printer cannot receive images directly from the scanners. It can
only print images that are produced by the Advantage Workstation software.
296
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
13-2
sm 5178823-100
Printer Settings
Make sure the following information is available before starting to install your printer:
D Internet address: an address on the same network as your system unless otherwise specified by
the network administrator of the site, if any.
D Hostname: Chose a host name or use the one given by the network administrator of the site.
D Broadcast address: If assigned by the Network administrator of the site.
D Default Gateway: If specified by the Network administrator of the site.
CAUTION
For more accurate information concerning the printer settings, refer to the
Vendor’s documentation delivered with the printer. Some features might
changed after this manual has been released
Entering set–up mode
D Turn the printer ON and wait for the 16–character LCD display to display ”READY”. This can take
between 1 and 4 minutes based on the temperature of the printer.
D Place the printer in Setup mode by pressing and releasing the <Setup/Select> button on the front
panel.
D The LCD will now display ”SETUP |
EXIT”.
D Use the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD
displays ”SETUP | NETWORK”.
D Press <Setup/Select> to select this option.
D The LCD will now display one of the configurable network options. Use the <up–arrow> or
<down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD displays ”NETWORK |
IP ADDR”.
D Press <Setup/Select> to select this option.
IP address setting
D The LCD will now display the current IP address of the printer. This IP address is displayed in the
form ”nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn”, where ”nnn” is any number between 000 and 255.
D The cursor appears over the first digit at the left side of the IP address. To change this digit, press
the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons. This will increment or decrement the digit to the next
value.
D To move between digits, press the <Setup/Select> button. This will allow the cursor to be
positioned over any digit field which needs to be changed. Digits can be changed by pressing the
<up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons.
D When the IP address has been assigned, use the <Setup/Select> button to exit.
D The LCD will now display ”NETWORK | IP ADDR”.
D Use the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD
displays ”NETWORK | EXIT”.
297
OPTIONS
D Netmask: If specified by the network administrator of the site.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
D Press the <Setup/Select> button to return to the main Setup menu.
D Press the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons until the LCD displays
”SETUP | EXIT”.
Netmask setting
OPTIONS
CAUTION
Use netmasks only when your network administrator explicitly requires a
tree–like network with netmasks.
D Place the printer in Setup mode by pressing and releasing the <Setup/Select> button on the front
panel.
D The LCD will now display ”SETUP | EXIT”.
D Use the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD
displays ”SETUP | NETWORK”.
D Press <Setup/Select> to select this option.
D The LCD will now display one of the configurable network options. Use the <up–arrow> or
<down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD displays ”NETWORK |
SUBNET”.
D Press <Setup/Select> to select this option.
D The LCD will now display the current SUBNET address of the printer. This SUBNET address is
displayed in the form ”nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn”, where ”nnn” is any number between 000 and 255.
D The cursor appears over the first digit at the left side of the SUBNET address. To change this digit,
press the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons. This will increment or decrement the digit to the
next value.
D To move between digits, press the <Setup/Select> button. This will allow the cursor to be
positioned over any digit field which needs to be changed. Digits can be changed by pressing the
<up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons.
D When the SUBNET address has been assigned, use the <Setup/Select> button to exit.
D The LCD will now display ”NETWORK | SUBNET”.
D Use the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD
displays ”NETWORK | EXIT”.
D Press the <Setup/Select> button to return to the main Setup menu.
D Press the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons until the LCD displays
”SETUP | EXIT”.
D Press the <Setup/Select> button to return to READY.
Postscript and ISG Keys setting
D Place the printer in Setup mode by pressing and releasing the <Setup/Select> button on the front
panel.
D The LCD will now display ”SETUP | NETWORK”.
D Use the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD
displays ”SETUP | KEYS”.
298
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
D Press <Setup/Select> to select this option.
D The cursor appears over the first digit at the left side of the key. To change this digit, press the
<up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons. This will increment or decrement the digit to the next
value.
D To move between digits, press the <Setup/Select> button. This will allow the cursor to be
positioned over any digit field which needs to be changed. Digits can be changed by pressing the
<up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons.
D Use the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD
displays ”SETUP | EXIT”.
D Press the <Setup/Select> button to return to READY.
D Follow the same steps to enter the ISG key if available.
Color parameters setting
D Place the printer in Setup mode by pressing and releasing the <Setup/Select> button on the front
panel.
D The LCD will now display ”SETUP | NETWORK”.
D Use the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD
displays ”SETUP | IMAGE”.
D Press <Setup/Select> to select this option.
D Use the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD
displays ”IMAGE | TCR”.
D Press <Setup/Select> to select this option.
D The default value of the TCR appears. To change this value, press the <up–arrow> or
<down–arrow> buttons. This will increment or decrement the value to the next state.
TCR (True Color Rendering): adjust from 0 to 100. 0 gives full bright colors. 100 gives all gray
images.
D Press <Setup/Select> to accept the new value.
D Use the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD
displays ”IMAGE | GAMMA”.
D When this is done, press <Setup/Select> to select this option.
D The default value of the Gamma correction appears. To change this value, press the <up–arrow>
or <down–arrow> buttons. This will increment or decrement the value to the next state.
Gamma : light/dark: adjust from 0 to 10.
0 gives darker images. 1 is normal. 10 gives lighter images.
D When this is done, press <Setup/Select> to accept the new value.
D The LCD will now display ”SETUP | IMAGE”.
D Use the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD
displays ”SETUP | EXIT”.
D Press the <Setup/Select> button to return to READY.
299
OPTIONS
D When the POSTSCRIPT key has been assigned, use the <Setup/Select> button to exit.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Exiting the set–up mode
D Press the <Setup/Select> button to exit Setup mode.
D After a few seconds, the LCD should display ”READY”. This completes the IP address setup
procedure.
OPTIONS
13-3
Testing the Network Connection
Once the IP address has been correctly assigned to the printer, the printer should respond to TCP/IP
messages on the network. Before testing the printer, check the following items:
D The printer is actually connected to the network, using an external transceiver. The printer must be
turned on and the front panel ”POWER” button must be on.
D The front panel on the printer displays ”READY”, and the correct IP address for the printer was
installed.
Go to the Advantage workstation, and open a command window from the ”Root Menu”, ”Service Tools”
and type in:
<prompt> su – [Return]
Password : operator [Return].
Move the cursor into this command window, and type the following command:
<prompt> /usr/sbin/ping <IP addr of Codonics> [Return]
<IP addr of Codonics> is alive
Note:
Do not enter leading zeros in any of the four fields separated by dots. That is, do not type in
192.100.009.005, instead use 192.100.9.5.
This ”alive” answer from the system means that the printer can be reached from the Advantage
Workstation system through the network, and that its physical installation worked well, as far as the
network is concerned. If no answer, check ethernet cable, transceiver, 50 ohm terminator...
Note:
If the system displays ”unknown host”, your Color Printer may not be correctly declared. Do
the steps described in Section 1-2 again.
If the system displays ”Network unreachable”, you probably have given the printer an IP
address incompatible with your A.W. workstation’s address.
Check that they belong to the same network, 192.100.9.5 for example.
13-4
Check Printer Status
D Open a ”telnet session” by typing :
telnet <IP address of codonics> [Return]
trying XX.XX.XX.XX ... (this is the IP address given to the printer)
connected to <IP address of codonics>
Escape character is ’^]’
Unix (r) System V Release 4.0 (np1600)
login : root [Return]
#
Note:
There has been no password factory given to the root user in the computer of the printer.
This is the reason why you are not prompted to enter it when login as root.
300
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
D Test the printer status by typing:
# stat [Return]
It will display something like :
Date: 26–Dec–1995 13:38
Printer ID: 8074–1bd2
E–net Addr: 08:00:20:74:1b:d2
Mem Config: 16MB RAM
Queues: 0 jobs in image queue
Hard Drive: 270MB Quantum
0 jobs in print queue
SW Version: 1.3.2
Captions: Right (77 x 2048)
Keys: POSTSCRIPT Key=00M35LUFCS Permanent
CATIA
Key=02XILVEYY4 Temporary (18–Aug–1995, 250 days)
ISG_1
Key=40ILVEYY4X Permanent
DICOM
Key=01X6CNVKDD Temporary (21–Aug–1995, 250 days)
Defaults: Printer (root)
TCR
33
Gamma
1.10
Antialias None
Rotate
Auto
Scale
Bilinear
MCM
Off
Note:
The keys depend on the Serial Number (actually, it depends on the hostid number contained
in the NVRAM chip of the Sparc CPU board) of the Color Printer.
They are shipped with the printer and should display as PERMANENT.
If you replace the Printer or the CPU part of it (Tray Assembly), you will need new keys.
Contact DIA or Support Center if keys are not available with the Spare Part.
Note:
CATIA and DICOM keys are not needed for AW application.
13-5
Test Printer Functionality
D Open the Filmer and insert an image.
D Transfer test image file to the Postscipt printer.
D Now check the dialogue when printing. Open a ”telnet session” by typing :
telnet <IP address of codonics> [Return]
trying XX.XX.XX.XX ... (this is the IP address given to the printer)
connected to <IP address of codonics>
Escape character is ’^]’
Unix (r) System V Release 4.0 (np1600)
login : root [Return]
#
You will see many lines of text telling you the printer’s status.
D Type logout or <Cntl> <D> to logout.
301
OPTIONS
Status: Ready
Media: A4–Size Paper
Ribbon: CMY
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
13-6
sm 5178823-100
Load Paper Cassette
D Place blue cardboard that is shipped with new paper inside the paper cassette.
Note:
Frequent paper jams may occur without the blue cardboard beneath the paper in the paper
cassette.
OPTIONS
D Load paper into paper cassette with the glossy side facing up.
Note:
Store remaining paper inside plastic bag and in a room where the humidity can be maintained
between 20 to 70% (and preferrable between 40% to 60%). Storing the paper outside the
plastic bag in a room where the humidity exceeds 70% can cause the edge of the paper to
curl and consequently cause frequent paper jams.
13-7
Service Procedures
13-7-1 Image Quality Problems
D Vertical color line: Clean the thermal head. See procedure in the Codonics Service Manual
delivered with your printer.
D Vertical white line(s): Always at the same position, it can be a ”blown pixel” problem.
Clean the thermal head and if the problem persists, change the ”printer engine” assembly (P/N:
2116591). See procedure section 1-3.
D Fade image on transparent paper: Check the position of the paper in the paper tray. Check for the
notch orientation indication.
D Side edge fold or stretch problem: The thermal head is not aligned. There is no mechanical
adjustment possible.
Replace the ”printer engine” assembly (P/N : 2116591). See procedure section 1-3.
lines of different colors
D ”Smiles” problem: Generally happening with transparent paper in the dark areas.
Check that the thermal head voltage is properly adjusted. See section 6 in the Codonics Service
manual.
D Paper jam: The paper cannot exit properly from the paper tray to the thermal head path.
Verify that blue cardboard is under paper in tray. Check for deformation of the paper. This can be
due to improper storage conditions. Check the springs in the paper tray. Replace the paper tray if
defective.
302
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
13-7-2 Printer Engine Assembly, Tray Assembly Replacement
Opening the tray assembly
See section 5 of Codonics Service manual.
Color printer block diagram
Printer Engine
I/O cable
Controller board
Printer engine assembly
P/N : 2116591
Sparc computer
Tray assembly
P/N : 2116594
D Testing the printer engine:
Disconnect the I/O cable between the Tray assembly (SUN Sparc computer) and the Printer
Engine Controller board.
Place the S1 switch, located on the Printer Controller board on the ”ENGINE” position.
Switch ON the color printer.
Enter the DIAGS menu. Refer to section 7 of the Codonics Service manual.
D Error codes:
The color printer error codes are described in section 8 of the Codonics Service manual.
Basically, the tray assembly should be replaced if there are communication problems between
A.W. and the printer.
The Printer Engine should be replaced in case of thermal head problems or film transport
problems.
13-7-3 Periodic Maintenance
D Proceed to thermal head and ”donor” transport cleaning every 100 films.
Refer to section 2 of the Codonics Service manual.
13-7-4 Un–installation
D Login as sdc if not already logged in and switch user to root:
su – root [Return]
Password :operator [Return]
D Change to the install directory by typing:
cd /export/home/sdc/install [Return]
D Run the option software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.printers [Return]
... and choose the printer you want to uninstall.
303
OPTIONS
270 MB
HD drive floppy drive
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
14
sm 5178823-100
GREYSCALE PRINTER OPTION (LEXMARK OPTRA S1650)
Installation of this printer is to be done by the Vendor’s Service Engineer in collaboration with GEMS
FE.
OPTIONS
14-1
Physical Connection
The Greyscale printer option is a network–connected printer. It can be located anywhere on the
network, assuming that it can be reached from the Advantage Workstation.
Connect it as shown in the figure below. Remember that the length of your network must not
exceed 180 meters if using thin ethernet link.
terminator
Scanner
computer
cabinet
Network
Greyscale
printer
CAUTION
14-2
terminator
The Greyscale printer cannot receive images directly from the scanners. It can
only print images that are produced by the Advantage Workstation software.
Printer Settings
Make sure the following information is available before starting to install your printer:
D Internet address: an address on the same network as your system unless otherwise specified by
the network administrator of the site (if any).
D Hostname: Chose a host name or use the one given by the network administrator of the site.
D Netmask: If specified by the network administrator of the site.
304
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
CAUTION
sm 5178823-100
The following is given as information only. Installation is to be done by Vendor’s
Service Engineer in collaboration with GEMS FE. For more accurate information
concerning the printer settings, refer to the Vendor’s documentation delivered
with the printer. Some features might changed after this manual has been
released
Entering set–up mode
D Place the printer in Setup mode by pressing and releasing the < Menu > button on the front panel
until the display shows Network Menu.
D Press and release the * select button. The Network mneu, Option network 1 is displayed.
D Make sure that:
– PCL smartswitch = ON
– PS smartswitch = ON
– NPA mode = Auto
– Network buffer = Auto
D Enter Network 1 setup menu.
D Enter Network card menu and make sure that:
– View Card status = Connected
– View Card speed = 10Mbps, Half Duplex
– Job Timeout = 90
– View Net address = UAA
– Banner page = Off
D Enter Lewlink menu and make sure that:
– Activate = No
D Enter TCP / IP menu and make sure that:
– Activate = Yes
– Enable bootp = No
– Enable DHCP = No
– Enable RARP = No
D Enter Set IP address menu and press on * select button.
– Enter IP address for your printer with NO additional zeros
e.g.: 192.9.100.5
(but not 192.009.100.005)
D Enter Set IP Netmask menu and press on * select button.
– Enter, if applicable, the IP netmask for your printer with NO additional zeros
e.g.: 255.240.0.0
(but not 255.240.000.00)
305
OPTIONS
D Turn the printer ON and wait for the LCD display to display ”READY”. This takes a few minutes.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
D Enter Set Gateway address menu and press on * select button.
– Enter, if applicable, the Gateway address for your printer with NO additional zeros
e.g.: 255.240.0.0
(but not 255.240.000.00)
D Enter Set Hostname menu and press on * select button.
OPTIONS
– Enter a Host name for your printer. DO NOT USE any special characters, that could confuse
network transmissions.
You can use numerical, alphanumerical characters and – or _ signs.
e.g.: optra; optra1; OPTRA; OPTRA–01; optra_printer1; etc ...
– Make sure that all the last fields unused do not display any value, but are blank, and press on
the * select button several times, until it displays ” saved ”.
D When this is done, select Print Setup page to print on a sheet of paper the settings. You can join
this sheet to the Site’s maintenance logbook for future use.
D Press the Return button to return to On–line.
The Printer is ready. Return to Chapter 1, Job Card IST006 to declare the printer to the AW Apllication
software.
14-3
De–Installation
You can uninstall Printers through the Configuration Menu of the Common Service Desktop Service
Interface (see Chapter 1, IST002), or type the following command:
D Login as sdc if not already logged in and switch user to root:
su – root [Return]
Password :operator [Return]
D Change to the install directory by typing:
cd /export/home/sdc/install [Return]
D Run the option software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.printers [Return]
... and choose the printer you want to uninstall
306
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
CHAPTER 9 – NETWORKING
1
SAMPLE NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION: ETHERNET CONNECTION
Other Hosts
Other Hosts
XW8400 / XW8200
Additional Network
interface PCI card
(defaults to eth0)
eth1
Use PCI Ethernet
card to connect to Network
eth0
(reserved for
”Direct Connect”)
NETWORKING
PCI
Network
Open a Command Window and type :
ifconfig –a [Return]
to get information on the Ethernet Interface(s)
1-1
Basic Intra–Suite Network: MR SIGNA ADVANTAGE, MR HORIZON
AW Station
A.W
SIGNA
ADVANTAGE
5.X
OC
IC
RJ 45
Transceiver
Transceiver
RJ 45 NETWORK
1-2
Basic Network
CT/MR
AW Station
CT/MR
RJ45 cable
RJ45 cable
RJ 45
HUB
Note:
AUI cable
AUI transceiver
Gateway board is no more needed on CT/i system.
307
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
1-3
sm 5178823-100
Basic Intra–Suite Network: CT–HLA, CT–HSA
AW Station
SBCO
SBC
OC
RJ 45
RJ 45
RJ 45
RJ 45 NETWORK
NETWORKING
1-4
Basic Network: CT SYTEC, PACE, PROSPEED – MR VECTRA
AW Station
CT
MR
ETC board
ETC board
AUI cable
RJ 45
ETC board: P/N 9704WA
AUI cable: P/N 9704RB
Transceiver
RJ 45
RJ 45
RJ 45 NETWORK
1-5
Basic Network: DRS, DLX (without Digital Gateway)
AW Station
DRS3
DLX3
DLX 2
upgraded to DLX 3
ETHERNET I/F BD
AUI cable
RJ 45
Transceiver
RJ 45
RJ 45 NETWORK
308
F1301BH : DRS3 Ethernet I/F kit
S18411NE : DLX3 Dicom Ethernet I/F kit
S18411NA : Upgrade DLX2 to DLX3
Dicom Ethernet I/F kit
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
1-6
Basic Workstations Network with no Router
DLX with a Fast Ethernet Gateway
acquisition system network
50 W
50 W
Terminator
Terminator
dqw1 le0 interface
le0: ethernet
DLX interface
192.100.10.3
192.100.10.8
vdp ethernet
Frontal Ethernet
SBCO
VDP
DLX
SUN
SS4
DIGITAL
GATEWAY
* 192.100.10.5
192.100.10.4
dlx–dicom1 le1
dicom ethernet
I/F board
dlx–dicom1 le1
dicom ethernet
I/F board
RJ45
connector
used for DICOM HIS/RIS Interface
MII connector
**
50 W
Terminator
***
Twisted pair
crossed cable
5 meter max
50 W
Terminator
RJ45
connector
192.100.10.2
HIS / RIS
STATION
AW Station
Note:
*: The Fast Ethernet Interface can operate at either 10 or 100 Mbits/s (auto configured).
Note:
**: The Digital Gateway MII connector can be used with a MII to AUI Interface and one AUI
transceiver. In this case, the RJ45 cable must be removed.
Note:
***: The Digital Gateway RJ45 connector can be used to connect to a HUB. In this case, the
twisted pair cable is not crossed.
309
NETWORKING
le1: netmask : 255.255.255.0
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
1-7
sm 5178823-100
Workstations Subnetworks with one Router
DLX with a Digital Gateway and a Fast Ethernet Interface
SIGNA
AW 1
CT/MR YMS
192.100.10.1
192.100.10.2
192.100.10.4
ETC board
192.100.10.0 Network
NETWORKING
Twisted Pair cable
192.100.10.5
dgw–hme0
Fast Ethernet I/F bd
on Digital Gateway
NETWOK PRINTER
192.100.10.10
Digital
Gateway
DLX SUN SS
DLX
( le1 netmask: 255.255.255.128 )
CT HLA/HSA
GATEWAY
or
ROUTER
AW 2
192.100.10.3
CT SBC
CT OC
192.100.9.1
192.100.9.2
AW 2
192.100.9.4
192.100.9.0 Subnetwork
310
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
1-8
sm 5178823-100
Advantage Workstation within the MR SUITE
SIGNA
AW station
192.100.10.1
192.100.10.4
Use network menu window on browser to
add host entries for SIGNA (192.100.10.1)
CT_IC (192.100.9.3)
CT_OC (192.100.9.1)
192.100.10.0 Network
GATE
192.100.10.3
NETWORKING
IC: Use ”icload” to reconfig
IC
192.100.9.3
192.100.9.0 Subnetwork
CT OC
Signa OC: Use ”setAdoption” to declare AW
192.100.9.1
CT SBC
192.100.9.2
311
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
1-9
sm 5178823-100
Advantage Workstation within the CT SUITE
Use network menu window on browser to add host entries for :
SIGNA (192.100.10.1)
CT_IC (192.100.9.3)
CT_OC (192.100.9.1)
SIGNA
192.100.10.1
CT OC: Use ”setAdoption” to configureAW as non Genesis host within the suite
192.100.10.0 Network
CT OC
GATE
192.100.10.3
192.100.9.1
192.100.9.5
192.100.9.3
NETWORKING
192.100.9.2
AW station
IC
192.100.9.0 Subnetwork
IC: Use ”icload” to reconfig
1-10
CT SBC
Advantage Workstation on the LOCAL BACKBONE (Gateway in CT
Operator Console)
SIGNA
AW station
192.100.10.1
192.100.10.4
192.100.10.0 Network
CT HLA/HSA
NETWORK PRINTER
192.100.10.3
192.100.10.10
CT SBC
GATE
CT OC
192.100.9.1
192.100.9.2
192.100.9.0 Subnetwork
312
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
1-11
sm 5178823-100
Advantage Workstation within the MR, CT and LOCAL SUITE
SIGNA:
AW 1 as non
genesis host
within suite,
or non–
genesis
suite
SIGNA
AW 1
192.100.10.1
192.100.10.4
Use network menu window on browser to
add host entries for SIGNA, IC1, IC2
CTOC, AW 2 , AW 3
AW 3 as non
genesis suite
192.100.10.0 Subnetwork
Use network menu window on browser to
add host entries for SIGNA, IC1, IC2,
CTOC, AW 1, AW 3
NETWORKING
AW 2
192.100.10.3
IC 1
192.100.9.5
192.100.11.3
192.100.9.0 subnetwork
GATE
192.100.11.0 Network
NETWORK PRINTER
192.100.9.1
192.100.11.5
GATE
CT OC
192.100.11.2
IC 2
CT SBC
192.100.9.3
192.100.9.2
AW 3
192.100.11.4
Use network menu window on browser to
add host entries for SIGNA, IC1, IC2,
CTOC, AW 2, AW 1
313
CT :
AW 2 as non
genesis host
withing the suite
AW 3 as non
genesis suite
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
1-12
sm 5178823-100
MIXED Sources Configuration Sample
SIGNA
192.100.10.1
AW 1
192.100.10.2
CT/MR YMS
192.100.10.4
ETC board
192.100.10.0 Network
192.100.10.5
dlx–dicom1
Ethernet I/F bd
le1 on DLX
DLX / DRS
NETWORK PRINTER
192.100.10.10
NETWORKING
( le1 netmask: 255.255.255.128 )
CT HLA/HSA
GATE
192.100.10.3
CT OC
192.100.9.1
CT SBC
192.100.9.2
192.100.9.0 Subnetwork
AW 2
192.100.9.4
CT OC: Use ”setAdoption” to configure
AW 2 as non Genesis host within the suite
314
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
AW LINUX HOST DECLARATION ON IMAGE SOURCES
CAUTION
CAUTION
2-1
The following material is only given for information. The accuracy of the
Information contained here is subject to change, depending on the software
versions of the products.
REFER SPECIFIC SERVICE MANUALS of the following products.
The number of hosts sending simultaneous sending images to AW is limited to
4 in order not to degrade performances. If overloaded , the following message
pops up:
”Hosts association failed..”
AW4.4 Declaration on UNIX Based Source
NETWORKING
2
sm 5178823-100
– CT Lightspeed
– CT/i or CT Synergy
– MR Horizon LX
– MR Profile
– MR Contour
Use the Dicom 3.0 protocol.
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual that were shipped with the respective products.
2-2
AW4.4 Declaration on GENESIS Based Source
– Signa Advantage 5.x
– Signa Horizon
– Genesis Independant console
– CT HLA
– CT HSA
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual that were shipped with the respective products.
Use the Dicom 3.0 protocol.
2-3
AW4.4 Declaration on non Genesis Based Source
– Signa Advantage 4.x
CAUTION
Dicom connection is not directly supported with Signa4.X.
315
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
2-4
sm 5178823-100
AW4.4 Host Declaration on CT9800 Image Sources
CAUTION
No IDLink2 version 2.3 DICOM compatible version currently exists.
An IDLink2 compatible system is required to interconnect a CT9800 to Advantage Workstation. Use
of a compatible ”MERGE box” is under identification.
D The ”Logical Address” is the hostname of the Advantage workstation (e.g. AW01–PC0).
Note:
”logical address” is the same thing than ”Application Entity Title” in DICOM format.
D The ”Host Address” is the Internet address of the AW (e.g. 192.100.10.4).
D The ID/Net2 or DICOM ”Port Number” of the Advantage workstation is ALWAYS ”4006”.
NETWORKING
2-5
AW4.4 Host Declaration on Dicom Devices
Use the Dicom 3.0 protocol.
D Use the DICOM protocol to declare GE XRay DLX or DRS systems and Foreign DICOM hosts.
D The DICOM ”Application Entity Title” for the Advantage workstation is the workstation’s hostname
(e.g. AW01–PC0).
D The DICOM or ID/Net2 ”Port Number” of the Advantage workstation is ALWAYS ”4006”.
2-6
AW4.4 Declaration on DRS / DLX Sources
Use the Dicom 3.0 protocol.
D Check that the 64MB memory is recognized by the DLX system, once the Dicom Ethernet
interface has been installed.
D IP addresses should be supplied by the hospital Network Administartor (if applicable). If not,
contact your On–Line support center which can supply a set of unique IP addresses for your
network.
Example of IP addresses and Hostnames:
AW1
192.100.1.1
(class C network)
DLX–DICOM1 192.100.1.2
(class C network)
Note:
In this basic network case, with no router, and using Class C IP addresses, the Netmask
value is 255.255.255.0.
In case of non Class C addresses, refer to section 3 for netmask setting.
D DLX setting: Refer to DLX Service Manual, Job Card IST 160 ”Installing the Dicom Ethernet
option”, to set the the IP address and Netmask of the DLX and to set the AW Dicom Server in the
DLX.
Note:
When replacing an existing AW station by another one, you must reboot the DLX, even if you
keep the same hostname and IP address for the new workstation.
316
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
2-7
sm 5178823-100
AW4.4 Declaration on YMS Sources
Use the Dicom 3.0 protocol.
– CT Sytec family (SRi, S, Plus, 1800i, 3000, ...)
– CT Prospeed family (Plus, Vx, Advantage, S, Sx, ....)
– MR Vectra
After making sure that all hardware and software pieces have been correctly installed, (rev. level of
software compatible with the Ethernet link option, switch settings of the ETC board, removal of the
back plane jumpers at the corresponding slot, etc...), you have to:
D Set the boot FD in the drive and start maintenance utility (if applicable).
D Declare the link as shown after (Communication data setting procedure) and reset the scanning
system.
Refer to the CT or MR specific manual for more accurate information as new releases of software on
the Scanning system, may introduce some changes in the procedure.
Note:
DICOM format is now implemented on new YMS systems (Prospeed family) depending on
the software version.
Note:
The query / retrieve function is available from Advantage Workstation, as YMS systems
are query / retrieve provider (depending on the software version).
CAUTION
CAUTION
For YMS CT, DICOM feature is working ONLY IF
– No images on studies 0
– No SMPTE test pattern installed
When using the DICOM protocol, the Name field to enter, (Application Entity
Title) is the hostname of the Advantage Workstation.
So, make sure to enter it EXACTLY the way it’s written on the AW side
(lower or upper case letters) and DO NOT USE any space caracters which could
be interpreted as 2 different names.
Communication data setting procedure
Note:
The following is only applicable for software revision levels FROM:
SYTEC 3000/p
SYTEC 3000s
PROSPEED
SYTEC i
VECTRA
V 6.00
V 4.00
V 4.00
V 3.00
V 3.00
317
NETWORKING
D Select installation parameters (change parameters) from the menu.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
The following example details the steps to declare the link between an MR Vectra and 2 Advantage
Workstations.
D Activate management by pressing <MGT> key.
D Select “COMMUNICATION DATA HANDLING” from the menu. The system prompts you as follows.
NETWORKING
Note:
This procedure, describing the steps to set a MR VECTRA for ethernet communication with
Advantage Workstation, is applicable to the YMS scanning systems mentioned above. The
host name must be set in the form ”SuiteIDHostID”, SuiteID being MR01 and HostID being
OC0 in our example.
The Network Address can be left at the default value if there is only one YMS system on the
network. Otherwise, increment it for the second YMS scanner.
The IP address can be set to a Class C default value, as shown in our example,
(190.100.9.X) unless otherwise specified by the Network Administrator of the Site.
Enter Satellite No =
<0: Myself, N: New Data, <END>: Update, <CANC>: Quit>
D First select 0: (Myself) and set parameters to:
COMMUNICATION DATA HANDLING
Myself
Name
=
Network Address =
IP Address
=
Enter Satellite No
MR01OC0
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
192.100.9.1
=
<0: Myself, N: New Data, <END>: Update, <CANC>: QUIT>
D Select N: (New Data) to declare a 1st target destination and set parameters to:
N : New data
Register New Station
Station No. = *
Model No. = (see table)
Machine No. = **
*** Model No. Table ***
0101 : CT8600 , CT9000 , ........
0103 : ........................................
...................................................
...................................................
...................................................
101D : AW
10FF : Non GEMS Products
OK to register ? (y/n) [N] : y [Return]
* : enter a Station number not already
used (presss <Sta List> push button
for list of Stations).
** : use 1 if first machine of this model
then 2 for next...
OTHER 01xx:CT 02xx:MR 10xx:Display
318
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
COMMUNICATION DATA HANDLING
Myself
Name
=
Network Address =
IP Address
=
MR01OC0
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
192.100.9.1
satellite 1 (Advantage Workstation)
Station No
Protocol
Name
IP Address
GW Address
Model No = 101D
Base Address = FF6000
Port Number = 4006
CPU No= 11
GW Address (GATEWAY) must be left to 0.0.0.0 unless otherwise specified by the Network
Administrator of the Site.
Enter Satellite No = j
select N: (New Data) to declare a 2nd target destination and set parameters to:
COMMUNICATION DATA HANDLING
Myself
Name
=
Network Address =
IP Address
=
MR01OC0
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
192.100.9.1
satellite 1 (Advantage Workstation)
Station No
Protocol
Name
IP Address
GW Address
=1
= DICOM 3.0
= AW01–PC0
= 192.100.9.2
= 0.0.0.0
Model No = 101D
Base Address = FF6000
CPU No= 11
satellite 2 (Advantage Workstation)
Station No
Protocol
Name
IP Address
GW Address
=2
= DICOM 3.0
= AW02–PC0
= 192.100.9.3
= 0.0.0.0
Enter Satellite No
Model No = 101D
Base Address = FF6000
Port Number = 4006
CPU No= 11
=
<0: Myself, N: New Data, <END>: Update, <CANC>: QUIT>
Press <END> to update, then <END> to quit the Communication Data Handling menu and RESET
SYSTEM to validate new Hosts declaration.
319
NETWORKING
Note:
=1
= DICOM 3.0
= AW01–PC0
= 192.100.9.2
= 0.0.0.0
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
3
NETWORKING OVERVIEW
3-1
General Overview
CLASS A NETWORK
0
8
0
16
NETWORK
24
32
24
32
HOST
Class A network address between 1 and 127.
Maximum of 127 class A networks and 16777215 hosts per network.
NETWORKING
typical netmask (no mask) is 255.0.0.0.
e.g. :
3 . 45 . 16. 101
network
Network address 3.0.0.0
host id
CLASS B NETWORK
0
8
1
0
16
NETWORK
HOST
Class B network address between 128 and 191.
(16 bits for the Network, 16 bits for the host).
typical netmask (no mask) is 255.255.0.0.
e.g. : 129 . 32 . 100 . 54
network
Network address 129.32.0.0
host id
CLASS C NETWORK
0
8
1
1
16
NETWORK
24
32
HOST
Class C network between 192 and 254
(24 bits for the Network, 8 bits for the host)
typical netmask (no mask) is 255.255.255.0.
Most commonly used for CT/MR Advantage Networks and small “Local Area Networks”. (A lot of
possible networks but few hosts per network).
320
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
3-2
sm 5178823-100
Routing Table Examples
If you get the message ’Network unreachable’ when pinging a host, you may need to create a route
to the host network.
3-2-1 Adding a default router
CAUTION
To add a Default Router, or to add a route to a Nework or to a Host,
PREFERABLY use the Configuration tool in the Common Service Desktop.
Refer to Chapter1, IST002, Section 4–2–3
3-2-1-1 Other methods: First manual (preferred) method
– Change to /etc/rc5.d directory
cd /etc/rc5.d [Return]
– Create a S93route script
vi S93route [Return]
# !/bin/sh
(comment line)
# Script for adding a default router
(comment line)
route add default gw <router_IP_address> (if NO router is defined, your
workstation will act as default router. In this case, enter your workstation’s IP address)
i.e : route add default gw 192.100.9.2
:wq!
– Make S93route script executable
chmod +x S93route [Return]
– Restart the nework service
service network restart [Return]
OR
– Reboot the workstation.
init 6 [Return]
3-2-1-2 Other methods: Second manual method
Note:
However more simple than the first method, it does not offer the capability to save the
parameters entered on the Configuration Cdrom, and therefore should be done again in case
of LFW or LFC software reinstall.
– Open a Command window and switch User to root
su – root [Return]
Enter the root password
– Change to the network–scripts directory and edit the ifcfg–eth0 file:
cd /etc/sysconfig/network–scripts [Return]
vi ifcfg–eth0 [Return]
– Add gateway information to this file as appropriate (see example below)
i.e : GATEWAY=3.45.12.135
(enter the gateway address as shown)
321
NETWORKING
– Open a Command window and switch User to root
su – root [Return]
Enter the root password
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
– Save the file and quit
<Esc> :wq! [Return]
– Bring down the network interface and restart it
ifdown eth0 [Return]
ifup eth0 [Return]
Example of a ifcfg–eth0 file
DEVICE=eth0
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=3.231.48.162
NETMASK=255.255.252.0
GATEWAY=3.45.12.135
ONBOOT=yes
<<< gateway address entered
NETWORKING
3-2-2 Checking the routing table
– Make sure the route has been properly declared
netstat –r [Return]
You should read a line like in our example:
default 192.100.9.2 0.0.0.0 UG0 0
0 eth0
The following examples refer to the configuration sample shown in Section 1-11.
Note:
In order to define the number of hops to reach a network or a host , you can add the following
”metric” information a shown in the example below for 3 ”hops”:
i.e : route add –host 192.100.9.110 gw 192.100.10.54 metric 3 [Return]
Adding routes for AW1
– Login as root and change to /etc/rc5.d directory
cd /etc/rc5.d [Return]
– Create a S93route script
vi S93route [Return]
# !/bin/sh
(comment line)
# Script for adding a default router
(comment line)
route add –net 192.100.11.0 netmask 255.255.0.0 gw 192.100.10.3
route add –net 192.100.9.0 netmask 255.255.0.0 gw 192.100.10.3
:wq!
– Make S93route script executable
chmod +x S93route [Return]
– Restart the nework service
service network restart [Return]
OR
– Reboot the workstation.
init 6 [Return]
Adding routes for AW2
– Proceed as shown for AW1
322
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Adding routes for AW3
– Proceed as shown for AW1
3-3
Emergency procedure: Forcing the network speed and mode
Network controller cards used on the HP X4000 and on the HP XW8000/8200 workstations, are
designed and set to fully support the Auto–negociation mode.
Any potential Network communication (mode, speed) issues, are most probably due to problems in the
configuration or performance of the Site’s network.
The procedure below describes how to create a script (or use the existing S93route script) , launched
at boot, and that can be back–up’ed on the Configuration cdrom together with the other Site’s
parameters.
X4000, XW8000 and XW8200 supports the ethtool utility.
3-3-1 Case 1: No route information curently exists: Create S93route script.
– Open a Command Window and switch User to root:
su – root [Return]
Enter the root password
– Change to the /etc/rc5.d directory:
cd /etc/rc5.d [Return]
– Create the S93route script with the vi editor (or any other suitable editor).
vi S93route [Return]
D X4000 and XW8000 case:
# !/bin/sh
<<< Enter this line to specify the script language
# Script for forcing network mode and speed
<<< line for comments
ethtool –s eth0 speed 100 duplex full autoneg off
(in our example, we force the eth0 controller speed to 100MBps and mode to full duplex)
<Esc>
:wq!
<<< To save and quit the editor
D XW8200 case:
# !/bin/sh
<<< Enter this line to specify the script language
# Script for forcing network mode and speed
<<< line for comments
ethtool –s eth0 speed 1000 duplex full autoneg off
(in our example, we force the eth0 controller speed to 1GBps and mode to full duplex)
<Esc>
:wq!
<<< To save and quit the editor
– Make S93route script executable
chmod +x S93route [Return]
323
NETWORKING
Nethertheless, in case of Network communication issue (10 MBps or half Duplex mode selected
through auto–negociation), it is possible to force these communication parameters to the desired
values.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
– Restart the nework service
service network restart [Return]
OR
– Reboot the workstation.
init 6 [Return]
3-3-2 Case 2: Route information curently exists: Update S93route script.
Note : If the script already exists (i.e: you have previously declared routing information), when
you open it with the vi editor (or any other suitable editor), it will look like the example
below (X4000 or XW8000), with already existing routing information
Refer to procedure previous page for the XW8200 workstation:
– Open a Command Window and switch User to root:
su – root [Return]
Enter the root password
NETWORKING
– Change to the /etc/rc5.d directory:
cd /etc/rc5.d [Return]
– Update the S93route script with the vi editor (or any other suitable editor).
vi S93route [Return]
# !/bin/sh
<<< Add this line to specify the script language
# Script for adding routes
<<<< (example of the existing route information)
route add –net 192.100.11.0 netmask 255.255.0.0 gw 192.100.10.3
route add –net 192.100.9.0 netmask 255.255.0.0 gw 192.100.10.3
# Script for forcing network mode and speed
<<< line for comments
ethtool –s eth0 speed 100 duplex full autoneg off (in our example, we force the
eth0 controller speed to 100MBps and mode to full duplex)
<Esc>
:wq!
<<< To save and quit the editor
– Make S93route script executable
chmod +x S93route [Return]
– Restart the nework service
service network restart [Return]
OR
– Reboot the workstation.
init 6 [Return]
WARNING
IT IS NOW TIME TO COMPLETE THE AW CONFIGURATION FORM LOCATED AT
THE BEGINNING OF THIS MANUAL,WITH ALL ROUTING INFORMATION YOU
HAVE CREATED.
324
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
3-4
sm 5178823-100
More information on subnetworks
Subnetworks allow a single network address to span several physical networks.
Some of the bits in the host portion of an IP address are used to specify the subnet number on the
network backbone, and the remaining are used to specify the host number within the subnet. How
these bits are divided between subnet and host depends on the type of netmask used.
D The 0–bit netmask (255.255.255.0) is the default netmask for Class C networks, since it has no
effect on the IP address.
D The 7–bit and 8–bit netmasks are useless because they don’t contain any useable host
addresses.
D Of the remaining netmasks types, the 3–bit, 4–bit, and 5–bit types are the most practical to use
because they offer realistic subnet/host combinations.
HOST PORTION OF
NETMASK (BINARY)
NETMASK
Type
Number
Subnet Bits
Host Bits
0–bit
255.255.255.0
00000000
1–bit
255.255.255.128 1
2–bit
NUMBER OF
SUBNETS
NUMBER OF USEABLE
HOST ADDRESSES
Per Subnet
Total
1
254
254
0000000
2
126
252
255.255.255.192 1 1
000000
4
62
248
3–bit
255.255.255.224 1 1 1
00000
8
30
240
4–bit
255.255.255.240 1 1 1 1
0000
16
14
224
5–bit
255.255.255.248 1 1 1 1 1
000
32
6
192
6–bit
255.255.255.252 1 1 1 1 1 1
00
64
2
128
7–bit
255.255.255.254 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0
128
0
0
8–bit
255.255.255.255 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
256
0
0
To determine which netmask type to use, you must first know which subnet/host combination is
needed for the network.
When looking at the table, you can notice that the number of useable host addresses is always equal
to the number of host addresses minus 2.
e.g.: 8 >>6 useable; 16 >>14 useable ; 64 >>62 useable host addresses.
If, for instance, we consider a 255.255.255.192 netmask, we can see that we are able to split the
network into 4 subnetworks.
Each subnet will have 62 possible addresses.
–subnet 1: from 1 to 62
–subnet 2: from 65 to 126
–subnet 3: from 129 to 190
–subnet 4: from 193 to 254
The missing addresses are reserved for SRI–NIC administration and subnet broadcasting.
See following illustration example.
325
NETWORKING
Possible Netmasks for Class C Network
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
SUBNET 2
NETMASK : 255.255.255.192
CT_SBC1
CT_OC1
192.100.9.66
192.100.9.67
192.100.9.4
AW2
192.100.9.2
192.100.9.3
GATE1
192.100.9 Network
GATE2
SUBNET 1
GATE3
192.9.100.5
192.100.9.6
CT_OC2
192.100.9.132
NETWORKING
AW1
CT_SBC2
CT_OC3
192.100.9.131
192.100.9.212
SUBNET 3
CT_SBC3
192.100.9.213
SUBNET 4
Note:
For Class A or Class B subnetworks, consult the Network Administrator of the Site.
3-5
Netmask Declaration
Note:
Use the ”sys–reconfig” utility that allows you to change hostname, IP address and
netmask.
Refer to Chapter 3 for details.
326
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
CHAPTER 10 – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
1
TO BE DONE ONCE A YEAR
1. Verify the integrity of the external cable connections to the peripheral devices, including the
network connections.
2. Clean the monitor and the keyboard.
3. Clean the inside of the computer box. Use an appropriate DATA VACUUM CLEANER such as
46–194427P392.
Open the CPU box by referring to chapter 4 Disassembly/Reassembly Procedures, Job Card
DR001. Pay special note to the Electrostatic Discharge precautions when working inside the CPU
box.
Carefully vacuum out the system, carefully attending to heavy accumulation spots such as the
Processor area.
Note:
The use of compressed air is not recommended. Blowing dust out with a stream of air is not
recommended because of the ESD (Electro–Static Discharge) hazards to components, and
the dust hazard to the personnel in the area near the cleaning activity.
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
4. Save Site’s parameters on a new Configuration Cdrom. When AW has completed its startup, select
SaveConfiguration from the Admin menu :
This allows you to have your back–up Configuration Cdrom renewed at least once a year.
You can review the data on your laptop
5. Check that your AW system is properly declared into the GIB database.
327
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
2
sm 5178823-100
TO BE DONE DURING THE IMAGE SOURCE MAINTENANCE OR
ONCE A YEAR MINIMUM
D To be done for the color monitors: Display the SMPTE pattern from the Browser, and check
monitor(s) alignment. See ”Console Monitor Adjustment Procedure” (Service tools installing
SMPTE pattern) using the SMPTE pattern in Chapter 3, section 2-6-1 for details on monitor
alignment. Adjust Brightness and Contrast levels so that the Grey scale is integrally displayed.
D Dicom Print tests : Verify that the SMPTE pattern displayed on the image monitor is compatible
with the image printed on the film. Address any discrepancies with the Customer before making
changes to the filming setups. See Chapter 7 for details on camera operations.
D Repair loose external cable connections to peripheral devices, including network connections.
D Login as root:
root [Return]
password : operator [return]
D Check for disk usage and available disk space for the FileSystem partitions.
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
– Check for disk usage: Refer to Chapter 4, TSG003 for details
df –k [Return]
Verify that / and /export/home filesystems ARE NOT, in any case, close to 100% maximum disk
usage, in order to allow System to write data in these partitions.
D Check for any unwanted ”core” file, which could take unnecessary disk space.
– Login as root
– Remove CORE files
find / –name core –type f –print [Return]
rm <dir_name>/core [Return]
(if any)
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE CORE DIRECTORY UNDER /export/home/sdc
D Save Site’s configuration on new Configuration Cdrom and write date on the label.
Use a new Cdrom each time (do not use rewitable Cdroms) so you make sure you are not deleting
any previous configuration that could be needed later.
Refer to Chapter 1, IST009 for details.
D Create a boot diskette
Refer to chapter1, Job Card IST009, section 5–3 for instructions.
D Create a Kickstart diskette
Refer to chapter4, Job Card TSG008, for instructions.
D Check FILMING directory
Refer to Chapter 7 (Filming):
– Refer to section 3-1 for Communication Checks.
– Refer to section 3-2 for Filming utility commands.
328
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
D Remove LOGFILES which became too big
cd /export/home/sdc/logfiles [Return]
ls [Return]
IF YOU SEE SOME FILES LIKE FOLLOWING:
arslog*
arslog.FriAug906:15:01.Z
arslog.FriAug910:15:03.Z
browserlog*
browserlog.FriAug906:15:01.Z
browserlog.FriAug910:15:03.Z
browserlog.FriAug915:15:08.Z
..............
{prompt} :
You can DELETE ALL *.Z FILES by the following command:
\rm *.Z [Return]
Note:
The command ”\rm” avoid you to reply to confirmation questions.
Note:
The system periodically cleanups this kind of files.
Refer to Chapter 4, Job Card TSG005 of this manual
Run the diagnostics program during lunchtime, for example, and check the results. The tests must
pass without errors.
D Shutdown the Advantage Workstation. This will cleanup the ” /tmp ” directory automatically.
This can also be done by the Customer, as often as necessary, (before a scheduled Main power
shutdown, for example) by using the shutdown utility described in Chapter 3.
329
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
D Run the HP Diagnostics utility to monitor system performances from the dedicated HP Insight
Diags Cdrom (XW8400 + XW8200)
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
3
sm 5178823-100
TO BE DONE EVERY 5 YEARS: SYSTEM BATTERY REPLACEMENT
The System board integrated battery has a limited life of about 5 years.
When the battery fails, the workstation repeatedly looses all its configuration settings.
Replace the battery with a CR2032 coin type manganese/lithium battery available from most
workstation stores or photo shops.
Procedure
XW8200:
To replace the battery, refer to XW8200 Service Manual , 5124262–100 at chapter 4. page 86.
When this is done, you must enter the BIOS and run the Setup program to check BIOS configuration
of the workstation.
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
XW8400:
To replace the battery, refer to XW8400 Service Manual , 5180567–100 at chapter 4. page 76.
When this is done, you must enter the BIOS and run the Setup program to check BIOS configuration
of the workstation.
330
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
Preventive Maintenance Date : .....................................
F.E.Name : ........................................................
Hospital Name : ...................................................
Room Number or System ID : ........................................
External cables visual check :
OK
KO
State cable(s) to be replaced asap : ..........................
...............................................................
Workstation’s vents cleanup
Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse checks and cleanup
Save Site parameters on new Cdrom and label
Display SMPTE pattern and check image geometry. Do not adjust
color, brightness and contrasted unless required by customer.
Check MOD operation
Check CD–R / DVD operation
Check Filming operation
Run HP Diagnostics reliabilty program (optional)
Make sure that all pieces of documentation and backup software
are available on site.
Store the new Configuration cdrom in a safe place.
CPU box replaced ?
YES
NO
New licenseId number :.............................
Check that your AW is properly declared into GIB database
331
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
Check for ”Filesystem full”
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
Preventive Maintenance Date : .....................................
F.E.Name : ........................................................
Hospital Name : ...................................................
Room Number or System ID : ........................................
External cables visual check :
OK
KO
State cable(s) to be replaced asap : ..........................
...............................................................
Workstation’s vents cleanup
Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse checks and cleanup
Save Site parameters on new Cdrom and label
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
Check for ”Filesystem full”
Display SMPTE pattern and check image geometry. Do not adjust
color, brightness and contrasted unless required by customer.
Check MOD operation
Check CD–R / DVD operation
Check Filming operation
Run HP Diagnostics reliabilty program (optional)
Make sure that all pieces of documentation and backup software
are available on site.
Store the new Configuration cdrom in a safe place.
CPU box replaced ?
YES
NO
New licenseId number :.............................
Check that your AW is properly declared into GIB database
332
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
Preventive Maintenance Date : .....................................
F.E.Name : ........................................................
Hospital Name : ...................................................
Room Number or System ID : ........................................
External cables visual check :
OK
KO
State cable(s) to be replaced asap : ..........................
...............................................................
Workstation’s vents cleanup
Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse checks and cleanup
Save Site parameters on new Cdrom and label
Display SMPTE pattern and check image geometry. Do not adjust
color, brightness and contrasted unless required by customer.
Check MOD operation
Check CD–R / DVD operation
Check Filming operation
Run HP Diagnostics reliabilty program (optional)
Make sure that all pieces of documentation and backup software
are available on site.
Store the new Configuration cdrom in a safe place.
CPU box replaced ?
YES
NO
New licenseId number :.............................
Check that your AW is properly declared into GIB database
333
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
Check for ”Filesystem full”
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
Preventive Maintenance Date : .....................................
F.E.Name : ........................................................
Hospital Name : ...................................................
Room Number or System ID : ........................................
External cables visual check :
OK
KO
State cable(s) to be replaced asap : ..........................
...............................................................
Workstation’s vents cleanup
Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse checks and cleanup
Save Site parameters on new Cdrom and label
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
Check for ”Filesystem full”
Display SMPTE pattern and check image geometry. Do not adjust
color, brightness and contrasted unless required by customer.
Check MOD operation
Check CD–R / DVD operation
Check Filming operation
Run HP Diagnostics reliabilty program (optional)
Make sure that all pieces of documentation and backup software
are available on site.
Store the new Configuration cdrom in a safe place.
CPU box replaced ?
YES
NO
New licenseId number :.............................
Check that your AW is properly declared into GIB database
334
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
Preventive Maintenance Date : .....................................
F.E.Name : ........................................................
Hospital Name : ...................................................
Room Number or System ID : ........................................
External cables visual check :
OK
KO
State cable(s) to be replaced asap : ..........................
...............................................................
Workstation’s vents cleanup
Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse checks and cleanup
Save Site parameters on new Cdrom and label
Display SMPTE pattern and check image geometry. Do not adjust
color, brightness and contrasted unless required by customer.
Check MOD operation
Check CD–R / DVD operation
Check Filming operation
Run HP Diagnostics reliabilty program (optional)
Make sure that all pieces of documentation and backup software
are available on site.
Store the new Configuration cdrom in a safe place.
CPU box replaced ?
YES
NO
New licenseId number :.............................
Check that your AW is properly declared into GIB database
335
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
Check for ”Filesystem full”
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
Preventive Maintenance Date : .....................................
F.E.Name : ........................................................
Hospital Name : ...................................................
Room Number or System ID : ........................................
External cables visual check :
OK
KO
State cable(s) to be replaced asap : ..........................
...............................................................
Workstation’s vents cleanup
Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse checks and cleanup
Save Site parameters on new Cdrom and label
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
Check for ”Filesystem full”
Display SMPTE pattern and check image geometry. Do not adjust
color, brightness and contrasted unless required by customer.
Check MOD operation
Check CD–R / DVD operation
Check Filming operation
Run HP Diagnostics reliabilty program (optional)
Make sure that all pieces of documentation and backup software
are available on site.
Store the new Configuration cdrom in a safe place.
CPU box replaced ?
YES
NO
New licenseId number :.............................
Check that your AW is properly declared into GIB database
336
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
APPENDIX A – GLOSSARY & LINUX COMMAND
1
GLOSSARY
This glossary contains a list of LINUX terms commonly used
ABSOLUTE PATHNAME
The list of directories starting with the root directory, specified as /, down through the file system tree
structure to the file or directory in question, with each directory along the way separated from the
others with an additional / character. The other types of pathnames are: simple and relative
pathnames.
ACCOUNT
The means by which a user accesses the system and the system administrator assigns space for the
user’s files and directories. Usernames and passwords are specific to the accounts.
ALIAS
An alias is a user–specified abbreviation, or alternate string, for a standard command string.
APPEND
Attach to the end.
APPEND OUTPUT
Attach redirected output to the end of a file.
Any word (string of characters separated by spaces or tabs) occurring after the command in a
command line.
ARITHMETIC OPERATOR
Symbols used to indicate and execute addition (+), subtraction (– ), multiplication (*), and division.
BACKGROUND
The place where a command, or commands, are run while commands are still being typed in the
foreground, with background and foreground commands executing apparently simultaneously.
BUG
Any problem or error in the design or coding of a program.
337
APPENDIX A
ARGUMENT
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
CASE–SENSITIVE
Treating lower–case and upper–case characters as two kinds of characters with separate functions.
CHILD DIRECTORY
The directory directly below the current working directory in the file system tree structure.
COLON MODE
In vi, the mode where files are written or quit the program. Type ”:” when in command mode to access
colon mode. Besides command mode and colon mode, vi has insert mode.
COMMAND
A string of characters typed to the system, expecting it to respond by performing a certain function
unique to that command line. The command is sometimes called the “verb” of the command line
“sentence”.
COMMAND EDITING
Modifying a previous command line for reuse as a new command.
COMMAND LINE
A string of characters beginning with a command followed by arguments, which aren’t necessarily
required, including options, filenames, and other expressions.
APPENDIX A
COMMAND MODE
In vi, the mode where moving and deleting commands are typed, as well as changing text commands
that access insert mode. vi starts out in command mode; the other modes are insert mode and colon
mode.
COMMAND PROMPT
The string of characters that the system types indicating it is ready to accept and interpret the next
command line. Often, the command prompt includes the name of the system.
COMMAND REPETITION
Repeating a previous command line, or portion of one, for reuse as a new command line.
338
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
COMMAND SUBSTITUTION
Substituting a portion of a previous command line for reuse as a new command line.
CONCATENATE
Literally, to link together in series. For LINUX, to type a file on the screen.
CONSOLE
When you log in at the actual machine, rather than accessing the machine from another machine, you
log in on the console.
CONTROL CHARACTERS
Keys that require that you press and hold down the <CTRL> key while typing the associated character
to perform a certain function. For example, <CTRL> <U> deletes the current command line before
execution. Control keys extend the functionality of the keyboard.
COORDINATED UNIVERSAL TIME
See Greenwich Mean Time.
CURRENT DIRECTORY
See working directory.
CURSOR
APPENDIX A
The rectangular portion of the screen that moves as you type on the keyboard, indicating your current
position on the screen.
DEBUG
To attempt to fix problems with programs.
DIRECTORY
A “container” for files and other directories that resides within the LINUX file system in a tree structure.
Directories and their associated files can be created (make), moved, copied and removed. Really,
directories are a special type of file.
DOWNTIME
Time when the computer is not working because of maintenance or an unknown problem.
339
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
ECHO
The way that the system types back onto the screen the keys that you press.
EDITOR
See text editor.
EMPTY DIRECTORY
A directory that doesn’t contain any files or directories.
END–OF–FILE CHARACTER
<CTRL> <D> the character used to indicate when you have finished typing in a file.
ERROR MESSAGE
A character string that the system types to let you know that there is a problem with a command, or
perhaps with something else. Usually, the error message will give you some idea of how to correct the
problem.
ESCAPE KEYS
Keys that require that you press and release the <ESC> key before typing the associated character.
Escape keys are a way of extending the functionality of the keyboard.
EXPRESSION
APPENDIX A
An expression is a string of characters that signifies a certain meaning to the system.
FILE
A “container” for text or binary data. Files can be created, moved, copied, listed, and removed, or
deleted.
Text files are a good way to save memos, phone lists, programs, and other portions of text. Use a text
editor to create and modify text files.
FILENAMES
The name assigned to a file. Do not use special characters in the filename, because the system may
misinterpret the filename as something else.
FILENAME EXTENSION
A portion of a filename appended to the end, often demarcated with a period character.
340
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
FILE PROTECTION
The way that the system maintains some security over the contents of your files.
FILE SYSTEM
In the case of LINUX, a tree–structured network of files and directories, through which you can move
to access the files and directories contained in it.
FILE SYSTEM HIERARCHY
The structure of the file system, consisting of a tree of files and directories, with a root directory at the
“top” and directories acting as parent directories and child directories throughout.
FILLING
The process of placing a series of words on a line until the end of that line, and so on. The formatter
fills text unless you type a command, such as the line break command .br, indicating that it do
otherwise.
FOREGROUND
The place where commands are typed at the command prompt for the system to execute. Type an
ampersand character at the end of a command line to have the system execute that command line in
the background, while continuing to type commands at the command prompt for execution in the
foreground.
FORMATTER
GREENWICH MEAN TIME
The time at the Greenwich meridian, from which all the time zones on the earth are established.
Sometimes known as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
HARDCOPY
A copy of a text file that is on a piece of paper, not stored somewhere on the computer.
HIDDEN FILES
Files that don’t show up in a simple listing, because they have a period character as the first character
in their filename.
341
APPENDIX A
See text formatter.
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
HIERARCHY
See file system hierarchy.
HISTORY MECHANISM
The way that the system keeps track of commands that have been typed previously so that they can
be reused with command repetition and command editing.
HOME DIRECTORY
The directory you are in when you first log in to the system, which is also your personal root directory
to all the files and directories you create in your own area.
HOSTNAME
The name of a machine, or host.
INDENT
To put spaces or tabs before a section of text, particularly at the beginning of a paragraph.
INSERT MODE
For vi, insert mode is the mode in which text is inserted or changed; you exit by typing <ESC>. The
other vi modes are: command mode and colon mode.
INTERACTIVE PROGRAM
APPENDIX A
A program that requires commands to be typed after it has been started, rather than executing its
function in full after a single command line is entered.
INTERRUPT
To stop the execution of a command or program.
JOB CONTROL
The way that the system keeps track of all the commands run in the foreground and background, as
well as all the commands that other users may run on the system.
KEYBOARD
A part of the workstation, similar to a typewriter, that permits characters to be input and displayed on
the screen.
342
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
LEFT–JUSTIFY
To put characters up against the left margin, or side of the page.
LINE BREAK
A way to stop the flow of filling, so that a line of text ends at a specific point, with any further words
appearing on the next line.
LINE SPACE
A way to indicate a blank vertical spacing equivalent to one line, usually mentioned when formatting.
LOGIN
Gaining access to the system, usually by typing a username and password, so that a work session on
the computer can be begun.
LOGIN PROMPT
The string of characters that the system types to let you know that it is ready to interpret your
username when you decide to type it.
LOGOUT
Ending access to the system, usually when the work session is ended, prevents an unauthorized user
from having access to your account, perhaps causing damage to one of your files, or accessing
sensitive information.
In this case, the – character is marker for options, so that when you type a command with an option,
the system can figure out that you have typed an option, not another kind of command argument.
MESSAGE OF THE DAY
A portion of text that the system may type at log in. The system administrator sometimes creates this
message to let users know about downtime or other important system events.
MODE
See command mode, colon mode, or insert mode.
MOUSE
A small, rectangular part of the workstation, with three buttons and a wire running out of it, that
permits better control of the window system, when it is running.
343
APPENDIX A
MARKER
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
NATURAL LANGUAGE
The languages that people, as opposed to machines, speak, read, or write in societies and cultures of
all eras.
OPERATING SYSTEM
A collection of programs that monitors the use of the machine and supervises the other programs
executed by it. Currently, Redhat 7.3 is used for AW on Linux.
OPERATOR
See arithmetic operator.
OPTION
A portion of the command line sometimes compared with an adverb because it modifies the effect of
the command you type.
OUTPUT REDIRECTION
See redirecting output.
PACIFIC STANDARD TIME
The standard time on the West coast of the United States, established primarily by the distance from
Greenwich, England.
PARENT DIRECTORY
APPENDIX A
The directory above “this” directory in the file system tree structure.
PASSWORD
A character string that you type, usually just after your filename, to get access to the system. Keep
your password secret, and change it when you think someone discovers what it is.
PATHNAME
An identifier for the position of a file or directory within the tree structure of the file system. The three
types of pathnames are: simple, absolute, and relative.
344
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
PRINTER
A physical device that takes electrical signals, interprets them, and types them out onto paper.
PRINTOUT
A piece of paper, produced by a printer, that has the image of the characters from a file on it.
PROGRAM
A series of instructions that the system executes when you type the program name and commands
associated with the program. A programmer writes the set of instructions and figures out how to get
the system to use them properly.
READ AHEAD
See type ahead.
REDIRECTING OUTPUT
Causing what the system types as the result of a command to go into a file, rather than onto the
screen. Basic output redirection requires use of the > or >> symbols.
RELATIVE PATHNAME
A series of directory names separated by /’s that locates a file or directory with respect to the current,
or working directory. The other types of pathnames are: simple and absolute pathnames.
ROOT DIRECTORY
APPENDIX A
The “top” directory in the tree structure of the LINUX file system.
RUB OUT
To erase, or delete, from the screen.
SAVE A FILE
See write a file.
SCREEN
See terminal screen.
345
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
SEARCH A FILE
To look through the contents of a file, perhaps with grep, to find a certain character string.
SIMPLE PATHNAME
A file or directory name, without mention of any associated directories, that one uses to access the file
or directory.
SPECIAL CHARACTERS
One of a set of characters that have a meaning to the system, other than their meaning as a simple
character. For instance, the exclamation mark ! has a special meaning for the history mechanism, and
you shouldn’t use it in a filename.
STATUS LINE
For vi, the line the system types at the bottom of the interactive screen to provide information about
the number of characters or lines in a file, or whether an instruction to write the file was successful.
STRING
A series of characters.
SUB–DIRECTORY
The child directory of a parent directory, or any directory below that child directory.
SUSPEND
APPENDIX A
To halt, perhaps temporarily, the execution of a program.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
A person who manages the system, providing accounts, and hopefully solving any problems you have
with the computer.
TABLET
See mouse tablet
TERMINAL SCREEN
A flat, rectangular part of the workstation that you look at to see what you type to the system and what
it types back.
346
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
TEXT
Combinations of characters in strings, sometimes forming a comprehensible language of command
lines.
TEXT EDITOR
A program with which you can create files and modify them. For LINUX, the primary text editor is vi.
TREE STRUCTURE
The way that many people describe the LINUX file system hierarchy, drawing an analogy between the
structure of a tree and the structure of the file system. As with a tree, the file system originates with a
root, a root directory, which “grows” child directories on its branches.
TYPE AHEAD
The way that the system lets you type new commands while it is still interpreting and executing the
current command.
UNIVERSAL TIME
See Greenwich Mean Time.
LINUX OPERATING SYSTEM
The operating system that runs on LINUX workstations. See operating system for more information.
The character string with which you identify yourself to the system, usually assigned by your system
administrator.
WILD CARD CHARACTERS
Characters that have a special meaning to the system, because they specify all filename character
strings that have a certain attribute. For example, the wild card character asterisk, *, indicates a
filename string of arbitrary length.
WINDOW
A portion of the screen in which you can type commands or execute programs while running the
window system.
347
APPENDIX A
USERNAME
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
WINDOW SYSTEM
A set of programs that allows you to divide up the screen into portions where you can type various
commands and run many programs at the same time.
WORD
A character string, separated from other character strings by spaces or tab characters.
WORKING DIRECTORY
The current directory in which, among other activities, you can type commands and list files. When
you first log in, your working directory is your home directory.
WORK SESSION
The time that you access the computer to work or play, between when you log in and when you log
out.
WORKSTATION
A system made up of a keyboard, a terminal screen, a mouse, and a mouse pad, which you can use
for profitable work or healthy recreation.
WRITE A FILE
APPENDIX A
For “vi”, to save the changes you have made to a file, so that when you next access the file ,
the changes will still be there.
2
LINUX COMMAND SUMMARY
Note:
The following is a list of the commands available with this version of LINUX. The most basic
commands and those you will need to know to perform service work have been explained in
greater detail within this manual.
CAUTION
Many of these commands can seriously alter the contents of files. Do not attempt to
use these commands unless you are sure of the results.
348
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
sm 5178823-100
Command
Description
accton
adb
arp
at
atq
atrm
awk
basename
bc
biod
boot
bootsd
bootxy
cat
chgrp
chmod
chown
chroot
cmp
colrm
comm
cp
crontab
csh
cut
date
dc
dd
df
diff
dkinfo
dmesg
domainname
du
dump
echo
ed
egrep
etherfind
ex
expr
system accounting
general–purpose debugger
address resolution protocol
execute a command or script at a specified time
display the queue of jobs to be run at specified times
remove jobs spooled by at or batch
pattern scanning and processing language
display portions of pathnames and filenames
arbitrary–precision arithmetic language
starts servers asynchronous block I/O daemons
system startup procedures
boot SCSI disk
boot Xylogics 440/450 disk
concatenate and display
change the group ownership of a file
change the permissions mode of a file
change ownership of a file
change root directory
perform a byte–by–byte comparison of two files
remove characters from specified columns within each line
display lines in common between two sorted lists
copy files
install, edit, remove or list a user’s crontab file
a shell with a C–like syntax
remove selected fields from each line of a file
display or set the date
desk calculator
convert and copy files with various data formats
reports free disk space on file systems
display line–by–line differences between pairs of text files
disk geometry information
collect system diagnostic messages to form error log
set/display domain name
display the number of disk blocks used per directory or file
copy directories onto a tape for offline storage
echo arguments to the standard output
basic line editor
search a file for a string or regular expression
find packets on the ethernet
line editor
evaluate arguments as an expression
349
APPENDIX A
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
APPENDIX A
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Command
Description
false
fastboot
file
find
ftp
fsck
fsirand
getopt
getty
gettytab
grep
groups
hostid
hostname
id
ifconfig
ifdown
ifup
inetd
init
install
installboot
ipcrm
ipcs
kill
lastlog
ln
login
logout
lpr
ls
magic
mach
make
makedbm
mkdir
mkfs
mknod
more
mount
mt
mv
ncheck
nd
netstat
provide true values
reboot system
determine the type of a file by examining its contents
find files by name, or by other characteristics
file transfer program
check and repair filesystem
install random inode generation numbers
parse command options in shell scripts
set terminal mode
terminal configuration database
pattern searches
displays a user’s group membership
print the numeric identifier of the current host
set or print the name of current host system
print the user name and ID, and group name and ID
configure network interface parameters
bring network card down, without rebooting the system
bring network card up, without rebooting the system
internet server daemon
process control initialization
install files
install bootblocks in a disk partition
remove message queue, semaphore, shared memory ID
report interprocess communication facilities status
send signal to process, or terminate a process
login records
make hard or symbolic links to files
log in to the system
terminate a login shell
send job to printer
list the contents of a directory
file command’s magic numbers table
display the processor type of the current host
maintain, update, and regenerate related programs & files
make a yellow pages dbm file
make a directory
make file system
creates a new file name by the path name pointed to by path
browse or page through a text file
mount file systems
magnetic tape control
move or rename files
convert i numbers to filename
network disk control
display network status
350
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
sm 5178823-100
Command
Description
networks
nfsd
nice
passwd
ping
portmap
print env
protocols
ps
pstat
pwd
quota
rc
rcp
rdate
reboot
restore
rlogin
rm
rmt
route
rpc
rcpinfo
rsh
rwall
sa
savecore
sed
sh
showmount
shutdown
size
sleep
sort
spray
string
strip
stty
su
sync
network name database overview
starts the daemons that handle client filesystem requestchange priority
change password file information
checks to see if another machine is up and running
DARPA port to rpc program number mapper
display environment variables currently set
protocol name database
display the status of current processes
print system facts
display the pathname of the current working directory
display a user’s disk quota and usage
start up commands
remote file copy
set system date from a remote host
restart system
file system restore
remote login
remove (unlink) files or directories
remote magnetic tape protocol server
manipulate routing table
library routines for remote procedure calls
report rpc information
remote shell
write to all users over a network
reports on, cleans up, and maintains accounting files
save OS core dump
stream editor
standard system shell
show all remote mounts
close down the system
display the size of an object file
suspend execution for a specified interval
sort and collate lines
sends a one–way stream of packets to host
a series of characters
remove symbols and relocation bits from an object file
set or alter the options for a terminal
super–user, temporarily switch to a new user ID
update the super block; force changed blocks to the disk
351
APPENDIX A
REV 2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Command
Description
tail
tar
tee
telnet
termcap
test
tftp
time
touch
tr
true
tset
tty
umount
uniq
update
uptime
vi
w
wc
which
who
whoami
wtmp
xedit
display the last part of a file
create tape archives, and add or extract files
replicate the standard output
interface to remote system using TELNET protocol
terminal capability database
return true or false according to a conditional expression
trivial file transfer program
time a command
update the access and modification times of a file
translate characters
provide truth values
establish or restore terminal characteristics
display the name of the terminal
dismounts file systems
remove or report adjacent duplicate lines
periodically update the super block
show how long the system has been up
visual display editor based on ex
who is logged in, and what they are doing
display a count of lines, words and characters
locate a command; display its pathname or alias
who is logged in on the system
display the current effective username
login records
Graphically based editor, that can be used in place of VI,
in most cases
binds client processes to a yp server
print values in a YP database
build and install yellow pages database
print the value of one or more keys from a YP map
APPENDIX A
ypbind
ypcat
ypinit
ypmatch
352
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
REVISION HISTORY
REV
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
A
July 2006
First draft release
B
October 2006
Updated release for Hii review
1
October 2006
Initial release for Pilot sites
2
February 2007
PAGES
Initial release for Production sites
NUMBER
5178823-100TPH
353
354
SIZE
A4
REVISION
2
AW VolumeShare 2 (AW4.4)
GE Medical Systems
REV 2
sm 5178823-100
Blank page.
354